MP' .11 
 
 liVi'ii 
 
 mi? •;. ''H 
 
 !'!i 1^ 
 
 11 
 
 '|l):l!l!! 
 
 If, 
 
 mm. 
 
 
 i 111 11 
 
 
 Jii 'iiiiiiil llllll I II 
 
 tU)(HouiiM)iiiMiiiiiuifniMiiii( (iiJiitMiitii 
 
 ■ itiMiitr 
 
 
 1 ! 
 
 i ill n^ 
 
 I Hi 
 
 luiiiiin 
 
 UitUi FHHiJ 
 
 nnintn n fir f t 
 
THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 PRESENTED BY 
 
 PROF. CHARLES A. KOFOID AND 
 
 MRS. PRUDENCE W. KOFOID 
 
THE 
 
 MOTIVE POWER OF ORGANIC LIFE, 
 
 AND 
 
 MAGNETIC PHENOMENA 
 
 OF 
 
 TERRESTRIAL AND PLANETARY MOTIONS, 
 
 WITH THE 
 
 APPLICATION OF THE EVER-ACTIVE AND ALL-PERVADING AGENCY 
 
 OF 
 
 MAGNETISM, 
 
 TO THE 
 
 NATURE, SYMPTOMS, AND TREATMENT 
 
 OF 
 
 CHRONIC DISEASES. 
 
 BY HENRY HALL SHERWOOD, M. D. 
 
 NEW-YORK. 
 H. A. CHAPIN & CO., 138 F U LT ON- S TRE ET. 
 
 MDCCCXLI. 
 

 ■ - A - 
 
 ZP:32.2 
 
 Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1841, by H. H. Sherwood, 
 M. D., in the Clerk's OfiQce of the District Court of the Southern Distict of New-York. 
 
 Pat. O«o» ^^• 
 
 PRINTED BY JARED W. BELL, CORNER OP ANN AND NASSAU-STREETS. 
 

 PREFACE. 
 
 In demonstrating the Motive Power of Organic Life in the following 
 work, I have endeavoured to present the subject to the reader in a plain, 
 concise, and simple manner, divested entirely of the abstruse metaphysics 
 in which it has been heretofore involved. 
 
 The Motive Power is in the Nervous System, and hence the necessity 
 of describing this system to show the connection of that power with it. 
 
 To effect the first object, I have availed myself of a general and concise 
 description of the Nervous System, communicated to the British Associa- 
 tion for the advancement of Science, by William Charles Henry, and also 
 of a more particular description of it by Mr. Geo. Combe ; to which I 
 have added extracts from Spurzheim and Bichat, and a lecture of M. 
 Broussais on the Cerebellum — all of which I have illustrated with nu- 
 merous engravings ; presenting, in the whole, the most popular and inte- 
 resting views of the Nervous System, and of its Physiology, as taught in 
 the rival schools of London and Paris. 
 
 In presenting the views of Terrestrial and Planetary Motions, derived 
 from Magnetic Phenomena, with their attendant influences upon the 
 Motive Power of Organic Life, I have adhered to my plan of giving to the 
 reader in connection every subject in a plain and concise way, without 
 halting in my course to notice every idle theory that has been invented to 
 explain them. 
 
 On the subject of the application of the ever-active and all-pervading 
 influence of Magnetism to the nature, symptoms, and treatment of Chro- 
 nic Diseases, I have been guided by the immutable laws of the magnetic, 
 natural or mechanical forces, which have resulted in the successful de- 
 velopement of the nature, symptoms, and treatment of a large class of 
 chronic diseases, which have consigned to a premature grave, every 
 
IV 
 
 year, so many millions of the fairest, most amiable and talented portion of 
 our race. 
 
 The almost uniformly disastrous results of the common treatment of 
 this class of diseases, furnish a melancholy commentary on the uncertainty 
 of the common symptoms, — as deplorable as the knowledge of the nature 
 of the class of diseases founded upon them. 
 
 The best physicians have long deplored the want of that knowledge of 
 these diseases which should produce the same satisfactory results as 
 those obtained in the treatment of acute diseases. Dr. Armstrong com- 
 menced a long and arduous investigation of the character of chronic dis- 
 eases, for the purpose of increasing our knowledge of their symptoms and 
 treatment, but he did not live to finish the elaborate work which he con- 
 templated on this subject.* In the mean time Professor Hahnemann insti- 
 
 * " If any one were to assert, in unqualified terms, that medicine is a conjectural and 
 vague art, it were easy to refute him, by proving its great certainty in many acute 
 diseases ; and if any one were to ask what part of physic is most defective, we might 
 point out chronic diseases, since in them our efforts have hitherto been the most in- 
 effectual. It is for want of having discriminated the general difference of results in 
 the treatment of acute and chronic diseases, that some have so much underrated, and 
 others so much overrated, the powers of the medical art. Speak of acute diseases, and 
 we may justly maintain the present utility of our profession ; speak of chronic diseases, 
 and we must with regret confess its present imperfection. If any practitioner should be 
 generally unsuccessful in the treatment of acute diseases, the fault must be his own, 
 provided he be consulted in the earliest stages : for the united agencies of blood-letting, 
 purgatives, mercurials, opium, and blisters, will commonly control the very elements of 
 these diseases, when opportunely and judiciously directed ; and if any one will still be 
 so stubborn as to reject the use of some of the most powerful instruments which we 
 possess, the failures are rather to be attributed to himself, than to the inefficiency of me- 
 dical treatment. 
 
 "As we cannot make such a confident declaration as to chronic diseases, though we 
 can often palliate and sometimes cure them, we are constrained to acknowledge, either 
 that their nature is more irremediable, or the means employed are less efficacious. 
 
 " The means which we administer in chronic diseases are numerous, but most of them 
 ambiguous, and questionable at the best ; whereas in acute diseases, our means are few, 
 and their operation plain and indisputable. The long catalogue of prescriptions for 
 chronic diseases, at once indicates that all is not right in our pathology, as it implies 
 that each prescription is liable to fail, and that the whole may be successfully required. 
 
 " Wherever we have any thing like principles to guide us, our prescriptions are ex- 
 tremely limited ; wherever we have no fixed principles to guide us, our prescriptions 
 accumulate with emphical rapidity. But what, it may be reasonably enquired, is the 
 principal cause of all this complexity of formulse in chronic diseases ? Undoubtedly it 
 arises from that vagueness of opinion which exists respecting the nature of these dis- 
 eases in their onset, and in the greater part of their progress ; and so long as we attempt 
 to cover our ignorance by such terms as nervous, bilious, dyspeptic, spasmodic, and 
 the like, so long shall our practice be mere experiment in most chronic affections. We 
 may make a sort of druggist's shop of the stomach of every patient laboring under chro- 
 
tuted a new theory of the phenomena of diseases of every class, and found- 
 ed his Homcepathic practice of infinitesimal doses of medicine upon it ; 
 which theory now distinguishes its votaries, and which, with Animal 
 Magnetism, is now making progress both in Europe and this country. 
 M. Lugol, however, has no confidence in the common symptoms or 
 treatment of tuberculous diseases known to the profession, and he calls 
 uopn them to abandon both, and pursue some other which is less fallible.* 
 
 nic disease, by alternately cramming it with most of the articles of the pharmacoposas ; 
 but we shall not, probably, advance in the treatment, until we deduce pathological prin- 
 ciples, from cautiously marking the rise and progress of the symptoms, and exploring 
 their seats and effects. For several years past, it has been part of my employment to 
 collect facts on chronic diseases, and as the enquiry will not be completed for many 
 years to come, in the mean time I otier a few brief results of my observation and expe- 
 rience in regard to them, &c." 
 
 * From the Medico-Chirurgical Review, for January, 1841. 
 DISPARAGEMENT OF AUSCULTATION, BY M. LUGOL, OF PARIS. 
 
 The following are extracts from the fourth lecture on the formation of tubercles in 
 internal organs : — 
 
 " The numerous checks and repeated deceptions to which physicians are daily ex- 
 posed in the diagnosis and treatment of tuberculous diseases, do they not prove 
 that it is necessary to leave the beaten track of inquiry and pursue some other which is 
 less fallible ? You all know that auscultation and percussion are useless in the diagnosis 
 of pulmonary tubercles. Both alike insuflRcient to announce the commencement of the 
 mischief, they are superfluous at the very time that they become capable of indicating 
 the presence of the tubercles ; for then these are discoverable by other means, and, alas ! 
 are too far advanced in their developement to warrant our hopes of arresting their pro- 
 gress — at least in the generality of cases. I will even go a step farther, and say that the 
 unlimited confidence placed by the greater number of practitioners of the present day in 
 auscultation and percussion, has had the effect of too often inspiring a fatal security in 
 many tuberculous diseases, which are thereby allowed to advance in their progress, un- 
 til this is revealed by physical phenomena at a period when remedial measures have but 
 little chance of effecting any good. 
 
 " But what are the means, you will say to me, that are to be substituted in the room 
 of auscultation and percussion.' I answer, gentlemen, induction. Examine by these 
 boasted methods this patient, and tell me what results you obtain. Negative results, 
 you will reply. And yet I maintain that he is tuberculous ; for his father, his mother, 
 and his brothers have all died of tuberculous disease ; and he himself is affected with it 
 in his chest at the present moment. Believe me, this plan is much less deceptive than 
 the other one. I tell you, the inductive method cannot mislead you, for nature is inva- 
 riable in its causes as in its effects ; and the external signs of tuberculous scrofula must 
 give you assurance that similar morbid productions exist in internal organs, especially 
 in the lungs. f 
 
 " It is by viewing the question from this elevated point of view, by studying it in all 
 
 t M. Lugol is mistaken in regard to tlic certainty of this method ; for nothmg is more common than to 
 find all the external signs of tuberculous disease, without tuberculisation of the lungs; and this fact is dis- 
 closed by the absence of the magnetic symptoms, while their presence give the first notice of the com- 
 mencemeut of the disease in the lungs, even before the cough commences. 
 
VI 
 
 Such is the testimony of these men, and, I may add, that of every 
 other physician whose opinion is of any value. 
 
 Notwithstanding, however, such testimony, which is verified by every 
 day experience, a great majority of the profession are following the ex- 
 amples of the most arrant quacks, in pretending to be able to cure this 
 class of diseases with the common remedies. 
 
 There are, also, some physicians, who, having given up every other 
 remedy recommended in the books, still adhere to iodine, as a forlorn 
 hope, notwithstanding it has been tested many thousand times by other 
 physicians, and discarded as useless. Among the latter, I am pleased to 
 be able to rank so distinguished a physician as Dr. Warren, of Boston. In 
 a recent valuable work, he says : 
 
 " A medicine has been introduced of late years, which has acquired much reputation 
 in this and other forms of scrofulous disease. It is not surprising that physicians should 
 with avidity take up any remedy which may promise to relieve so common and invete- 
 rate a disease as scrofula, especially one analogous in its character to those of which ex- 
 perience has most approved. I must say that after many years trial of the preparations 
 of iodine, in various forms of scrofulous affection, I have rarely seen any distinct ad- 
 vantages from it." 
 
 In speaking again of the cases in Avhich iodine has been used, he says : 
 
 " Preparations of iodine have not been efficacious in those cases, so far as I have used 
 them. The tincture of iodine has been given to the amount of forty-five drops three 
 times a day. This quantity was sufficient to produce diarrhoea; but after a long use had 
 no effect on the tumor. The same must be said of the hydriodates of soda and potassa, 
 which I have frequently given in this and other scrofulous cases, in the dose of seven 
 grains three or four times a day, till it irritated the stomach and bowels, without influ- 
 encing the cure." 
 
 In order to ascertain the unknown causes of obvious effects, one of two 
 modes is generally adopted. In the one generally chosen, in accordance 
 
 its ensemble, that you will be best enabled to comprehend it in its details; and these can- 
 not be understood by the special methods of examination which have been so much re- 
 commended of late years. 
 
 " The tuberculisation of internal organs exhibits in its developement the same pheno- 
 mena as tubercles which are outwardly situated — there is no pain, and nothing of me- 
 chanical derangements. 
 
 " The existence of tubercles in the lungs is so frequent, that I must admit that they 
 are present in all scrofulous persons. You know that all, or almost all, patients, who 
 have pulmonary tubercles, are, or have been at some time, affected with tubercles in the 
 neck ; the majority have had during infancy this external sign of scrofula ; while others 
 have had it at a later period of life. I believe that pulmonary tubercles frequently exist 
 in early youth ; but it is chiefly about the age of puberty that they are apt to be deve- 
 loped. 
 
vu 
 
 with common philosophy, theories are first constructed, and then facts 
 collected to confirm them ; but a sufficient number is very rarely found 
 for this purpose, and these theories, resting on slight foundations, are 
 consequently almost always fallacious. In the other mode, which is ac- 
 cording to inductive philosophy, a great number of corresponding facts is 
 collected, and the theory or knowledge derived from a comparison of 
 them is true and substantial. 
 
 The latter mode should always be adopted to establish a theory on a 
 foundation that cannot be overturned. For if a theory in philosophy be 
 true, the number of comparative facts that may be brought to its support, 
 is absolutely innumerable and without end. So that if a certain number 
 of facts is not sufficient to satisfy any person of the truth of the theory, 
 any additional number can be presented to him, that may be necessary 
 for such purpose. 
 
 The theory upon which this work is founded, is the result of that in- 
 ductive process which has elicited the true causes of universal motion, 
 and the laws by which it is governed ; and the demonstrations on the 
 electro-dynamic rings have since placed the hypothesis beyond a doubt. 
 
 The part of this theory which belongs to the human form, and to 
 chronic diseases, derives, from the causes of motion, new and invariable 
 symptoms of those diseases which belong to the class hypertrophy, or 
 chronic swellings of the organs and limbs ; and the laws of magnetic 
 motion explain the causes of their phenomena. 
 
 When the discoveries thus made, were compared with the various 
 theories of the medical profession on these subjects, it was easy to see 
 how fallacious the latter necessarily were, and with what ease they might 
 be overturned and buried for ever in one common ruin. 
 
 Entertaining the same views of our knowledge of this class of diseases, 
 and of the remedies for it, with Dr. Armstrong, I commenced the inves- 
 tigation of the primary phenomena of this class of diseases in 1809, in a 
 field, which had never been explored, with strong inducement to pursue 
 it, and soon discovered new and unerring symptoms by which to distin- 
 guish the disease in any of the organs or limbs. The investigation of 
 these symptoms unfolded the laws of motion in man and other animals, 
 and a knowledge of these laws has enabled me to determine and apply 
 the natural remedies for this class of diseases, with great success, during 
 a period of more than twenty-five years. 
 
Vlll 
 
 In describing the cases, which I have introduced, to illustrate the new 
 symptoms, and the action of the natural remedies for them, I have been 
 as brief as possible, purposely avoiding reports of the state of the pulse, 
 and other unimportant symptoms not necessarily belonging to the disease. 
 
 A great majority of the cases were first treated by other physicians, and 
 besides mercury and iodine, had been under the use of a great variety of 
 other remedies, and when these failed, many of the patients had resorted 
 to root, steam, charm, Indian and cancer doctors, and to an endless variety 
 of elixirs of health, purifiers of the blood, cough drops, panaceas, catholi- 
 cons, and Indian specifics, and continued their use until they became satis- 
 fied of the futility of such remedies. 
 
 Some of these patients had taken from one to thirteen bottles of Swaim's 
 Panacea, a compound of syrup of sarsaparilla and muriate of mercury, in 
 imitation of the long known Lisbon diet drink. And although, from its 
 frequent failure, very little dependence is now placed upon it, there can 
 be no doubt that it sometimes exercises a favorable influence upon this 
 class of diseases. 
 
 It will be observed by those who are acquainted with the classification 
 of diseases, that I have added to the common and acknowledged cases of 
 scrofula, a number of diseases not classed as such by nosologists or other 
 medical writers ; and I have done so, because the symptoms and the dis- 
 organizations, presented by dissections, are identical and uniform ; and, 
 moreover, because they can always be cured by the same remedies, which 
 demonstrate the unity of chronic diseases of this class, by which the 
 practice is greatly simplified, and a knowledge of it easily attained. 
 
 I have substituted the term tubercula, from tuber, a knot, knob, or lit- 
 tle swelling, for scrofula, a little pig; because there is a manifest simi- 
 larity between the verbal sign and the thing signified in the one selection, 
 and apparently none in the other. The disease is a swelling of the knobs, 
 or little round organized bodies called lymphatic glands, pervading every 
 part of the body with consequent hypertrophy, or general swelling of the 
 organs, limbs, and other structures. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 Objects of physiology — Nervous System — Cerebrum, or brain proper — Cerebellum — 
 Medulla oblongata — Spinal marrow — Nerves — Of motion — Of sensation — Of the 
 three senses — Ganglionic system. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Views of the structure of the brain — Description of the brain and nervous system — 
 Relation between the structure and the functions of the brain. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Ganglionic system of vegetative life — View of the ganglions connected with the great 
 sympathetic nerve — Ganglionic system of phrenic life — View of the grn^lions of 
 the brain — Cerebellum — Medulla oblongata — Spinal nerves — Excreting system — 
 Secreting system — Secreting and excreting systems of vegetative life. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Sensation and motion — Elements of sensation — Sensation — Inclination — Motion — Num- 
 ber of phrenological organs in the brain — Broussais on the cerebellum. 
 2 
 
10 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Application of the motive power of the human sj'stem to determine the character of a 
 large class oi chronic diseases — Magnetic symptoms — Causes of the symptoms — 
 Tuberculations, — Cause of Tuberculations — Revolutions of the Earth's axis. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Remedies for tubercular diseases — Directions for using the remedies — Observations on 
 the use of the remedies in different cases. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Cases of tubercular disease of the organs. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Tubercnla of the Spine — Lecture of M. Sanson on caries of the lumbar vertebrae — 
 Review of the Lecture of M. Sanson. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Tubercula of the joints and limbs — Color of the skin in chronic tubercula — Appendix 
 — Glossary — Index. 
 
THE 
 
 NERVOUS SYSTEM, ETC 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Objects of Physiology — Nervous System — Cerebrum, or Brain Proper — Cerebellum — 
 Medulla Oblongata — Spinal Marrow — Nerves — Of Motion — Of Sensation — Of the 
 Three Senses — Ganglionic System. 
 
 " The science of Physiology has for its object to ascertain, to analj'^ze, 
 and to classify the qualities and actions which are peculiar to living bo- 
 dies. These vital properties reside exclusively in organized matter, 
 which is characterized by a molecular arrangement, not producible by 
 ordinary physical attractions and laws. Matter thus organized consists 
 essentially of solids, so disposed into an irregular network of laminae and 
 filaments, as to leave spaces occupied by fluids of various natures. 
 " Texture" or " tissue" is the anatomical term by which such assemblages 
 are distinguished. Of these the cellular, or tela cellulosa, is most ele- 
 mentary, being the sole constituent of several, and a partial component of 
 all the tissues and systems. Thus the membranes and vessels consist 
 entirely of condensed cellular substance ; and even muscle and nerve are 
 resolvable, by microscopic analysis, into globules deposited in attenuated 
 cellular element. 
 
 But though the phenomena, which are designated as vital, are never 
 found apart from organization, and have even by some natuaralists been 
 regarded as identical with it, yet in the order of succession vital actions 
 seem necessarily to stand to organized structures in the relation of antece- 
 dents ; for the production of even the most rudimentary forms and tex- 
 tures implies the previous operation of combining tendencies or " vital 
 affinities." The origin and early developement of these vital tendencies, 
 and of organized structures, are beyond the pale of exact or even of ap- 
 proximative knowledge. But it is matter of certainty, that life is the 
 
12 
 
 product only of life ; that every new plant or animal proceeds from some 
 pre-existent being of the same form and character ; and thus that the 
 image of the great Epicurean poet, " Quasi cursores vitai lampada tra- 
 dunt," possesses a compass and force of illustration "which, as a supporter 
 of the doctrine of fortuitous production, he could not have himself con- 
 templated. 
 
 The popular notions respecting life are obscure and indeterminate ; nor 
 are the opinions even of philosophers characterized by much greater 
 distinctness or mutual accordance. Like other complex terms, "life" 
 can obviously be defined only by an enumeration of the phenomena which 
 it associates. This enumeration will comprehend a greater or smaller 
 number of particulars, according to the station in the scale of living beings 
 which is occupied by the object of survey. In its simplest manifestation, 
 the principle of life may be resolved into the functions of nutrition, se- 
 cretion, and absorption. It consists, according to Cuvier, of the faculty 
 possessed by certain combinations of matter, of existing for a certain time 
 and under a determinate form, by attracting unceasingly into their com- 
 position a part of surrounding substances, and by restoring portions of their 
 own substance to the elements. This definition comprehends all the 
 essential phenomena of vegetable life. Nutritive matter is drawn from 
 the soil by the spreading fibres of the root, through the instrumentality of 
 spongioles or minute turgid bodies at their extremities, which act, accord- 
 ing to Dutrochet, by a power which he has called " endosmcsis." The 
 same agency raises the nutrient fluid through the lymphatic tubes to the 
 leaves, where it seems to undergo a kind of respiratory process, and be- 
 comes fit for assimilation. These changes, and the subsequent propulsion 
 of the sap to the different parts and textures, plainly indicate independent 
 fibrilliary movements, which are represented in animal life by what Bichat 
 has termed " the phenomena of organic contractility." The power re- 
 siding in each part of detecting in the circulating fluid, and of appropri- 
 ating matters fitted to renovate its specific structure, is designated in the 
 same system by the term " organic sensibility." 
 
 Ascending from the vegetable to the animal kingdom, the term " life" 
 advances greatly in comprehensiveness. The existence of a plant is limit- 
 ed to that portion of space in which accident or design has inserted its 
 germ ; while animals are for the most part gifted with the faculties of 
 changing their place, and of receiving from the external world various 
 impressions. Along with the general nutritive functions, the higher attri- 
 butes of locomotion and sensation are therefore comprised in the extended 
 compass of meaning which the term " life" acquires with the prefix 
 " animal." The nutritive functions, too, emerging from their original sim- 
 plicity, are accomplished by a more complex mechanism, and by agencies 
 further removed from those which govern the inanimate world. 
 
13 
 
 Locomotion is effected either by means of a contractile tissue, or of 
 distinct muscular fibres. These fibres have been said to consist of slobules 
 resembling, and equal in magnitade to, those of the blood, disposed in 
 lines, in the elementary cellulosity, which by an extension of the analogy 
 is compared to serum. But the latest microscopical observations of Dr. 
 Hodgkin are opposed to this globular constitution of the contractile fibre- 
 " Innumerable very minute but clear and fine parallel lines or striae may be 
 distinctly perceived, transversely marking the fibrillEe." Irritability, or 
 the faculty of contracting on the application of a stimulant, is a property 
 inherent in the living fibre. It is an essential element of all vital opera- 
 tions, except of those which have their seat in the nervous system, such 
 as sensation, volition, the intellectual states, and moral affections. All 
 the phenomena of life, in the higher animals, may then be ultimately 
 resolved into the single or combined action of these two elementary pro- 
 perties, — irritability and nervous influence, each residing in its appropriate 
 texture and system. 
 
 These preliminary remarks are designed to unfold the principles to be 
 followed in classifying the vital functions. In general or comparative 
 physiology, a strictly scientific arrangement would contemplate first the 
 phenomena pf the most elementary life, and would successively trace the 
 more perfect developement of those simple actions and their gradual" 
 transition into more complex processes, as well as the new functions, 
 superadded in the ascending scale of endowment. But such a mode of 
 classification is wholly inapplicable to the particular physiology of man 
 and of the more perfect animals, viewed by itself and without reference 
 to inferior orders of beings ; for the nutritive functions of this class, which 
 correspond with the elementary actions of the simplest vegetable life, are 
 effected by a complex system of vessels and surfaces, deriving their vital 
 powers from contractile fibres, and controlled, if not wholly governed by 
 nervous influence. It is then manifest, that in the higher physiology the 
 general laws of contractility and " innervation" must precede the descrip- 
 tion of the several functions, which all depend on their single or united 
 agency. The particular functions will afterwards be classed, as they 
 stand in more immediate relation to one or other of the two essential 
 principles of life. 
 
 In the present state of physiological knowledge, it is impossible to 
 determine absolutely, and without an opening to controversy, whether 
 the functions of muscle or those of nerve are entitled to precedency. If 
 each were equally independent of the other in the performance of their 
 several offices, the question of priority would resolve itself into one of 
 simple convenience. The actions of the nervous system, if contempla- 
 ted for the short interval of time during which they are capable of per- 
 sisting without renovation of tissue, are entirely independent of the 
 
14 
 
 contractile fibre. But it is certain that the cooperation of nerve is 
 required in most, if not in all, the actions of the muscular system. Thus 
 the voluntary muscles in all their natural and sympathetic contractions 
 receive the stimulant impulse of volition through the medium of nerve ; 
 and though the mode, in which the motive impression is communicated 
 to the involuntary muscles, is still matter of controversy, there seems 
 sufficient evidence* to sanction the conclusion that nerve is in this case 
 also the channel of transmission ; — " that the immediate antecedent of 
 the contraction of the muscular fibre is universally a change in the 
 ultimate nervous filament distributed to that fibre." If this be correct, 
 the physiological history of muscle cannot be rendered complete vs^ithout 
 reference to that of nerve. 
 
 In the higher manifestations of life, nervous matter is invested with 
 the most eminently vital attributes. It is the exclusive seat of the 
 various modes of sensation, and of all the intellectual operations ; or, 
 rather, it is the point of transition, where the physical conditions of the 
 organs, which are induced by external objects, pass into states of mind, 
 becoming perceptions ; and where the mental act of volition first impresses 
 a change on livins; matter. These two offices of conductino; motive 
 impressions from the central seat of the will to the muscles, and of pro- 
 pagating sensations from the surface of the body and the external organs 
 of sense to the sensorium commune, have been of late years shown to 
 reside in distinct portions of nervous substance. 
 
 The honour of this discovery, doubtless the most important accession 
 to physiological knowledge since the time of Harvey, belongs exclusively 
 to Sir Charles Bell. It constitutes, moreover, only a part of the new 
 truths, which his researches have unveiled, regarding the general laws 
 of nervous action, and the offices of individual nerves. His successive 
 experiments on function, guided always by strong anatomical analogies 
 in structure, in origin, or in distribution, have led to the entire remodel- 
 ling of nervous physiology, and to the formation of a system of arrange- 
 ment, based on essential affinities and on parity of intimate composition, 
 instead of on apparent sequence or proximity of origin. Among the 
 continental anatomists, MM. Magendie and Flourens have contributed 
 most largely to our knowledge of this part of physiology ; the former 
 by repeating and confirming the experiments of Bell, as well as by 
 various original inquiries ; the latter by his important researches into the 
 vital offices of the brain and its appendages. Much light, too, has been 
 thrown on the functions of several of the encephalic nerves, and especially 
 of those supplying the face and its connected cavities, by Mr. Herbert 
 
 * See " A Critical and Experimental Enquirj' into the Relations subsisting between 
 Nerve and Muscle," in the 37th vol. of the Edinburgh Medical and Surgical 
 Journal. 
 
FIG. 1. 
 
 View of the top of the Brain. 
 
 A A — Front part of the Brain. 
 ■R pj I Right and left hemisphere. 
 
15 
 
 Mayo, who has analyzed their anatomical composition, and pursued their 
 course with singular precision, and has thus been enabled to correct some 
 errors of detail in the system of Sir Charles Bell. 
 
 NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
 
 In man, and in other vertebrated animals, the nervous system consists 
 of the cerebrum, cerebellum, medulla oblongata, medulla spinalis, and of 
 the encephalic, spinal, and ganglionic nerves. It seems most natural to 
 observe this order of anatomical sequence in recording what is known of 
 nervous functions. 
 
 CEREBRUM, OR BRAIN-PROPER. 
 
 The physiology of the brain has received of late years very conside- 
 rable accessions, and its vital offices, viewed as an entire organ, have now 
 probably been ascertained with sufficient precision. Some portion of 
 this newly acquired knowledge has been gathered from experiments on 
 living animals, but the greater and more valuable part has flowed from 
 the study of comparative developement. In this latter field of inquiry, 
 Tiedemann's elaborate history of the progressive evolution of the human 
 brain during the period of foetal existence, with reference to the compa- 
 rative structure of that organ in the lower animals, merits an early and 
 detailed notice. It had been discovered by Harvey, that the foitus in 
 the human species, as well as in inferior animals, is not a precise facsimile 
 of the adult, but that it commences from a form infinitely more simple, 
 and passes through several successive stages of organization before 
 reaching its perfect developement. In the circulatory system, these 
 changes have been minutely observed and faithfully recorded*. Tiede- 
 mann has traced a similar progression in the brain and nervous system, 
 and has moreover established an exact parallel between the temporary 
 states of the foetal brain in the periods of advancing gestation, and the 
 permanent developement of that organ at successive points of the animal 
 scale. The first part of his work is simply descriptive of the nervous 
 system of the embryo at each successive month of foetal life. It consti- 
 tutes the anatomical groundwork upon which are raised the general laws 
 of cerebral formation, and the higher philosophy of the science. In the 
 second part, Tiedemann has established, by examples drawn from all the 
 
 • See an excellent Essay on the Developement of the Vascular System in the Fmttt^ 
 of Vertebrated Animals, by Dr. Allen Thomson. 
 
16 
 
 grand divisions of the animal kingdom, the universaUty of the law of 
 formation, as traced in the nervous system of the human foetus, and the 
 existence of one and the same fundamental type in the brain of man and 
 of the inferior animals. 
 
 The facts which have been unfolded by the industry of Tiedemann) 
 besides leading to the universal law of nervous developement, throw 
 important light upon nervous function : for it is observed that the 
 successive increments of nervous matter, and especially of brain, mark 
 successive advances in the scale of being ; and, in general, that the 
 developement of the higher instincts and faculties keeps pace with that of 
 brain. Thus, in the zoophyta, and in all living beings destitute of nerves, 
 nothing that resembles an instinct or voluntary act is discoverable. In 
 fishes the hemispheres of the brain are small, and marked with few 
 furrows or eminences. In birds they are much more voluminous, more 
 raised and vaulted than in reptiles ; yet no convolutions or anfractuosities 
 can be perceived on any point of their surface, nor are they divided into 
 lobes. The brain of the mammalia approaches by successive steps to 
 that of man. That of the rodentia is at the lowest point of organization. 
 Thus the hemispheres in the mouse, rat, and squirrel are smooth and 
 without convolutions. In the carnivorous and ruminating tribes, the 
 hemispheres are much larger and marked by numerous convolutions. In 
 the ape tribe the brain is still more capacious and more convex ; it covers 
 the cerebellum, and is divided into anterior, middle, and posterior lobes. 
 It is in man that the brain attains its greatest magnitude and most elabo- 
 rate organization. Sommerring has proved that the volume of the brain, 
 referred to that of the spinal marrow as a standard of comparison, is 
 greater in man than in any other animal. 
 
 Various attempts have been made of late years, chiefly by the French 
 physiologists, to ascertain the functions of the brain by actual experiment. 
 It will appear from a detailed survey of their labours, that little more 
 than a few general facts respecting the function of its larger masses and 
 great natural divisions have flowed from this mode of research. The 
 oflflces of the smaller parts of cerebral substance cannot with any 
 certainty be derived from the phenomena that have been hitherto observed 
 to follow the removal of those parts, since the most practised vivisectors 
 have obtained conflicting results. Nor is it difiicult, after having per- 
 formed or witnessed such experiments, to point out many unavoidable 
 sources of fallacy. In operations on living animals, and especially on 
 so delicate an organ as the brain, it is scarcely possible for the most skil- 
 ful manipulator to preserve exact anatomical boundaries, to restrain 
 hsemorrhage, or prevent the extension to contiguous parts, of the morbid 
 actions consequent upon such serious injuries, and to distinguish the 
 secondary and varying phenomena, induced by the pressure of extrava- 
 
17 
 
 sated blood, or the spread of an inflammatory process, from those which 
 are essential and primary. The ablation of small and completely insulated 
 portions of brain must, then, be classed among the "agenda" of experi- 
 mental physiology. 
 
 The most decisive researches, that have been hitherto instituted on 
 the functions of the brain, are those of M. Flourens. His mode of 
 operating was to remove cautiously successive thin slices of cerebral 
 matter, and to note the corresponding changes of function. He com- 
 menced with the hemispheres of the brain, which he found might be 
 thus cut away, including the corpora striata and thalan)i optici, without 
 apparently occasioning any pain to the animal, and without exciting 
 convulsive motions. Entire removal of the cerebrum induces a state 
 resembling coma ; the animal appears plunged in a profound sleep, being 
 wholly lost to external impressions, and incapable of originating motion ; 
 it is deprived, too, according to Flourens, of every mode of sensation. 
 Hence the cerebrum is inferred to Le the organ in which reside the 
 faculties of perception, volition and memory. Though not itself sensible, 
 in the ordinary acceptation of the word, — that is, capable, on contact or 
 injury, of propagating sensation, — yet it is the point where impressions 
 made on the external organs of sense become objects of perception. 
 This absence of general sensibility observed in the brain has also been 
 experimentally demonstrated in the nerves dedicated to the functions of 
 sight, of smell and of hearing, and constitutes, perhaps, one of the most 
 remarltable phenomena that have been disclosed by interrogating living 
 nature. Flourens appears, however, to have failed in proving that all 
 the sensations demand for their perception the integrity of the brain. 
 He has himself stated that an animal deprived of that organ, when 
 violently struck, " has the air of awakening from sleep," and that if 
 pushed forwards, it continues to advance after the impelling force must 
 have been wholly expended. Cuvier has therefore concluded, in his 
 Report to the Academy of Sciences upon M. Flourens' paper, that the 
 cerebral lobes are the receptacle in which the impressions made on the 
 organs of sight and hearing only, become perceptible by the animal, an^ 
 that probably there too all the sensations assume a distinct form, and 
 leave durable impressions, — that the lobes are, in short, the abode of me- 
 mory. The lobes, too, would seem to be the part in which those motions 
 which flow from spontaneous acts of the mind have their origin. But a 
 power of effecting regular and combined movements, "on externa/ stimula- 
 tion^ evidently survives the destruction of the cerebral hemispheres. 
 
 A very elaborate series of experiments on the functions of the brain in 
 general, and especially on those of its anterior portion, have been since 
 performed by M. Bouillaud*. That observer concurs with Flourens io 
 
 •Magendie, Journal de Physiologie, torn. x. p. 36. 
 3 
 
18 
 
 viewing the cerebral lobes as the seat of the remembrance of those sensa- 
 tions which are furnished to us by sight and hearing, as well ns of all 
 the intellectual operations to which these sensations may be subjected, 
 such as comparison, judgment and reasoning. But he proves that the 
 ordinary tactual sensibility does not require for its manifestation the* 
 presence of the brain. For ani'iials entirely deprived of brain were 
 awakened by being struck, and gave evident indications of suffering when 
 exposed to any cause of physical pain. Bouillaud observes, too, thai the 
 iris continues obedient to the stimulus of light, after ablation of the 
 hemispheres, and on thi-> ground calls in question the loss of vision 
 asserted by Flourens. isor are the lobes (he contends,) the only recep- 
 tacle of intelligence, of instincts and of volition : for to admit this 
 proposition of Flourens would be to grant that an animal which retains 
 the power of locomotion, which makes every effort to escape from 
 irritation, which preserves its appropriate attitude, and executes the same 
 movements after as before mutilation, may perform all those actions 
 without the ag-ency of the will or of instinct. Another doctrine of 
 Flourens, which has been experimentally refuted by Bouillaud, is, "that 
 the cerebral lobes concur as a whole in the full and entire exercise of 
 their functions; that v. hen one sense is lost, all are lost; when one 
 faculty disappears, all disappear ;" in short, that a certain amount of cere- 
 bral matter may he cut away without apparent injury, but that when this 
 limit is passed, ail voluntary acts and all perceptions perish simultane- 
 ously. Bouillaud, on the contrary, has descritied several experiments 
 which show that animals, from whom the anterior or frontal part of the 
 brain had been removed, preserved sight and hearing, though deprived of 
 the knowledge of external objects, and of the power of seeking their 
 food. 
 
 The second part of M. Bouillaud's researches is entirely devoted to the 
 functions of the anterior lobes of the brain. These were either removed 
 by the scalpel, or destroyed by the actual cautery, in dogs, rabbits and 
 pigeons. Animals thus mutilated feel, see, hear and smell ; are easily 
 alarmed, and execute a number of voluntary acts, but cease to recognise 
 the persons or objects which surround them. They no longer seek food, 
 or perform any action announcing a combination of ideas. Thus the most 
 docile and intelligent dogs lost all power of comprehending signs or words 
 which were before familiar to them, became indifferent to menaces or 
 care.sses, were no longer amenable to authority, and retained no remem- 
 brance of places, of things, or of persons. They saw distinctly food pre- 
 sented to them, but had ceased to associate with its external qualities all 
 perception of its relations to themselves as an object of desire. The an- 
 terior or frontal part of the brain is hence inferred to be the seat of several 
 intellectual faculties. Its removal occasions a state resembling idiotism, 
 
19 
 
 characterized by loss of the power of discriminating external objects, 
 whicli, however, co-exists v/ith the faculties of sensation. 
 
 It will be unnecessary to describe fully in this place the experiments of 
 Professor Rolando, of Turin, performed in 1S09, and published in Magen- 
 'die's Journal^ torn, iii., 1823, since the more important of his facts have 
 reference, not to the brain-proper, but to the cerebellum. His paper cer- 
 tainly contains some curious anticipations of phenomena, since more ac- 
 curately observed by Flourens and Magendie ; yet as regards the brain, 
 properly so called, his results are vague and inconclusive. Accident, 
 rather than a well matured design, seems to have directed what parts of 
 the brain he should remove ; and from having comprehended in the same 
 injury totally distinct anatomical divisions, he has rendered it impossible to 
 arrive at the precise function of any one part. Thus we are told that 
 injury of the thalami optici and tubercula quadrigemina in a dog was fol- 
 lowed by violent muscular contractions. Now all subsequent experi- 
 menters agree, that irritation of the thalami is incapable of inducing con- 
 vulsive motions; and Flourens has proved that this property has its 
 beo-innino- in the tubercula, — an important fact, which Rolando, with a 
 little more precision in anatomical manipulation, could scarcely have 
 failed to discover. 
 
 Magendie has described* some curious experiments on the corpora 
 striata, which, though closely analogous in their results to those on the 
 cerebellum, have their proper place in this section. Removal of one cor- 
 pus striatum was followed by no remarkable change; but when both had 
 been cut away, the animal rushed violerflj^ forwards, never deviating 
 from a rectilinear course, and striking against any objects in its way. In 
 his lecture of February 7, 1828, Magendie, in the presence of his class, 
 removed both corpora striata from a rabbit. The animal attempted to 
 rush forwards, and, if restrained, appeared restless, continuing in the atti- 
 tude of incipient progression. One thalamus opticus was then cut away 
 from the same animal. The direction of its motion was immediately 
 changed from a straight to a curved line. It continued for some time to 
 run round in circles, turning towards the injured side. When the other 
 thalamus was removed, the animal ceased its motions and remained per- 
 fectly tranquil, with the head inclined backwards. These experiments, 
 it may be observed, furnish no support to the opinions of MM. Foville and 
 Pinel Grandchamps, who have assigned the anterior lobes and corpora 
 striata as the parts presiding over the movements of the inferior extremi- 
 ties, and the posterior lobes and thalami as regulating the superior. 
 
 * Journal dc Physiologic, torn. iii. p. 376 
 
20 
 
 CEREBELLUM. 
 
 It may be regarded as nearly established by modern researches, that the 
 cerebellum is more or less directly connected with the function of loco- 
 motion. The precise nature and extent of its control over the actions of 
 the voluntary muscles are, however, far from being clearly determined. 
 In the higher animals, the mental act of volilion probably has its com- 
 mencing point, as productive of a physical change, in the brain-proper ; 
 though it must be confessed that some of the experiments of Flourens, and 
 all of those of Bouillaud, indicate the persistance of many instinctive, and 
 even of some automatic motions, after destruction of the brain. But 
 there does appear sufficient evidence to prove that those volitions which 
 have motion as their etfect, whatever be their origin, Mhether in the cere- 
 brum, cerebellum, or medulla oblongata,* require for their accomplish- 
 ment the co-operation of the cerebellum. This evidence has been mainly 
 supplied by the same inquirers whose researches on the cerebrum have 
 been already analyzed. 
 
 In the order of time, though not of importance, the experiments of 
 Professor Rolando stand foremost. Injuries of the cerebellum, he ob- 
 served, were always followed by diminished motive power ; and this par- 
 tial loss of power was always in direct proportion to the amount of injury. 
 A turtle survived upwards of two months the entire removal of the cere- 
 bellum, continuing sensible to the slightest stimulus; but when irritants 
 were applied, it was totally unable to move from its place. M Flourens 
 has since arrived at similar, fbt more definitive results. He removed in 
 succession thin slices from the cerebellum. After the first two layers 
 had been cut away, a slight weakness and want of harmony and system in 
 the automatic movements were noticed. When more cerebellic substance 
 had been removed, great general agitation became apparent. The pigeon, 
 which was the subject of operation, retained, as at first, the senses of 
 sight and hearing, but was capable of executing only irregular unconnect- 
 ed muscular efforts. It lost by degrees the power of flying, of walking, 
 and even of standing. Removal of the whole cerebellum was followed by 
 the entire disappearance of motive power. The animal, if laid upon its 
 back, tried in vain to turn round ; it perceived and was apprehensive of 
 blows, with which it was menaced, heard sounds, seemed aware of dan- 
 ger, and made attempts to escape, though ineffectually, — in short, while 
 it preserved, uninjured, sensation and the exercise of volition, it had lost 
 all power of rendering its muscles obedient to the will. The cerebellum 
 is hence supposed by Flourens to be invested with the office of " ballanc- 
 ing, regulating or combining separate sets of muscles and limbs, so as to 
 
 * Flourens, Memoires de V Academic, torn. ix. 
 
FIG. 2. 
 
 Side view of the brain, cerebellum, and medulla oblono-ata. 
 
 C — Cerebrum. 
 
 D — Cerebellum. 
 
 E — Medulla oblonjrata. 
 
21 
 
 brino^ about those complex movements depending on simultaneous and 
 conspiring eflforts of many muscles, which are necessary to the different 
 kinds of progressive motion." Bouillaud, who has successfully disputed 
 several of the opinions of Floureiis respecting the functions of the cere- 
 brum, fully concurs with him as to those of the cerebellum. 
 
 Yet, it must be admitted, that there exists also conflicting expermental 
 testimony on this subject. M. Fodera* states that he has found the re- 
 moval of a part of the cerebellum to be followed, in all cases, either by 
 motion backwards, or by that position of the body which precedes retro- 
 grade movement The head is thrown back, the hind legs separated, and 
 the fore legs extended forwards, and pressed firmly against the ground. 
 More complete destruction of the cerebellum occasions the animal to fall on 
 its side ; but the head is still inclined rigidly backwards, and the anterior 
 extremities agitated with convulsive movements, tending to cause retrograde 
 motion of the body. Injuries of one side of the cerebellum were observed 
 to produce paralysis of the same side of the body ; as might, indeed, have 
 been anticipated from the direct course, without decussation, of the resti- 
 form columns which ascend to form the cerebellum. Magendie has de- 
 scribed'j" precisely the same results. A duck, whose cerebellum had been 
 destroyed, could swim only backwards. In the course of his experimental 
 lectures, Magendie, having removed the cerebellum in several rabbits, 
 demonstrated to his class the phenomena of retrograde movement, exactly 
 as they have been recorded by Fodera. It is, then, impossible to regard 
 the conclusions of Flourens as fully established, opposed as they are by 
 those of so skilful an experimenter as Magendie. Indeed, while Flourens 
 conceives the cerebellum to preside over motion, MM. Foville and Pinel 
 Grandchamps attribute to it the directly opposite function of sensation : 
 and this doctrine seems to derive some support from anatomical disposi- 
 tion ; for it has been proved by Tiedemann that the cerebellum is nothing 
 more than an expansion or prolongation of the corpora restiformia, and 
 posterior columns of the spinal meSuUa, which columns have been shown 
 by Sir Charles Bell to have the office of conveying sensations. But it is 
 not the less true that all recent experiments, even those of Fodera and Ma- 
 gendie, point to some connexion between the cerebellum and the power 
 of voluntary motion. In the present state of our knowledge it would be 
 unsafe to contend for more than the probable existence of some such gene- 
 ral relation. 
 
 This, then, is all that seems deserving of confidence respecting the func- 
 tions of the cerebellum itself. . But there are some singular phenomena 
 •which, though residing in other structures more or less near to the cere- 
 bellum, are so analogous to those already described as to call for notice in 
 
 • Journal de Physique, July, 1823. f Ibid. torn. iii. p. 157. 
 
23 
 
 this place. Magendie has described* the results of injury to the crura 
 cerebelli of a rabbit. Complete division of the right crus was followed by 
 rapid and incessant rotation of the body upon its own axis, from left to 
 right. This singular inotioii having continued two hours, Magendie 
 placed the rabbit in a basket containing hay. On visiting it the following 
 day he was surprised to find the anim;l slill turning round as hefi.re, and 
 completely enveloped in hay. The eyes were rigidly fixed in difl'erent 
 lines ; that of the injured side being directed forwards and downwards, 
 that of the other side backwards and upwards. If both crura were divided, 
 no motion followed. Magendie hence concluded that these nervous cords 
 are the conductors of impulsive forces -which counterbalance or.e another, 
 and that from the equilibrium of these two forces result the power of 
 standino-, and even of maintainins; a stale of rest, and of executins; the 
 different voluntary motions. The inquiry naturally presented itself, 
 whether these forces are inherent in the crura themselves, or emanate 
 from the cerebellum or some other source. To determine this question, 
 portions of substance were removed from both sides of the cerebellum, 
 but unequally, so as leave intact three-fourths on the left side and one- 
 fourth only on the right. The animal rolled towards the right side, and 
 its eyes were fixed in the manner already described. But the left crus 
 being divided, the animal rolled to the left side. Hence it appears that 
 section of the crus has more influence over the lateral rotation of the 1 ody 
 than injury of the cerebellum itself; and that the impulsive force does 
 not belong (at least exclusively) to the cerebellum. When the cerebel- 
 lum was divided precisely in the median line, the animal seemed suspend- 
 ed between two opposing forces, sometimes inclining towards one side, as 
 if about to fall, and again thrown suddenly back to the opposite side. Its 
 eyes were singularly agitated, and seemed about to start from the orbits. 
 Similar movements followed division of the continuous fibres in the pons 
 Varolii. Serres has described a case of similar rotary motion occurring 
 in the human subject. A shoemaker habituated to excess in alcoholic 
 liquors, after great intemperance, was seized with an irresistible disposi- 
 tion to turn round upon his own axis, and continued to move so till death 
 ensued. On inspecting the brain, one of the crura cerebelli was found 
 much diseased, and this was the only alteration of structure visible in any 
 part of the nervous system. 
 
 M. Flourens has published in a recent volume of the Mcmohes de 
 V Academic des Sciences-\ a description of some striking abnormal motions 
 which followed the division of the semicircular canals of the ears of birds. 
 Thouo-h these organs have no anatomical relation to the cerebrum or cere- 
 bellum, the altered motions resulting from their division are so analogous 
 
 • Jmtrnal de Physiologie, torn. iv. 399 t Tom. is. p. 454. 
 
FIG. 3. 
 
 A front view of the Medulla Oblongata, lateral nerves, Pons Varolii, 
 
 and fifth pair of nerves. 
 
 M — Medulla oblongata. A — Pons Varolii. B — Corpus Pyramidale. C — Corpus 
 Olivary. D — Spinal accessory nerve. E — Par Vagum. F — Glosso-Pharyngeal 
 nerve. G — Portio Dura of the seventh. H — Fourth Nerve. I I — Anterior column of 
 the Spinal Cord. a — Fifth nerve. b — Ganglionic branch of the fifth nerve 
 c — Ganglion, d — Motor branch of the fifth nerve. 
 
23 
 
 to those observed by Magendie after lesions of the corpora striata and 
 crura, that they may be most conveniently described in the same section. 
 Two of the semicircular canals are vertical, and one horizontal. Division 
 of the horizontal canals on each side occasioned a rapid horizontal move- 
 ment of the head from right to left, and back again, and loss of the power 
 of maintaining an equilibrium, except when standing, or when perfectly 
 motionless. There was also the same singular rotation of the animal 
 round its own axis which follows injury of the crura cerebelli. Section 
 of the inferior vertical canal on both sides produced violent vertical move- 
 ments of the head, with loss of equilibrium in walking or flying. There 
 was in this case no rotation of the body upon itself, but the bird fell back- 
 wards, and remained lying on its back. When the superior vertical ca- 
 nals were divided, the same phenomena were observed as in section of the 
 inferior, except that the bird fell forward on its head, instead of backward. 
 All the canals, both vertical and horizontal, having been divided, in an- 
 other pigeon, violent and irregular motions in all directions ensued. 
 When, however, the bony canals were so cautiously divided as to leave 
 their internal membranous investment uninjured, these abnormal motions 
 were not produced. It is, therefore, in these membranes, or rather in the 
 expansion of the acoustic nerve which overspreads them, that the cause of 
 this phenomenon must reside. No explanation is proposed by Flourens 
 of the control thus exercised by a nerve supposed to minister exclusively 
 to the sense of hearing, over actions so entirely opposite in character. It 
 is remarkable that the irregular movements should observe the same di- 
 rection in their course as the canals, by the section of which they are in- 
 duced. Thus the direction of the inferior vertical canal is posterior, that 
 of the superior is anterior, corresponding perfectly with the directions of 
 the abnormal motions. 
 
 MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 
 
 The medulla oblongata, or " bulbe rachidien," is reducible into six 
 columns, or three pairs, viz: two anterior or pyramidal, which partially 
 decussate, two middle or olivary, and two posterior or restiform, which 
 proceed forwards without crossing. It is continuous in structure with the 
 spinal marrow, and enjoys, by virtue of this relation, the same function of 
 propigating motion and sensation. But it is distinguished from the spinal 
 medulla by special and higher attributes, being endowed with the faculty 
 of ori2:inatino; motions, as well as with that of regculatin": and conductinoj 
 them. The medulla oblongata, with the cerebrum and cerebellum, consti- 
 tute, in short, according to Flourens,* those portions of the nervous sys- 
 
 • Memoires de I'Academie des Sciences, torn. ix. p. 478 
 
24 
 
 torn which exercise their functions " spontaneously or primordially," and 
 which originate and preside over llie vital actions of the subordinate parts. 
 To this latter order of parts, which require an exciting or regulatins; influ- 
 ence, belongs the spinal medulla. In the superior class, Flourens seems 
 to assign even a higher place to the medulla oblongata than to the cere- 
 brum or cerebellum. For the cerebrum, he observes, may act without the 
 cerebellum ; and this latter organ continues to regulate the motions of the 
 body after removal of the cerebrum. But the functions of neither cere- 
 brum nor cerebellum survive the destruction of the medulla oblono-ata, 
 which seems to be the common bond and central knot combining all the 
 individual parts of the nervous system into one whole. 
 
 The medulla oblongata was regarded by Legallois as the mainspring or 
 " premier mobile" of the inspiratory movements. He repeated before a 
 Commission of the Institute of France the leading experiments on which 
 his opinion rested.* In a rabbit, five or six days old, the larynx was 
 detached from the os hyoides and the glottis exposed to view. The 
 brain and cerebellum were then extracted without arresting the inspira- 
 tions, which were marked by four simultaneous motions, — a gaping of 
 the lips, an opening of the glottis, the elevation of the ribs, and the con- 
 traction of the diaphragm. Legallois next removed the medulla oblon- 
 gata, when all these motions ceased together. In a second rabbit, instead 
 of extracting at once the entire medulla, it was cut away in successive 
 thin slices. The four inspiratory movements continued after the removal 
 of the three first slices, but ceased after the fourth. It was found that the 
 fourth had reached the origin of the eighth pair of nerves. If, instead of 
 destroying the part in which this motive influence resides, it be simply 
 prevented from communicating with the muscles, which are .subservient 
 to inspiration, a similar effect ought to be produced. Now it is obvious 
 that the medulla oblongata must transmit its influence to the muscles 
 which raise the ribs, through the medium of the intercostal nerves, and 
 therefore of the spinal marrow, and to the diaphragm through the phrenic 
 nerves, and to these through the spinal marrow. In another rabbit, 
 therefore, the medulla spinalis was cut across about the level of the sev- 
 enth cervical vertebra. The effect of this operation was to arrest the 
 elevation of the ribs, the other three inspiratory motions still continuing. 
 A second section was made near the first cervical vertebra, and conse- 
 quently above the origin of the phrenic, with the effect of suspending the 
 contraction of the diaphragm. The par vagum was next divided in the 
 neck, and the opening of the glottis ceased. There remained then, of the 
 four inspiratory movements, only the gfiping of the lips, which, however, 
 was sufficient to attest that the medulla oblongata still retained the power 
 
 * (Euvres de Legallois, torn. i. p. 247 
 
25 
 
 of producing them all. This power had ceased to call forth the other 
 three motions, only because it no longer had communication with their 
 organs. 
 
 M. Flourens, in a recent memoir already referred to,* has confirmed 
 and extended lh,e views first announced by Legallois. He has distinctly 
 traced the comparative action of the medulla spinalis and oblongata, on 
 respiration, in the four classes of vertebrated animals. In birds, he found 
 that all the lumbar and the posterior dorsal medulla might be destroyed 
 without impeding the respiratory function, though it was arrested by re- 
 moval of the costal medulla. In the mammalia the costal also misrht be 
 removed, for though the raising of the ribs ceased, the action of the dia- 
 phragm continued as long as the origin of the phrenic nerve remained un- 
 injured. In frogs, all the spinal medulla may be destroyed, except the 
 portion whence spring the nerves supplying the hyoideal apparatus. Eve- 
 ry part of the spinal marrow may be removed in fishes without affecting 
 respiration; for all the nerves distributed to the respiratory organs of 
 fishes have their origin in the medulla oblongata. It is hence apparent that 
 the spinal marrow exercises only a variable and relative action on the re- 
 spiratory function, in the different classes of vertebrated animals. In de- 
 scending from the higher to the lower points of this scale, the spinal mar- 
 row is seen progressively to disengage itself from cooperation in these 
 movements, while the medulla oblongata tends more and more to concen- 
 trate them in itself, till in fishes the proper functions of the two medullte 
 show themselves completely distinct, the spinal ministering to locomo- 
 tion and sensation, and the oblongata to respiration. The medulla oblon- 
 gata is, then, the " premier moteur," or the exciting and regulating prin- 
 ciple of the i-nspiratory movements in all classes of vertebrated animals ; 
 besides participating, by virtue of its continuity with the spinal marrow, 
 in the proper functions of that organ. From a second series of experi- 
 ments, M Flourens concludes that there exists a point in the nervous 
 centres at which the section of those centres produces the sudden annihi- 
 lation of all the inspiratory movements ; and that this point corresponds 
 with the origin of the eighth pair of nerves, commencing immediately 
 above, and ending a little below, that origin, — a result precisely agreeing 
 with that obtained by Legallois. 
 
 SPINAL MARROW 
 
 It is apparent that the functions of the three grand divisions of the ner- 
 vous system, already described, have not yet been distinctly and fully as- 
 
 * Memoircs de VAcademie, torn. ix. 1830 
 4 
 
26 
 
 certained. Our knowledge of those, which next fall under survey, is 
 more definite and substantial. The vital offices of the spinal medulla — 
 regarded by Legallois as the mainspring of life, and as alone regulating 
 the actions of the heart and nobler organs, — are now reduced to convey- 
 ing to the muscles the motive impulse of volition, and to propagating to 
 the sensorium commune, impressions made on the external senses. It is 
 not invested with the power possessed by the cerebrum and cerebellum, 
 and perhaps by the medulla oblongata, of spontaneously originating mus- 
 cular motions. It is mainly, if not exclusively, a conductor ; a medium 
 of communication between the brain and the external instruments of loco- 
 motion and sensation. Flourens, indeed, conjectures that it also has the 
 office of associating the partial contractions of individual muscles into 
 "mouvemens d'ensemble," necessary to the regular motions of the lim.bs. 
 
 Before recording what is known of the spinal cord itself, it will be pro- 
 per to advert to some recent experiments of Magendie on the serous fluid 
 in which it is immersed. It would appear that a quantity of liquid, vary- 
 ing from two to five ounces in the human subject, is always interposed 
 between the arachnoid tunic and the pia mater, or proper membrane of 
 the cord. The intermembranous bag, occupied by this fluid, communi- 
 cates with the ventricular cavities at the calamus scriptorius by a round 
 aperture, often large and patent in hydrocephalic subjects. Magendie has 
 therefore named this serous liquid " cerebro-spinal." In living animals, 
 it issues in a stream from a puncture of the arachnoid. Its removal oc- 
 casions great nervous agitation, and symptoms resembling those of canine 
 madness. The sudden increase of its quantity induces coma. Its pre- 
 sence seems essential to the undisturbed and natural exercise of the ner- 
 vous functions ; and this influence probably is dependent upon its pressure, 
 temperature, and chemical constitution, since any variation of these con- 
 ditions is follow^ed by the phenomena of nervous disorder. 
 
 The great medullary cord is divided by a double furrow into two late- 
 ral halves ; and each of these is again subdivided by the insertions of the 
 ligamenta dentata into two columns, one posterior and one anterior. It 
 has been long known that section of any part of the spinal marrow ex- 
 cludes from intercourse with the brain all those parts of the body which 
 derive their nerves from the cylinder of medulla below the point of injury. 
 The muscles, so supplied, are no longer obedient to the control of the will, 
 and the tegumentary membranes similarly situated entirely lose their sen- 
 sibility. This interruption of the relations which subsist between the 
 central seat of volition and sensation, and the rest of the body, whether 
 due to direct injury of the great nervous masses or communicating nerves, 
 or produced by the pressure of extravasated fluids, by morbid growths, ox 
 by various poisonous matters, constitutes the condition known by the 
 name "paralysis." In cases of this kind it is frequently observed that 
 
27 
 
 the powers of sensation and locomotion are simultaneously impaired or 
 destroyed. But examples are not wanting, even in the earliest clinical 
 records, of the total ioss of one of those faculties with perfect integrity of 
 the other. Such facts naturally suggested the belief that the power of 
 propagiiting sensations, and that of conveying motive impressions, resided 
 in distinct portions of the nervous system. This opinion, however, re- 
 mained mere matter of conjecture until a recent period, when it was une- 
 quivocally establishetl by Sir Charles Bell. From the original experi- 
 ments of that most distinguished physiologist, repeated and confirmed by 
 Magendie, it follows that the faculty of conducting sensations resides ex- 
 clusively in the two posterior columns of the medulla, while that of com- 
 municating to the muscular system the motive stimulus impressed by voli- 
 tion is the attribute of the two anterior columns. The same limitation of 
 function is found in the nervous roots which spring from these separate 
 columns. Thus, each spinal nerve is furnished with a double series of 
 roots, one set of which have their origin in the anterior medullary co- 
 lumn, and one in the posterior. The spinal nerves are, in consequence of 
 this anatomical composition, nerves of twofold function, containing in the 
 same sheath distinct continuous filaments from both columns, and exercis- 
 ing, in the parts to which they are distributed, the double office of conduc- 
 tors of motion and sensation. It will afterwards appear, in our history of 
 individual nerves, that all those which spring from the brain, except the 
 fifth and eighth pairs, possess only a single function. 
 
 Sufficient experimental proof of the foregoing propositions has been fur- 
 nished by Sir Charles Bell and by M. Magendie. Thus, division of the 
 posterior roots of the spinal nerves is uniformly followed by total absence 
 of feeling in the parts of the body to which the injured nerves are distri- 
 buted, while their motive power remains undiminished. Magendie has 
 further observed, that if the medullary canal be laid open, and the two 
 posterior cords be touched or pricked slightly, there is instant expres- 
 sion of intense suffering ; whereas, if the same or a greater amount of irrita- 
 tion be applied to the anterior columns, there are scarcely any signs of ex- 
 cited sensibility. The central parts of the medulla seem also nearly 
 impassible* They may be touched, and even lacerated, according to 
 Magendie, without exciting pain, if precautions are taken to avoid the sur- 
 rounding medullary substance. In general, the properties of the spinal 
 marrow, and especially its sensibility, seem to reside mainly on its surface ; 
 for slight contact, even of the vascular membranes covering the posterior 
 columns, caused acute pain. 
 
 The first experiment of Sir C. Bell consisted in laying open the spinal 
 canal of a living rabbit, and dividing the posterior roots of the nerves that 
 
 * Annales de Chimie et de Physique, torn, xxiii p. 436. 
 
28 
 
 supply the lower limbs. The animal was able to crawl. In his second 
 trial he first stunned the rabbit, and then exposed tbe spinal marrow. On 
 irritating the posterior roots, no motion was induced in any part of the 
 muscular frame ; but on grasping the anterior roots, each touch of the for- 
 ceps was followed by a corresponding contraction of the muscles supplied 
 by the irritated nerve. Magendie has described* the following experi- 
 ments, which he has since declared were made without any knowledge of 
 the prior ones of Sir C. Bell. The subjects chosen for the operation 
 were puppies about six weeks old ; for in these it was easy to cut with a 
 sharp scalpel through the vertebrae and to expose the medulla. In the first 
 the posterior roots of the lumbar and sacral nerves were divided, and the 
 wound closed : violent pressure, and even pricking with a sharp instru- 
 ment, awakened no sensation in the limb supplied by the nerves which 
 had been cut ; but its motive power was uninjured. A second and a 
 third trial gave the same results. Magendie then- divided in another ani- 
 mal, though with some diflSculty, the anterior roots of the same nerves on 
 one side. The hind limb became flaccid and entirely motionless, though 
 it preserved its sensibility. Both the anterior and posterior roots were 
 cut in the same subject with destruction of motion and sensation. In a 
 second paper| Magendie has related the following additional facts : The 
 introduction of nux vomica into the animal economy is well known to 
 give rise to violent tetanic convulsions of the whole muscular system. 
 This property was made available as a test of the functions of the sepa- 
 rate orders of nervous roots. It was found that, while all the other mus- 
 cles of the body were agitated, when under the influence of this poison, by 
 violent spasmodic contractions, the limb, supplied by nerves whose ante- 
 rior roots had been previously divided, remained supple and motionless. 
 But when the posterior roots only had been cut, the tetanic spasms were 
 universal. It would seem, however, that the seats of the two faculties of 
 conducting motion and sensation are not strictly insulated by exact ana- 
 tomical lines, but that they rather pass into each other with rapidl}' de- 
 creasing intensity. Thus irritation of the anterior roots, when connected 
 with the medulla, gives birth, along with motive phenomena, to some 
 evidences of sensibility ; and, vice versa, stimuli applied to the posterior 
 roots, also undivided, occasion slight muscular contractions. In this last 
 case it is, indeed, probable that the irritation travelled from the posterior 
 roots upwards to the brain in the accustomed channel, and gave rise to a 
 perception of pain, which prompted the muscular effort. Indeed, after 
 division of the posterior nervous roots, ordinary stimulants, applied to the 
 ends not connected with the medulla, produced no apparent effects ; 
 though the galvanic fluid directed upon either order of roots gave rise to 
 
 • Joumai de Physiologic, torn. ii. p. 276. August, 1822. f ^id. torn. ii. p. 366. 
 
29 
 
 muscular contractions. These were more complete and energetic when 
 the anterior roots were the subjects of the experiment. 
 
 Besides the evidence thus obtained by direct experiments on living ani- 
 mals, several important facts have been gathered from the pathology of 
 the nervous system in man. These consist of cases of insulated paralysis 
 of either motion or feeling, referred to the changes in structure observed 
 after death. Sir Charles Bell has himself recorded several examples of 
 this kind strongly confirming his experimental results ; and others of simi- 
 lar tendency are scattered through thn successive volumes of Magendie's 
 Journal.* But it must be admitted that evidence of this kind is sel- 
 dom distinct and conclusive. The structural changes, induced by disease, 
 are rarely so circumscribed in seat and extent as to represent adequately 
 the operations of the scalpel ; and often when they are thus isolated with- 
 in anatomical bounding lines, they affect, by pressure, or by the spread of 
 the same morbid process, in a degree too slight to leave decided traces, the 
 functions of contiguous parts, thus clouding the judgments of the best 
 pathologists, and invalidating their inferences. There is, however, a very 
 remarkable case described by Professor Royer Collard, to which these ob- 
 jections do not apply. Sprevale, an invalided soldier, was upwards of 
 seventeen years the subject of medical observation in the Maison de Sante 
 of Charenton. This individual remained for the last seven years of his 
 life with the legs and thighs permanently crossed, and totally incapable of 
 motion, though retaining their sensibility. On opening after death the 
 spinal canal, there was found the pultaceous softening {ramollissement) of 
 the whole anterior part of the medulla, and of almost the whole of the 
 fibrous cords which form it. The anterior roots of the spinal nerves had 
 also lost their accustomed consistency ; while the posterior surface of the 
 spinal cord, and its investing membrane, were healthy. Several of the 
 cases observed by Sir Charles Bell furnish also unequivocal proof of the 
 soundness of the views developed by experiment. 
 
 There exist, indeed, few truths in physiology established on so wide 
 and solid a basis of experimental research and pathological observation as 
 those deduced by Sir Charles Bell, the original discoverer, and by Magen- 
 die, his successor in the path of inquiry, respecting the offices of the spinal 
 medulla. This organ may now be regarded as mainly, if not solely, a me- 
 dium of intercourse between the external world and the brain, and again 
 between the brain and the voluntary muscles, its two anterior columns 
 being subservient to motion, its two posterior to sensation. In the pre- 
 sent state of our knowledge it would be fruitless to try to penetrate into 
 the minute philosophy of these actions : but it seems probable, from re- 
 
 * See in particular Dr. RuUier's case, torn. iii. p. 173 ; and Dr. Korefi's, torn, iv. 
 p. 376 
 
30 
 
 cent discoveries on the ultimate anatomy of tissue, that these actions are 
 molecular, having their place in the globular elements, into which all liv- 
 ing textures are resolvable by microscopic analysis ; — that the physical 
 changes, e. g. impressed by external objects on the delicate net-work of 
 nerve which invests the tegumentary membranes and open cavities, are 
 propagated thence, from particle to particle, along the continuous fila- 
 ments, to their origins in the posterior spinal columns, and thence to the 
 central point, where they become objects of perception ; — and that the 
 motive stimulus of volition is similarly transmitted down the anterior co- 
 lu-mis and nerves, to the organs of locomotion. Indeed, it is a legitimate 
 inference from Sir Charles Bell's discoveries, that a simple nervous fila- 
 ment, or medullary collumn, can only propagate an impression in one line 
 of direction, viz : either towards or from the central seat of perception 
 and of will ; and this curious law of nervous actions would seem to point 
 at some insensible molecular motion as their essential condition. 
 
 It remains to investigate the arguments which have been supposed to 
 prove the residence in the spinal marrow of the power of originating and 
 controlling the actions of the heart. This question has been matter of 
 eager controversy, from its bearing upon the general relations of nerve 
 and muscle. Without prejudging this latter topic, it may simplify its fu- 
 ture consideration, and will at the same time be more consistent with 
 strict arrangement, to state here merely the facts which have reference to 
 the spinal medulla. 
 
 The work of Legallois, entitled " Experiences sur le Principe de la Fie, 
 notamment sur celui des Mouvemens du Cmir et sur le Siege de ce Prin- 
 cipe^''''* was the first remarkable essay on the relations between the heart 
 and the spinal cord. It will, however, be sufficient to allude in general 
 terms to the conclusions of Legallois, since they have been entirely sub- 
 verted by the subsequent researches of Dr. Wilson Philip and M. Flou- 
 rens. Legallois's main doctrine was, that the principle which animates 
 each part of the body resides in that part of the spinal medulla whence its 
 nerves have their origin ; and that it is also from the spinal cord that the 
 heart derives the principle of its life and its motion-f. The experimental 
 proof supposed to establish these propositions consisted in destroying in 
 ditferent rabbits portions of the cervical, dorsal, and lumbar medulla. Ces- 
 sation of the heart's action was affirmed to be the constant result of the 
 operation ; but even in some of Legallois's own experiments,^ the mo- 
 tions of the heart continued after eonsiderable injury had been inllicted on 
 the spinal cord, and especially on its lower divisions. Still more une- 
 quivocal is the evidence that has been advanced by Dr. Wilson Philip, in 
 his Inquiry into the Laws of the Vital Functions. His experiments, which 
 
 • (Euvres de Legallois, torn. i. pp. 97, 99, &,c. f P- 259. J pp. 100, 101, 105. 
 
FIG. 4, 
 
 Front view of a section of the Spinal Cord, and Spinal Nerves. 
 
 A — Spinal Cord. 
 
 B — Spinal Nerve. 
 
 C — Motor branch of Spinal Nerve. 
 
 D — Ganglion of posterior branch of Spinal Nerve. 
 
 / 
 
31 
 
 were very numerous and judiciously varied, show that the circulation 
 continues long after entire removal of the spinal marrow, and that by 
 artificially maintaining respiration, the motions of the heart may be almost 
 indefinitely prolonged. Flourens in the 10th vol. of the Alem. de VAca- 
 demie* has lately confirmed Dr. Philip's views : he has shown that the 
 circulation is entirely independent of the spinal marrow. The influence 
 apparently exerted is only secondary, being due to the suspension of the 
 respiralor)'^ movements. Thus all those portions of the spinal marrow 
 which can be destroyed in the different classes of animals without arrest- 
 ing respiration, may be removed without affecting the circulation. In 
 fishes and frogs the entire spinal cord may be destroyed without checking 
 the heart's motions, because in these classes the medulla oblongata pre- 
 sides exclusively over the respiratory function. 
 
 NERVES. 
 
 The classification of nerves, which is most convenient to the physiolo- 
 gist, is based upon their vital properties or functions. Such an arrange- 
 ment would distribute them into — 1, nerves of motion ; 2, nerves both of 
 motion and sensation ; 3, the nerves ministering to the senses of sight, 
 smell, and hearing ; and 4, the ganglionic system, or, according to Bichat, 
 nerves of organic life. Sir Charles Bell has added a fifth class, compris- 
 ing nerves which he supposes are dedicated to the respiratory motions. 
 But it will afterwards appear that the existence of an exclusive system of 
 respiratory nerves is not supported by sufficient evidence. 
 
 The first class of nerves exercising the single office of conveying motioa 
 comprehends the 3rd, 4th, 6th, portio dura of the 7th, the 9th, and per- 
 haps two divisions of the 8th, viz : the glossopharyngeal and spinal ac- 
 cessory. Mr H. Mayo's experiments, detailed in his Anatomical and 
 Physiological Commentaries^ No. 11, (and Journal de Physique, torn, iii.) 
 throw much light on the functions of several of these nerves. The mo- 
 tions of the iris, he shows, require the integrity of the third pair, division 
 of these nerves being always followed by full dilatation of the pupils, 
 which cease to be obedient to the stimulus of light. If the divided end 
 of the nerve, communicating with the eye, be pinched by the forceps, the 
 iris contracts. Hence it is apparent that diminution of the aperture of the 
 pupil is the result of action, and dilatation of the pupil the result of relaxa- 
 tion of the iris. Flourens has shown that complete extirpation of the 
 tubercula quadrigemina also paralyses the iris, and that irritation of those 
 bodies excites its contractions. The same effect is noticed by Mayo to- 
 
 • p. 626. 
 
32 
 
 arise from division or irritation of the optic nerve. He divided the optic 
 nerves within the cranium of a pigeon immediately after decapitation 
 When the end of the nerve connected with the ball of the eye was seized 
 in the forceps, no action ensued ; but Avhen the end attached to the brain 
 w^as irritated, the iris immediately contracted. These several experi- 
 ments clearly indicate the dependence of the iris upon the optic nerve, 
 upon the tubercula from which one root of that nerve springs, and upon 
 the third pair. The stimulus of light impinges upon the retina, is con- 
 veyed along the optic nerve through the tubercle to the sensorium, 
 whence the motive impression is propagated to the iris by the third ence- 
 phalic nerve. 
 
 It is not so easy to define the precise mode of action of the pathetici,or 
 fourth pair of nerves. Sir Charles Bell* supposes that they are destined 
 "to provide for the insensible and instinctive rolling of the eyeball, and 
 to associate this motion of the eyeball with the winking motions of the 
 eyelids." He even conjectures that " the influence of the fourth nerve 
 is, on certain occasions, to cause a relaxation of the muscle to which it 
 goes." It is certain, however, from its exclusive distribution to the supe- 
 rior oblique muscle, that the fourth is a nerve of motion. The sixth 
 nerve is also a nerve of voluntary motion, and is sent to the rectus exter- 
 nus of the eyeball. 
 
 Sir Charles Bell has placed the portio dura of the seventh pair among 
 his respiratory nerves. There is, however, no doubt that it is simply a 
 motive nerve, and that it is indeed the only nerve of motion which sup- 
 plies all the muscles of the face, except those of the lower jaw and palate. 
 Division of this nerve occasions no expression of pain, according to Bell ; 
 but Mayo's experience is opposed to this absence of sensibility. (■ " The 
 motion of the nostril of the same side instantly ceased, after its section in 
 an ass,J and that side of the face remained at rest and placid during the 
 highest excitement of the other parts of the respiratory organs." These 
 and similar observations are all consistent with the opinion that the sev- 
 enth is simply a nerve of voluntary motion. It will afterwards appear 
 that it has no claim to any further endowment. 
 
 Mr. Herbert Mayo infers from his experiments, that the three divisions 
 of the eighth pair are all nerves both of motion and sensation. Thus the 
 glossopharyngeus is a nerve of motion to the pharynx, and perhaps of sen- 
 sibility to the tongue. He observed that " on irritating the glossopharyn- 
 geal nerve in an animal recently killed, the muscular fibres about the 
 pharynx acted, but not those of the tongue. "§ Irritation of the spinal 
 
 * JVatural System of JVerves, p. 358. 
 
 t See Mr. H. Mayo's Anatomical and Physiological Commentaries, Part I. ; and 
 Outlines of Human Physiology, 2nd edit., p. 334. % pp. 105, 107 
 
 § Outlines of Human Physiology, 2nd edit, p. 337. 
 
33 
 
 acccessorv produced both muscular contractions and pain. The par va- 
 gum, he conceives, bestows sensibility on the membrane of the larynx, 
 besides convevino; the motive stimulus to its muscles. This nerve has 
 been the subj'.-ct of experiment from the earliest times, and Legallois has 
 minutely described the results obtained by successive inquirers.* Tbese 
 were sino^ularly discordant, and gave origin to the most opposite theories 
 of the mode of action of the par vagum. In the greater number of expe- 
 riments, section of this nerve was followed, after a longer or shorter inter- 
 val, by death. Piccolhomini contended that the division of the nerve was 
 fatal from its arresting the movements of the heart, and after him Willis 
 supported the same doctrine. By Haller, on the contrary, the cause of 
 death was sought in disturbance of the digestive functions. Bichat and 
 Dupuytren seem to have been the first to obtain a glimpse of the true seat 
 of injury. The former remarked that the respiration became very labori- 
 ous after section of the nerve, and Dupuytren distinctly traced death to 
 asphyxia. Legallois has established by numerous experiments the accu- 
 racy of this last view. He has shown that in very young animals death 
 is the immediate consequence of the operation of cutting either the par 
 vagum or its recurrent branch, and that the suddenness of the effect is due 
 to the narrowness of the aperture of the glottis in early age. In adult 
 animals, the asphyxia is induced by the effusion of serous fluids and ropy 
 discolored mucus into the bronchial tubes and air-cells. More recently, 
 Dr. Wilson Philip has practised the section of the par vagum with an es- 
 pecial reference to its influence upon digestion. He divided the nerve be- 
 low the origin of the inferior laryngeal branch, as in this case the dyspnoea 
 is much less considerable than when the wound is inflicted on the higher 
 portion. I It was found, in all these trials, that food introduced into the 
 stomach after the operation remained wholly undigested. Hence Dr. 
 Philip infers the dependence of secretion upon nervous influence, a conclu- 
 sion, it has been remarked by Dr. Alison, not logically deducible frojn the 
 experimental data. J 
 
 The par vagum cannot then, it is obvious, be included in the class of 
 nerves subservient solely to motion ; and it is even doubtful whether the 
 other two divisions of the eighth pair are not also endowed with sensi- 
 bility. Respectmg the function of the ninth, or lingual, there is, how- 
 ever, no place for hesitation. It has been experimentally proved by Mr. 
 Mayo to supply the muscles of the tongue ; though he also asserts that 
 pinching it with the forceps excited pain. Three of these nerves, the 
 third, sixth, and ninth, arise, it was first remarked by Sir Charles Bell, 
 from a tract of medullary matter continuous with the anterior column of 
 
 * CEuvres, p. 154, ct seq. t Experimental Inquiry, 3rd edit., p. 109. 
 
 X Dr. Alison, Journal of Science, vol. ix. p. 106. 
 
34 
 
 the spinal marrow ; and hence their exclusive oflBce of conductina; motive 
 impressions. 
 
 II. There are thirty-two pairs of nerves of similar anatomical origin 
 and composition, which possess the twofold office of communicating mo- 
 tion and sensation. Of these, all excepting one (the fifth pair of the cere- 
 brel nerves) spring from the spinal marrow. These thirty-one pairs are 
 precisely analogous in formation, being all constituted of two distinct 
 series of roots, one from the anterior column, and one from the posterior 
 column of the spinal marrow. The posterior funiculi collected together 
 form a ganglion, seated just before this root is joined by the anterior root. 
 It has been already stated that the power of propagating sensation resides 
 in the posterior column, and in the nervous roots arising from it, and that 
 the motive faculty has its seat in the anterior column and roots. The evi- 
 dence, also, supplied by Bell and Magendie, that the spinal nerves are 
 hence nerves of double office, has been fully detailed. It remains, then, 
 to establish the title of the fifth pair of cerebral nerves to be included in 
 the same class with the spinal nerves. 
 
 The analogy in structure and mode of origin between the fifth pair and 
 the nerves of the spine has baen long matter of observation. Prochaska 
 has thus distinctly noticed it in a passage of his Essay De Structura Ner- 
 vorum, published in 1779, first pointed out to me by my friend Dr. Holme : 
 " Quare omnium cerebri nervorum, solum quintum par post ortum suum 
 more nervorum spinalium, ganglion semilunare dictum, facere debet ? sub 
 quo peculiaris funiculorum fasciculus ad tertium quinti paris ramum, 
 maxillarem inferiorem dictum, properat, insalutato ganglio semilunari, ad 
 similitudineni radicum anteriorum nervorum spinalium?" Sommerring 
 has also pointed out with equal clearness the resemblance in distribution 
 between the smaller root of the fifth and the anterior roots of the spinal 
 nerves. But Sir Charles Bell was the first to establish the identity of 
 their functions, and to arrange them prominently in the same natural divi- 
 sion. His experiment consisted in exposing the fifth pair at its root, in an 
 ass, the moment the animal was killed. '' On irritating the nerve, the mus- 
 cles of the jaw acted, and the jaAv was closed with a snap. On dividing 
 the root of the nerve in a living animal, the jaw fell relaxed." In another 
 experiment the superior maxillary branch of the fifth nerve was exposed. 
 
 " Toucning this nerve gave accute pain; the side of the lip was 
 
 observed to hang low, and it was dragged to the other side." Sir Charles 
 Bell concluded that the fifth nerve and its branches are endowed with the 
 attributes of motion and sensation. This, though correct as regards the 
 nerve itself, viewed as a whole, is strictly true only of the lowest of its 
 three divisions, viz : the inferior maxillary. The ophthalmic and the su- 
 perior maxillary, the subject, of the last experiment, are nerves simply of 
 sensation. Mr Herbert Mayo in the Essay already referred to, has 
 
35 
 
 pointed out tnis error, and has defined with minute precision the relative 
 offices of the fifth and seventh nerves. By a careful dissection of the fifth 
 nerve he found that the anterior branch, or smaller root, which goes, as 
 Prochaska was aware, entirely to the inferior maxillary, is distributed ex- 
 clusively to the circumflexus palati, the pterygoids, and temporal and 
 masseter muscles. He observed that section of the supra and infra orbitar 
 branches, and of the inferior maxillary, near the foramina, whence they 
 emerge, induces loss of sensation in the corresponding parts of the face. 
 It may then be regarded as fully proved that the trigeminus, or fifth pair, 
 is the nerve which bestows sensation on the face and its appendages, and 
 motion only on the muscles connected with the lower jaw. The other 
 muscles of the face derive their motive power from the portio dura of the 
 seventh nerve. 
 
 M. Magendie has also published several memoirs on the functions of 
 the fifth pair. In these he attempts to prove that the olfactory nerve is 
 not the nerve of smell ; that the optic is but partially the nerve of 
 vision ; and that the auditory is not the principal nerve of hearing. It is 
 in the fifth pair that he supposes all these distinct and special endowments 
 to reside. But the experimental proof will be found to be singuhnly in- 
 conclusive. The olfactory nerves were entirely destroyed in a dog. ..f- 
 ter the operation it continued sensible to strong odours, as of ammonia, 
 acetic acid, or essential oil of lavender ; and the introduction of a probe 
 into the nasal cavity excited the same motions and pain as in an unmuti- 
 lated dog. The fifth pair was then divided in several young animals, the 
 olfactory being left entire. All signs of the perception of strongly odor- 
 ous substances, as sneezing, rubbing the nose, or turning away the head, 
 entirely disappeared. From these facts Magendie infers that the seat of 
 the sensations of smell is in the fifth, and not in the first pair of nerves. 
 It is obvious that Magendie has confounded two modes of sensation, which 
 are essentially distinct in their nature and in their organic seat, viz : the 
 true perceptions of smell, and the common sensibility of the nasal pas- 
 sages. The phenomena, which he observed to cease after the section of 
 the fifth nerve, are the results of simple irritation of the pituitary mem- 
 brane, and are manifestly wholly unconnected with the sense of smelling, 
 since they are producible by all powerful chemical agents, even though 
 inodorous, as, for example, by sulphuric acid. No proof has been given 
 that the true olfactory perceptions do not survive the destruction of the 
 fifth pair. Indeed, in a subsequent paper, Magendie confesses that the 
 loss of sensibility in the nasal membrane, after section of the fifth, does 
 not prove the residence of the sense of smell in the branches of that nerve ; 
 but merely that the olfactory nerve requires, for its perfect action, the co- 
 operation of the fifth pair, and that it possesses only a special sensibility to 
 odorous particles. 
 
36 
 
 There is even less ground for supposing that the fifth pair is in any de- 
 gree subservient to the senses of sight and hearing. After cutting this 
 nerve on one side, the flame of a torch was suddenly brought near the 
 eye, without inducing contraction of the pupil ; but the direct light of the 
 sun caused the animal to close its eyelids. Thus the sensibility of the re- 
 tina, though somewhat impaired, was not destroyed by division of the 
 fifth pair. But section of the optic nerves was immediately followed by 
 total blindness. In another rabbit Magendie divided the. fifth pair on one 
 side, and the optic nsrve on the other. The animal, he states, was com- 
 pletely deprived of sight, though the eye, in which the fifth pair only had 
 been cut, remained susceptible to the action of the solar rays. JNo evi- 
 dence, however, is offered to show that the animal was entirely blind ; 
 on the contrary, the only change observed, on approaching a torch to an 
 uninjured eye, was contraction of the iris ; and this we are told was act- 
 ually observed in the eye of the side, on which the fifth nerve had been 
 divided. 
 
 Magendie has assigned another singular function to the fifth pair, viz : 
 to preside over the nutrition of the eye. Twenty-four hours after section 
 of this nerve, incipient opacity of the cornea was observed, which gradu- 
 ally increased till the cornea became as white as alabaster. There was 
 also great vascularity of the conjunctiva extending to the iris, with secre- 
 tion of pus, and formation of false membranes in the anterior chamber. 
 About the eighth day, the cornea began to detach itself from the sclerotica, 
 the centre ulcerated, and the humours of the eye finally escaped, leaving 
 only a small tubercle in the orbit. In this experiment, the nerve had been 
 divided in the temporal fossa, but when cut immediately after leaving the 
 pons Varolii, the morbid changes were less marked, the movements of the 
 globe of the eye were preserved, the inflammation was limited to the supe- 
 rior part of the eye, and the opacity occupied only a small segment of the cir- 
 cumference of the cornea. After division of the nerve near its origin in the 
 medulla, no traces of disease were discoverable in the eye till the seventh 
 day, and these symptoms never became very prominent. Several cases 
 have been since recorded of structural disease of this nerve in the human 
 subject, with the concomitant symptoms. That of Laine, described by 
 Serres in the 4th vol. of Magendie's Journal^ furnishes strong support to 
 the views of Magendie.* 
 
 A different explanation of this fact and of others, which have a tendency 
 to refer secretion and nutrition to the control of the nervous system, has 
 been proposed by Dr. Alison. Mucous surfaces- are protected from the 
 contact of air and foreign bodies by a copious secretion, which is evidently 
 regulated in amount by their sensibility, since it is increased by any un- 
 
 * See also a case of destruction of the olfactory nerves, torn. v. 
 
37 
 
 usual irritation. This is especially true of the membrane of the eye. 
 Now section of the fifth pair is known to paralyse the sensibility of that 
 organ, and the contact of air or other irritating body upon the insensible 
 membrane, instead of inducing an augmented mucous discharge, will ex- 
 cite the inflammatory process described by Magendie. The disorder of 
 the digestive function,* which followed division of the par vagum in the 
 experiments of Dr. Wilson Philip, and the ulceration of the coats of the 
 bladder after injary of the lower part of the spinal marrow, are attributed 
 by Dr. Alison to the same cause. 
 
 The class of nerves which comprehends the fifth pair and the thirty-one 
 pairs of spinal nerves, becomes, after the union of their roots, invested 
 with a twofold endowment, and continues so throughout their entire 
 course and final distribution to the muscular tissue. It would appear, 
 indeed, from a later paper of Sir Charles Bell,| that nerves of sensation, 
 as well as of motion, are necessary to the perfect action of the voluntary 
 muscles. " Between the brain and the muscles there is a circle of nerves ; 
 one nerve conveys the intluence from the brain to the muscle, another 
 gives the sense of the condition of the muscle to the brain." In the case 
 of the spinal nerves this circle of intercourse is at least probable ; but 
 proof of its necessity must be obtained, from observing the habitudes of 
 those encephalic nerves, which minister exclusively to motion. Now it 
 is found, on minute dissection, that the muscles of the eyeball, which are 
 supplied by the third, fourth, and sixth motive nerves, also receive sensi- 
 tive filaments from the ophthalmic branch of the fifth ; and that the mus- 
 cles of the face, to which the portio dura is distributed, are also furnished 
 with branches of sensation from the fifth. Sir Charles Bell has further 
 shown that the muscles of the lower jaw, to which the motive impression 
 is propagated by the muscular branch of the inferior maxillary, draw ner- 
 vous supplies also from the ganglionic or sensitive branch of that division 
 of the fifth pair. This complicated provision has its origin, he supposes, 
 in its being " necessary to the governance of the muscular frame that 
 there should be consciousness of the state or degree of action of the muscles." 
 
 111. The olfactory, auditory, and optic nerves are gifted with a special 
 sensibility to the objects of the external senses, to which they respec- 
 tively minister. Magendie seems to have been the first to prove, experi- 
 mentally, that they do not also share the common or tactile sensibility. 
 He exposed the olfactory nerves, and found that, like the hemispheres of 
 the brain from which they spring, that they are insensible to pressure, 
 pricking, or even laceration. Strong ammonia was dropped upon them 
 without eliciting any signs of feeling. The optic nerve, and its expan- 
 sion on the retina, participate with the olfactory in this insensibility to 
 
 • Outlines of Physiology, p. 71. f Philosophical Transattiotis, 1826, p. 163. 
 
38 
 
 stimulants. This was proved by Magendie in the human subject as well 
 as in animals. In performing the operation of depressing the opaque lens, 
 he repeatedly touched the retina in two different individuals without 
 awakening the slightest sensation. The portio mollis, or acoustic nerve, 
 was also touched, pressed, and even torn without causing pain. 
 
 IV. The functions of the ganglia, of the great sympathetic nerve, and 
 its intricate plexuses and anastomotic connexions, are matter, at present, 
 of conjecture. Dr. Johnstone, in an Essay on the Use of the Ganglions, 
 published in 1771, has described a few inconclusive experiments on the 
 cardiac nerves. He supposes that "ganglions are the instruments by 
 which the motions of the heart and intestines are rendered uniformly in- 
 Voluntary," — a notion which Sir Charles Bell has shown to be totally un- 
 sound. The best history of opinions, to which indeed our knowledge re- 
 duces itself, will be found in the physiological section of Lobstein's work, 
 De Nervi Sympathetici Fabrica, Usu, et Morbis* 
 
 In the earliest of his communications to the Royal Society, as well as 
 in his last work on the Nervous System,| Sir Charles Bell has maintain- 
 ed the existence of a separate class of nerves, subservient to the regular 
 and the associated actions of respiration. The origins of these nervesj 
 " are in a line or series, and from a distinct column of the spinal marrow. 
 Behind the corpus olivare, and anterior to that process, which descends 
 from the cerebellum, called sometimes the corpus restiforme, a convex 
 strip of medullary matter may be observed. From this tract of medullary 
 matter, on the side of the medulla oblongata, arise, in succession, from 
 above downwards, the portio dura of the seventh nerve, the glossopharyn- 
 geus nerve, the nerve of the par vagum, the nervus ad par vagum acces- 
 sorius, and, as I imagine, the phrenic and the external respiratory nerves." 
 The fourth pair is also received into the same class. 
 
 This doctrine of an exclusive system of respiratory nerves, associated 
 in function by virtue of an anatomical relation of their roots, has not, as 
 Sir Charles Bell seems himself aware, § received the concurrence of many 
 intelligent physiologists of this country or of the Continent. Mr. Her- 
 bert Mayo, in the admirable Essay already referred to, was the first to 
 point out the true relations of the fifth and seventh nerves. He has 
 shown that the muscles of the face, excepting those already enumerated, 
 which elevate the lower jaw, receive their motive nerves exclusively 
 from the seventh, and consequently that this nerve must govern all their 
 motions, voluntary as well as respiratory. But Dr. Alison in his very 
 elaborate paperjl " On he Physiological Principle of Sympathy," has cast 
 
 * Pans, 1823. t "tto. 1830. 
 
 X The A^rvous System of the Human Body, p. 129, 4to, 1830. 
 
 § 0/).«<.,p. 115. 
 
 II Transactions of the Medico-Chirur^ical Society of Edinburgh, 182b', vol. ii. p. 166. 
 
39 
 
 considerable doubts on the soundness of this part of Sir Charles Bell's ar- 
 rangement, as respects not only the Individual nerves thus classed together, 
 but even the general principle on which the entire system rests. The 
 reasoning of Dr. Alison consists, first, In referring the phenomena of natu- 
 ral and excited respiration to the comprehensive order of sympathetic ac- 
 tions. In these " the phenomenon observed Is, that on an Irritation or 
 stimulus being applied to one part of the body, the voluntary muscles of 
 another, and often distant p-^rt, are thrown into action." Now it has 
 been long since fully established by Dr. Whytt, that these associations In 
 function cannot be referred to any connexions, either in origin or in course, 
 of the nerves supplying remote organs so sympathizing ; and that a sensa- 
 tion is the necessary antecedent of the resulting muscular action. Thus 
 it Is known that these actions cease in the state of coma ; are not excited 
 when the mind is strongly impressed by any other sensation or thought ; 
 and that the same muscular contractions may be induced by the Irritation 
 of different parts of the body, provided the same sensation be excited. Dr. 
 Alison has, however, failed to show* that the essential acts of inspiration, 
 viz : the contractions of the diaphragm and Intercostals, require the inter- 
 vention of a sensation. Their continuance in the state of coma, and hi 
 the experiments of Legallois and Flourens after the entire removal of the 
 brain, and their distinct reference by these two inquirers to the medulla 
 oblongata, which has never been supposed to be the seat of sensation, 
 prove them to be independent of the will and of perception. But this is 
 true only of the essential, not of the associated respiratory phenomena. 
 
 Dr. Alison proceeds to show that there is equal reason for classing al- 
 most all the nerves of the brain, and many more of the spinal nerves, with 
 those exclusively named respiratory by Sir Charles Bell. Thus the lin- 
 gual nerve governs an Infinite number of motions strictly associated with 
 respiration : the inferior maxillary " moves the muscles of the lower jaw 
 in the action of sucking, — an action clearly Instinctive when first performed 
 by the infant, frequently repeated voluntarily during life, and always itt 
 connexion with the act of respiration." Again, the sensitive branches of 
 the fifth pair cooperate in the act of sneezing. But If these nerves be ad- 
 mitted into the system, the fundamental principle of that system, viz : ori- 
 gin in a line or series. Is at once violated. Nor Is this connexion in origin 
 more than matter of conjecture, as regards two of the most Important of 
 the nerves, classed by Sir Charles Bell himself as respiratory, — the phre- 
 nic and the external respiratory. These two nerves branch from the cer- 
 vical or regular double-rooted series. Moreover, the circumstance of ris- 
 ing In linear succession is not found to associate nerves in function. " Be- 
 tween the roots of the phrenic nerve and those of the intercostals, there 
 
 * p. 176, and note. 
 
40 
 
 intervene in the same series the origins of the three lowest cervical nerves, 
 and the first dorsal, which go chiefly to the axillary plexus and to the 
 arm, and which are not respiratory nerves." 
 
 In recapitulation, the following facts are among the most important that 
 have been fully ascertained in the physiology of the nervous system : 
 
 1. One universal type has been followed in the formation of the nervous 
 system in vertebrated animals. The brain of the human foetus is gradu- 
 ally evolved in the successive months of uterine existence; and these 
 stages of progressive developement strictly correspond with permanent 
 states of the adult brain at inferior degrees of the animal scale. 
 
 2. These successive increments of cerebral matter are found to be ac- 
 companied by parallel advances in the manifestation of the higher in- 
 stincts and of the mental faculties. 
 
 3. That the brain is the material organ of all intellectual states and 
 operations, is proved by observation on comparative developement, as well 
 as by experiments on living animals, and by the study of human patho- 
 logy. But there does not exist any conclusive evidence for referring se- 
 parate faculties, or moral affections, to distinct portions of brain. 
 
 4. Certain irregular movements are produced by injuries of the cor- 
 pora striata, thalami optici, crura cerebelli, and semi-circular canals of the 
 internal ear. 
 
 5. The tubercula quadrigemina preside over the motions of the iris, and 
 their integrity seems essential even to the functions of the retina. They 
 are also, according to Flourens, the points, at which irritation first begins 
 to excite pain and muscular contractions. 
 
 6. The cerebellum appears to exercise some degree of control over the 
 instruments of locomotion ; but the precise nature and amount of this in- 
 fluence cannot be distinctly defined. 
 
 7. The cerebrum, cerebellum, and medulla oblongata possess the fac- 
 ulty of acting primordially, or spontaneously, without requiring foreign ex- 
 citation. The spinal cord and the nerves are not endowed with sponta- 
 neity of action, and are therefore termed subordinate parts. 
 
 8. The medulla oblongata exercises the office of originating and regu- 
 lating the motions essential to the act of respiration. By virtue of its con- 
 tinuity with the spinal marrow, it also participates in the functions of that 
 division of nervous matter. 
 
 9 The function of the spinal cord is simply that of a conductor of mo- 
 tive impulses, from the brain to the nerves supplying the muscles, and of 
 sensitive impressions from the surface of the body to the sensorium com- 
 mune. These two vital offices reside in distinct portions of the spinal me- 
 dulla, — the progagation of motion in its anterior columns, the transmission 
 of sensations in its posterior columns. There is no necessary dependence 
 
41 
 
 of the motions of the heart, and the other involuntary muscles, on the spi- 
 nal marrow. 
 
 10. The nerves are comprehended in the four following classes : — 
 I. Nerves simply of motion ; 11. Of motion and sensation ; III. Of three 
 of the senses ; IV. The ganglionic system. 
 
 I. The nerves of motion are the third, fourth, sixth, portio dura of the 
 seventh, and the ninth. It is not ascertained whether the glossopharyn- 
 geal and spinal accessory nerves belong to this or to the second class. 
 
 11. The function of ministering both to motion and sensation is possess- 
 ed by the fifth pair of cerebral nerves, and by the spinal nerves, which 
 agree precisely in anatomical composition. The par vagum, however, 
 which is one of the irregular nerves, has also a twofold endowment. 
 
 III. This division comprises the first and second pairs, and the portio 
 mollis of the seventh pair. These nerves are insensible to ordinary stimu- 
 lants, and possess an exclusive sensibility to their respective objects, viz : 
 odorous matter, light, and serial undulations. 
 
 IV. The system of the great sympathetic nerve, and its associated 
 plexuses and ganglia. 
 
 6 
 
42 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 views of the structure of the erain. 
 
 Figure 5, ^ 
 
 Represents the base of the brain and the cerebellum. 
 
 .i; I Are the rio;ht and left hemispheres of the brain, 
 AB ^ ^ 
 
 FF, The cerebellum. 
 
 AA, The anterior lobe. 
 
 e e, The line which denotes the separation between the anterior lobe and 
 
 the middle lobe. 
 
 DD, The middle lobe. 
 
 BB, The posterior lobe. 
 
 e, The po7is Varolii, which brings the two sides of the cerebellum into 
 
 communication. It is also named the Tuber annulare. 
 
 f, The Medulla oblongata. 
 rr, The Corpora pyramidalia- 
 s s, The Corpora olixaria. 
 
 1 1, The Corpora restiformia are on the opposite side of the Corpora pyr- 
 amidalia. 
 
 1. First pair, or olfactory nerves, arise by three origins. These unite 
 
 and proceed forwards and inwards in a groove in the inferior surface 
 of the anterior lobes of the brain, and form a greyish swelling or gan- 
 glion. From this ganglion a great number of filaments proceed 
 through the cribriform plate of the ethmoid bone, and are distributed 
 upon the mucous membrane of the nose. It is the nerve of the sense 
 of smell. 
 
 2. Second pair, or optic, arise principally from the anterior corpora qua- 
 
 drigemina. Each nerve passes outwards through the optic foramen 
 in the sphenoid bone, and is expanded upon the retina. It is the 
 nerve of the sense of sight. 
 
 3. Third pair, or motores oculorum, originate from the motor tract of the 
 
 spinal cord, immediately after they have passed through the pons 
 Varolii. Each nerve escapes through the sphenoidal fissure, and 
 supplies five of the muscles within the orbit with motor filaments. 
 
 4. Fourth pair, or trochleareSj originate from the processus e cerebello ad 
 
 testes and valvula of Vieussens. Each nerve passes out from the 
 cranium at the sphenoidal fissure, and is entirely distributed upon 
 the superior oblique muscles of the eyeball. It is a motor nerve. 
 
FIG. 5. 
 
43 
 
 5 Fifth pair. These nerves issue from the surface of the brain, near the 
 junction of the pons Varolii and cms cerebelli, but actually arise from 
 the restiform bodies. Each nerve escapes from the cranium by 
 three separate openings, and is extensively distributed upon the orbit 
 and other parts of the face. Part of the filaments of this nerve are 
 sensitive, and part motor. 
 
 6. Sixth pair originate from the pyramidal bodies, as they are about to 
 
 enter the pons Varolii. Each nerve escapes through the sphenoidal 
 fissure, and is entirely distributed upon the external rectus muscle of 
 the eyeball. It is a motor nerve. 
 
 7. Portio dura of the seventh pair originate from the restiform bodies. 
 
 Each nerve is extensively distributed in the muscles of the face and 
 external ear. It is the motor nerve of the muscles of expression of 
 the face. 
 
 8. Portio moUis of the seventh pair, or auditory nerves, (eighth pair of 
 
 some authors,) arise principally from a small grey svrelling on the 
 upper surface of the restiform bodies at the side of the fourth ventri- 
 cle. Each nerve is distributed upon the internal ear, and is the 
 nerve of the sense of hearing. 
 
 9. Glossopharyngeal nerves, or upper division of the eighth pair, (ninth 
 
 pair of some authors,) arise from the restiform bodies near the sul- 
 cus vrhich separates them from the olivary, and are distributed upon 
 the pharynx and mucous membrane at the back part of the tongue . 
 It is a sensitive nerve. 
 
 10. Par vagum, or pneumogastric nerves, or principal division of the 
 eighth pair, (tenth pair of some authors,) originate in the same line 
 w^ith, and close upon, the glossopharyngeal. These nerves are ex- 
 tensively distributed upon the larynx, pharynx, trachea, oesophagus, 
 heart, lungs, and stomach. Part of the filaments of this nerve are 
 sensitive, and part are motor. 
 
 11. Spinal accessory nerves, or lower division of the eighth pair, (elev- 
 enth pair of some authors,) originate from the upper part of the spi- 
 nal chord, in the same line with the two preceding nerves. They 
 enter the cranium by the foramen magnum, and pass out again from 
 the cranium through the foramen lacerum, along with the other two 
 divisions of the eighth pair. It is principally, if not entirely, a motor 
 nerve. 
 
 12. Hypoglossal or ninth pair (twelfth pair of some authors). Each ori- 
 ginates from the sulcus between the pyramidal anl olivary bodies, 
 and escapes from the base of the cranium through the anterior con- 
 dyloid foramen, and is distributed UDon the muscles of the tongue . 
 It is the motor nerve of the tongue. 
 
44 
 
 Figure 6. 
 
 The right hemisphere of the brain cut through the corpus callosum, 
 pons Varolii, medulla oblongata, and cerebellum. 
 MM, Convolutions, flat — color, redish grey. * 
 
 A, Medulla oblongata cut through the median line. Color, outer portion 
 
 bluish white — inner portion, redish grey, 
 a, Pyraniidle body. 
 
 B, Pons Varolii, or tuber annulare. Color, white outside — inside, re- 
 
 dish grey. 
 c, Tubercula quadrigemina. 
 
 D, Crus cerebri. 
 
 E, The great inferior ganglion — posterior striated body, (thalamus) — 
 
 color, bluish white. 
 
 F, The great superior ganglion — anterior striatetl body — color, redish 
 
 grey- 
 
 G, Annular ganglion. 
 
 H, Corpus callosum — color, bluish white . .■ 
 
 K, Fissura Silvii. 
 
 L, The cerebellum. 
 
 e. The arbor vita — color, white, in the redish grey ground of the incised 
 
 cerebellum. 
 T, The tentorum, seperatiug the cerebellum from the brain, 
 ii, Locus niger. 
 
FIG- 6. 
 
 FIG. 7. 
 
45 
 
 FZOURE 7. 
 
 The cerebellum, and its connection with the brain or cerebrum. 
 AA, The cerebellum — color, redish grey. 
 B, Processus vermiculares. * 
 
 n, Processus e cerebello ad testes — semi-transparent — color, bluish white, 
 a a, The posterior corpora quadrigemina — color, bluish white. 
 c c, The anterior corpora quadrigemina — color, bluish white, 
 dd, The great inferior ganglions — posterior striated bodies (thalamus) — ■ 
 
 color, bluish white, 
 mm, Posterior part of the great superior ganglions — anterior striated 
 
 bodies — 'Color, redish grey. 
 e, Pineal gland — color, redish grey. 
 i, Third ventricle. 
 
46 
 
 Figure §. 
 
 A horizontal section of the brain at a depth of about an inch from 
 its base, or under surface. 
 
 e e, Convolutions, or cortical part of the brain — color, redish grey. 
 u, Fourth ventricle. 
 V, Posterior commissure — color, white. 
 
 s, Third ventricle, or separation between the great ganglions, 
 dd, Great inferior ganglions — color, bluish white. 
 X, Middle commissure, 
 n, Anterior commissure. 
 
 pp. Great superior ganglions — striated — color, redish grey. 
 t, Anterior opening into the lateral ventricles. 
 
FIG. 8. 
 
FIG. 9. 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
47 
 
 Figure 9. 
 
 The cerebellum, medulla oblongata, and pons Varolii removed, the brain 
 then cut along the median line and laid open, to show its ventricles and 
 their fibrous structure. 
 MM, The anterior part of the brain. 
 NN, Posterior part of the brain. 
 
 e e, Vertical sections of the great inferior ganglions — color, bluish white. 
 c c, The black substance iu the centre of the great inferier ganglions. 
 o o, The cords of the mammary bodies which plunge into the interior of 
 
 the great inferior ganglions. 
 t, Mammary body of the right side, the left being cut away, 
 r r. Optic nerves; 
 n n,- Olfactory nerves, 
 a a, Great superior ganglions — color, redish grey. 
 
48 
 
 Figure 10, 
 
 Exhibits various parts about the base of the brain, with the decussation 
 
 of the fibres of the p;yTamidal bodies. 
 
 r. Medulla oblongata. 
 
 c c, Decussation of the fibres of the pyramidal bodies, which explains the 
 influence of the lateral cerebral parts of the brain upon the opposite 
 sides of the body. These fibres cross the mesial line of the body 
 one above another from below upwards like plaited straw. Those 
 of the right side come from the left pyramidal body, and those of the 
 left side from the right pyramidal body, and is a constant peculiarity, 
 modified only by the number of the decussating fibres. They are 
 contracted in their course in passing the olivary bodies a a, and then 
 diverge as seen in the figure. 
 
 m, Auditory nerve. 
 
 n. Facial nerve. The primary bundle of fibres of the cerebellum are here 
 seen to plunge into it between these nerves. 
 
 b. Part of the annular protuberance, or 'pons Varolii, plunging into the 
 cerebellum. 
 
 s, Cerebellar ganglion. • 
 
 p. Mammary bodies, with the diverging cords to which they are attached. 
 
 u, Optic nerve. " The optic nerves decussate partially, and is the cause 
 why the eye is frequently deranged on the same side as that on 
 vvhich the brain is diseased." — Spurzheim. 
 
 h h, " Nervous fibres that expand in the convolutions and contribute to 
 their forrmation." — Spurzheim. 
 
 i i, Olfactory nerves. 
 
 v, Side of the great lateral ventricle. 
 
 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, The fibres which pass through the great cerebral 
 ganglions, and ultimately expand into the convolutions of the brain. 
 
 DD, Converging convolutions. 
 
FIG. 10 
 
FIG. 11. 
 
 c — Internal structure of the convolutions. See p. 52. 
 
 e — Fibres of the convolutions agglutinated by a very delicate neurilema. 
 
49 
 
 Figure 11, 
 
 Represents the right hemisphere of the brain, in which the convo- 
 lutions are cut away to the depth of about three-quarters of an inch* 
 to show the fibres radiating from the centre of the outer surface of 
 the great inferior ganglion into the convolutions. 
 
 The white spot in the centre of the figure represents the outer surface 
 of the great inferior ganglion over which the fibres are drawn with great 
 accuracy from the original. 
 
 7 
 
50 
 
 Figure 12, 
 
 Is a fine view of a vertical section of the brain through the convolu- 
 tions, the white substance, the great inferior ganglion, and the cerebellum. 
 
 This section is made through the ganglion to the depth of about the 
 quarter of an inch from its outer surface, and through the middle of the 
 cerebellar ganglion. 
 
 0, Great inferior ganglion. 
 
 m, Fibres radiating from the surface of the ganghon. . 
 
 1, Cerebellar ganglion (corpus dentatum). 
 n, Arbor vitse. 
 
 Some of the principal organs formed by the convolutions of the brain 
 are numbered thus : 
 n, Amativeness, or sexual love. 
 
 2, Philoprogenitiveness, or love of offspring. 
 
 3, Inhabitiveness, or attachment to home. 
 
 4, Concentrativeness, or power of mental concentration. 
 
 5, Approbativeuess, or love of approbation. 
 
 6, Self-esteem. 
 
 7, Firmness. 
 
 8, Reverence. 
 
 9, Benevolence. 
 
 10, Imitation. 
 
 11, Comparison, or power of comparing one thing with another. 
 
 12, Eventuality, or power of observing action. 
 
 13, Individuality, or power of observing existence. 
 
 14, Language, or power of learning or using verbal signs. 
 
FIG. 12. 
 
FIG. 13. 
 
51 
 
 Figure 13, 
 
 A perpendicular section of the brain, not far from the mesial hne. 
 
 The fibres of the white or medullary substance radiate as seen in the 
 figure from the base of the brain into the convolutions, the folds of which 
 are plunged into the white substance, generally from a line to an inch 
 deep. 
 
 e e. Is a section of one of the corpora restiforma. 
 c. Is a section of one of the corpora pyramidalia. 
 b. Is the pons Varolii, 
 g, Is one of the crura of the brain. 
 
 s, Is the cerebellar ganglion, surrounded by the arbor vitse. 
 34, 35, 37, 38 and 11, Are the cerebral fibres, which, originating in the 
 medulla oblongata, pass under the pons Varolii, through the crura, 
 and corpora striata, and great inferior ganglions, and ultimately ex- 
 pand into the convolutions of the brain. 
 47, 48, Situation of the cerebellum within the skull. 
 
 These crura contain cineriterous matter in their interior, from which 
 additional fibres are continually sent off as they advance to join and 
 strengthen those that have come from below. 
 
 The cerebral crura are besides divided into two parts, viz : an anterior 
 and external, and a posterior and internal mass, the limits of which are 
 marked by two superficial furrows. They are the roots of the primary 
 bundles of fibres of the brain which diverge as they advance to form the 
 immense mass of the hemispheres. 
 
 A great portion of these fibres pass to and through the ganglions in their 
 course to the convolutions, from which another set of fibres converge 
 through the white substance, and corpus callosum to the same ganglions 
 in the centre of the brain. 
 
52 
 
 Figure 14, 
 
 Is a view of the inside of the right hemisphere of the brain with 
 the convolutions cut away, to show the converging fibres from the con- 
 volutions to the corpus callosmn, which communicate with the great 
 cerebral ganglions by means of a superficial band or layer culled the semi- 
 circular tapeworm. A section of the great inferior ganglioti is removed, 
 which shows its white color in strong contrast with the dark or redish 
 grey color of a portion of the great superior ganglion inclosed between 
 it and the front part of the corpus callosum. 
 
 " The convolutions internally consist of white fibres, which are cover- 
 ed on their extremities with cineriterous substance. The fibres which 
 terminate the nervous bundles of the cerebral crura are not all of the same 
 leno-th. Many, especially of those which are situated on the outer sides 
 of the convolutions, terminate immediately beyond the exterior walls of 
 the cavities ; the others extend to distances progressively greater as they 
 run more centrally, those of the interior extending farthest of all. (See 
 fio-ure 11, convolution c) It is in consequence of this peculiar structure that 
 prolongations and depressions are formed on the surface of the hemis- 
 pheres. The cineriterous substance follows all the forms composed by the 
 white fibres, and covers every elevation and depression with a layer. 
 These layers meet in the middle line of the convolutions, and are slightly 
 agglutinated by means of a very delicate nuT\\ema.''''-Spiirzheim. Fig. 11, e. 
 
 " The corpus callosum extends anterior!}' and posteriorly beyond the 
 striated bodies (great superior and inferior ganglions, fig. 14). Its thick- 
 ness at either extremity is greater than at its middle. The fibres which 
 compose the folds of the corpus callosum proceed evidently from the 
 convolutions which form the most anterior and posterior parts of the 
 hemispheres," which communicate with the great cerebral ganglions by 
 means of a superficial band or layer called the semi-circular tapeworm. 
 
 " Nothing can be easier than by dissection, to prove the two orders of 
 cerebral fibres, the diverging and the converging, and to show that the 
 mass or bundle called corpus callosum belongs to the converging order." 
 " Their direction is consequently entirely different from the bundles (of 
 fibres) constituting either of the two great cerebral ganglions." 
 
 " The convolutions are for the most part inclined slightly to the roof 
 of the ventricles — they rarely stand up vertically. Their peripheral edge 
 is frequently depressed, and this gives them an appearance similar to that 
 which a fold of paper takes when its edge is pressed lightly inwards." 
 Ibid. fig. 12. 
 
 The converging fibres, like the diverging ones before described, are 
 double, one set of each, of which is connected with the surface of the 
 
FIG. 14. 
 
 A — Front part of the right hemisphere of the brain. 
 B — Great inferior ganglion. 
 C — Great superior ganglion. 
 
53 
 
 brain through the cineriterous substance of the convolutions, and the 
 other with the surface of the ventricles. See fig. 9, fig. 11, and fig. 14. 
 The opposite ends of the converging fibres are connected with the great 
 cerebral ganglions, while the opposite ends of the diverging fibres are 
 connected with the flexor and extensor muscles and w^ith the serous and 
 mucous surfaces of the different parts of the body. Drs. Gall and Spurzheim 
 say, " the same nervous fibres do not go to the muscles and skin," and 
 that " the spinal marrow consists of nerves of motion and of feeling." 
 Physiognomical System of Drs. Gall and Spurzheim, 1S15, p. 23 to 
 25. Sir Charles Bell demonstrated the correctness of these opinions 
 in his work, entitled "An Exposition of the Natural System of the 
 Nerves of the Human Body, 1823." 
 
 " Drs. Gall and Spurzheim have the merit of having discovered and first 
 taught the true anatomy of the brain. For many years their representa- 
 tions of the structure of this organ were ridiculed, and the accuracy of 
 them denied with the greatest pertinacity ; but they are now very gene- 
 rally admitted to be correct. Some errors may, perhaps, be discovered in 
 them ; but their general truth is beyond question. 
 
 In surveying the relations of the parts, it is useful to begin with the 
 spinal marrow. 
 
 In 1810, Drs Gall and Spurzheim represented the spinal marrow as 
 consisting of a tract for motion, and one for sensation ;* and in 1818, Dr. 
 Spurzheim published strong reasons for the inference that certain of the 
 nerves proceeding from it perform the functions of motion, while others 
 communicate sensation. | Several years afterwards. Sir Charles Bell de- 
 scribed it as consisting of two halves, a right and left, extending its whole 
 length. According to his first view, he described each lateral portion as 
 consisting of three tracts or columns ; the anterior-lateral giving origin to 
 the nerves of voluntary motion ; the posterior-lateral giving origin to the 
 nerves of sensation ; the middle-lateral to the nerves connected with res- 
 piration. J The capital, or top of the spinal column, is the medulla oblon- 
 gata. Cruveilhier and Bellingeri deny the accuracy of Sir Charles Bell's 
 opinions on this subject. Bellingeri divides the spinal marrow into three 
 double columns, and assigns motion to the front and back, and the in- 
 stinctive movements to the middle column. He regards the grey matter 
 of the spinal cord as connected with sensation. § At all events, Sir Charles 
 
 * Anatomic et Physiologie, (fcc, p. 67, 4to. Paris, 1810. 
 
 t Observations sur la Folie, par G. Spurzheim, pp. 26, 27. Paris, 1818. 
 
 X In his paper, read before the Royal Society on the 30th April, 1S3.5, he appears to 
 have renounced this opinion, and now describes the posterior roots of the spinal nerves 
 as attached to the lateral or middle columns, or middle lateral ; p. 231, 3d edition of 
 "The Nervous System." 
 
 § De Medulla Spinali, pp. 89, 93, 95, 117. 
 
54 
 
 Bell's view, that motion belongs to the anterior, and sensation to the pos- 
 terior roots of the spinal nerves, is admitted by Tiedemann, Miiller, and 
 the highest physiological authorities, and I here assume it to be correct. 
 
 At the upper extremity of the spinal marrow, and in continuation of its 
 anterior, or motory, tract, we meet with the corpora pyramidalia. 
 
 These bodies consist of medullary fibres, which decussate at their lower 
 extremity (c c Fig. 10). 
 
 The fibres of the corpora pyramidalia proceed upwards through the 
 pons Varolii (B Fig. 6). 
 
 After escaping above its upper border, the greatest number of them pass 
 still upwards, and form the anterior and external bundles of the crura 
 cerebri, {g Fig. 13) and the exterior part of the corpora striata, and ulti- 
 mately they expand into the inferior, anterior, and exterior convolutions 
 of the anterior and middle lobes of the brain : Gall, Phys. du Cerveau, 
 vol. i. p. 279. 
 
 There is an observable proportion between the size of the corpora pyra- 
 midalia and that of the convolutions now mentioned. 
 
 A portion of the fibres of the corpora pyramidalia pass into the great 
 ganglion of the middle and posterior lobes, commonly, but erroneously, 
 named the optic thalami, (o. Fig. 12) and ultimately constitute part of 
 the posterior lobes of the brain : Solly on the Brain, p. 233 ; Spurzheim's 
 Physiog. System, p. 38.* 
 
 Finally, a number of fibres proceed from the lower extremity of the 
 corpora pyramidalia, near the point of decussation, accompanied by a 
 number of fibres which originate in the anterior, or motory, tract of the 
 spinal cord, immediately below said point, to the cerebellum : Solly on 
 the Brain, p. 155. 
 
 The fibres of the corpora pyramidalia thus constitute the great mass of 
 the anterior lobes ; and enter into the substance of the middle lobes ; into 
 that of the posterior lobes ; and into that of the cerebellum. 
 
 The corpora olivaria, (C C Fig. 3) and corpora restiformia (T T Fig. 3) 
 are placed at the summit of the posterior- lateral columns of the spinal 
 cord, which are devoted to sensation.'f The corpora olivaria pass up- 
 
 * The passage of certain fibres from the corpora pyramidalia into the posterior lobes 
 appears not to be well ascertained, and I am not certain that I correctly interpret these 
 authorities in citing them in support of this opinion. From the influence, however, 
 which the mental organs situated in these lobes exercise over various instinctive motions 
 of the body, I anticipate that a direct connection will yet be traced between them and 
 the motory tract already ascertained, or that an additional tract for manifesting instinc- 
 tinc movements will be discovered, with which they and the organs of the other feelings 
 will be found to be connected. 
 
 t " In the composition of the spinal cord," says Mr. Solly, " we can observe no line 
 of demarcation by which the tract of sensation may be distinguished from that of motion, 
 but a portion of the cord anterior to the posterior fissure is distinctly ascertained to be 
 
55 
 
 wards into the pons Varolii^ and form the posterior and interior parts of 
 the crura; thence they proceed through the great posterior ganglion, 
 (thalami nervorum opticorum) and then expand partly into the convolu- 
 tions of the anterior lobe, lying on its superior surface, towards the mesial 
 line, partly into the superior convolutions towards the mesial line of the 
 middle lobe ; but chiefly into the convolutions of the posterior lobes : 
 Gall, Physiologie du Cerveau, tome i. p. 281. 
 
 Sir Charles Bell says that the fibres of the middle lateral columns decus- 
 sate at the same point as that at which the corpora pyramidalia decussate. 
 
 The fibres of the corpora restiformia ascend and form the chief part of 
 the cerebellum ; but a portion of them proceeds still upwards, and enters 
 into the composition of the posterior lobes of the brain. 
 
 In the centre of the cms cerebri, the fibres of the motory tract (D in 
 Figure 6) are separated from the fibres of the sensory tract to the left of 
 the letter c in Figure 6, by a portion of cineritious substance denominated 
 the locus niger. 
 
 The two hemispheres of the brain'are separated by the falciform process 
 of the dura mater, which descends between them to the corpus callosumox 
 great commissure. The different parts of the brain are brought into com- 
 munication with each other by means of the following commissures, 
 which Mr. Solly arranges under three heads ; the transverse, longitudinal, 
 and oblique. 
 
 The transverse commissures, six in number : 
 
 1. The great transverse commissure of the hemispheres, or the corpus 
 
 callosum. 
 
 2. The pineal commissure. 
 
 3. The posterior commissure, or commissure of the posterior cerebral 
 
 o;ano;lia. 
 
 4. The soft commissure, or commissure also of the posterior cerebral 
 
 ganglia. 
 
 5. The anterior commissure, or commissure of the corpus striatum, or 
 
 anterior cerebral ganglia. 
 
 appropriated to this function." " I shall assume, therefore, that the line of demarcation 
 is about the middle of the lateral aspect of the cord, and that the sensory column, or 
 tract of sensation, consists of two portions, the one posterior to the fissure referred to, 
 and consequently named the posterior column, the other anterior to it, constituting part 
 of the antero-lateral column."— So% on the Human Brain, p. 225. I recommend to 
 the attention of those readers who regard the want of lines of demarcation between the 
 different cerebral organs as a fatal objection to Phrenology, the preceding observation of 
 Mr. Solly, that the same difficulty occurs in distinguishing the tract of sensation from 
 that of motion in the spinal cord. Nevertheless he does not hesitate to state that the 
 essential functions of these different parts of the cords are positively ascertained. His 
 own remark is, that " it is quite possible that perfect distinctness of parts, as regards 
 their function, without any visible line of separation, may exist;" p. 153. 
 
56 
 
 6. The commissure of the cerebellum, or pons Varolii. 
 The longitudinal commissures, two in number : 
 
 1. The superior longitudinal commissure. 
 
 2. The inferior longitudinal commissure, or fornix. It connects the 
 parts of the same hemisphere. 
 
 The oblique commissure is single. It consists of, 
 1. The inter-cerebral commissure, or processus e cerebello ad testes^ 
 with the valve of Vieussens. — Solly on the Human Brain, p. 194. 
 
 OF THE CEREBELLUM. 
 
 The cerebellum consists of three portions, a central and two lateral. 
 
 The cerebellum proceeds, in the first instance, from the corpora resti- 
 formia. The fibres of these bodies proceed upwards, enter into the cor- 
 pus dentatum (cerebellar ganglion) of the cerebellum, and finally expand 
 into its laminae or folds, — Gall, lib. cit. pp. 250, 251.* 
 
 Certain fibres, already described, arising from the summit of the ante- 
 terior column of the spinal marrow, and from the lower extremity of the 
 corpora pyramidalia or motory tract, proceed upwards and laterally, and 
 enter the cerebellum. Mr. Solly (p. 57) has the merit of having first 
 clearly demonstrated the course of these fibres, although Drs. Gall and 
 Spurzheim have alluded to their existence. 
 
 The pons Varolii is the great commissure uniting the two lateral por- 
 tions of the cerebellum. — Gall, lib. cit. p. 258. 
 
 OF THE CORPORA QUADRIGEMINA. 
 
 Certain fibres originating in the corpora olivaria, are said by Tiede- 
 mann| to form the corpora quadrigemina (acFig7). Reil says that 
 some of the fibres of the corpora pyramidalia go to them. 
 
 The superior pair of the corpora quadrigemina, or tubercles, are regarded 
 by Dr. Gall as ganglions, which give origin to the optic nerves {lib. cit. 
 
 * The corpora restiformia, says Mr. Solly, or the processus e cerebello ad medullam 
 oblongatam, " are not, as they have been usually described, bodies which are formed 
 solely by the jwstcrior columns ; nor are they bodies which consist of fibres from the 
 posterior columns, to which some fibres from the anterior columns are added, the addi- 
 tional fibres lying perfectly parallel to those of the posterior columns ; but they are bo- 
 dies which consist of fibres that interlace in rather an intricate manner, the interlacing 
 fibres consisting of some from the antei'o-lateral, and some from the posterior columns j" 
 p. 158. 
 
 t On the Anatomy of Fcetal Brain, pp. 182, 183; Bennett's translation. 
 
57 
 
 p. 121.) The functions of the inferior pair are not ascertained. They 
 are placed on the upper part of the medulla oblongata (c Fig. 6.) 
 
 A broad band of medullary substance, " thick laterally, but extremely 
 thin in the centre," passes from the cerebellum upwards and forwards to 
 the tubercles, commonly called the processus e cerebello ad testes, and 
 the valvula of Vieussens (n Fig. 7). — Solly, lib. cit. p. 178. 
 
 RELATION BETWEEN THE STRUCTURE AND THE FUNCTIONS OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 The convolutions of the brain appear to stand in a relation to the spinal 
 marrow analogous to that which the superficial expansions of the nerves 
 of the external senses, of motion, and sensation, on their respective or- 
 gans, bear to it. 
 
 The convolutions of the anterior lobes of the brain* manifest the intel- 
 lectual faculties. I 
 
 The Intellectual Faculties enable man to perceive objects that exist, 
 their qualities and relations ; and when acting together, they constitute 
 Will. 
 
 The convolutions which manifest these faculties spring from the cor- 
 pora pyramidalia^ which are now generally considered to be the top of the 
 motory tract of the spinal marrow. Here, then, is a direct relation be- 
 tween the convolutions which manifest Will, and the motory tract which 
 executes Will ; an arrangement that appears to accord with the best es- 
 tablished principles of Physiology. 
 
 The convolutions of the middle and those of the posterior lobes of the 
 brain, manifest the Propensities and Sentiments, or Feelings. 
 
 These convolutions spring chiefly from the corpora olivaria, but partly 
 also from the corpora restiformia. These bodies constitute the top of the 
 sensory tract of the spinal cord. 
 
 The cerebellum springs from the corpora restiformia, which, as has just 
 been mentioned, is viewed as a portion of the top of the sensory tract of 
 the spinal marrow. 
 
 The function of the cerebellum is to manifest the instinct of reproduc- 
 tion, which also is one of the feelings of the mind. 
 
 But, in the next place, certain fibres proceeding from the corpora pyr- 
 amidalia, or motory tract, enter into — 
 The middle lobes, 
 
 * Precisely speaking, it is only the anterior, inferior, and lateral convolutions of the 
 anterior lobe which manifest intellect. The superior convolutions of this lobe mani- 
 fest eentiments or feelings. 
 
 t The evidence of the functions of the convolutions is stated in the different works on 
 Phrenology. 
 
 8 
 
68 
 
 The posterior lobes, and 
 The cerebellum. 
 
 While, therefore, the convolutions of the anterior lobes* are formed of 
 fibres connected with the motory tract, the convolutions composing the 
 posterior and middle lobes, and the cerebellum, are composed of fibres 
 connected with both the motory and sensory tracts. 
 
 The middle and posterior lobes, and the cerebellum, manifest a variety 
 of different feelings, each particular feeling being connected with a par- 
 ticular part of these masses, as is explained in the works on Phrenology. 
 
 Each of these feelings acts upon, and manifests itself by means of the 
 muscular system. Thus fear, rage, affection, or any other feeling, 
 communicates great energy of action to the muscles of voluntary mo- 
 tion. 
 
 Each of the feelings instinctively impresses motions on the muscular 
 system pecular to itself, and expressive of its distinctive character, which 
 motions are named by phrenologists its natural language. Thus, the or- 
 gan of Self-Esteem, when predominantly large, produces an instinctive 
 tendency to carry the head and body reclining backwards. The organ of 
 Firmness, when predominantly large, produces the tendency to support 
 the body in a stiffly erect position, as if the spinal cord were supported 
 by a rod of iron running along its whole length. The cerebellum also 
 impresses peculiar motions on the muscular system expressive of its cha- 
 racter. These motions, as I have said, are instinctive ; that is to say, 
 they are the instantaneous and direct results of the activity' of the several 
 feelings, and not the consequences of intellectual perception and will. 
 
 The arrangement of structure by which each of these organs of fee'.ing 
 is supplied with fibres in direct connection with the motory tract, is in 
 harmony with this influence of the emotions over the motions of the 
 body. But we should expect a separate tract for instinctive motion, 
 which is clearly distinguishable from voluntary motion, and also that the 
 organs of the feelings should be connected directly with it. There is still 
 much obscurity in the views of physiologists concerning the connection of 
 the middle and posterior lobes with the motory tract. 
 
 Again, it is certain that the mental emotions exercise a powerful influ- 
 ence over the organic functions ; when agreeable, they stimulate them to 
 healthy action, and when painful, they depress their energies, and pro- 
 duce liability to disease. Reciprocally, when the organic functions, such 
 as digestion, respiration, and secretion are disordered, an irritable and dis- 
 tressing state of the mental feelings is induced. 
 
 The intimate relations between the convolutions of the brain devoted 
 
 * Excepting always those on the upper surface which manifest feelings, and which 
 derive their origin from tlie sensory tract as before described. 
 
59 
 
 to the mental emotions and the sensory tract of the spinal cord, is in har- 
 mony with these facts. 
 
 The habit of contending with intellectual difficulties, if unconnected 
 with feeling, does not injure the organic functions so severely as do strong 
 and painful emotions ; but it weakens the locomotive powers. Sedulous 
 students of abstruse problems, acquire a great aversion to locomotion. 
 
 These facts correspond with the arrangements of structure by which 
 the convolutions of the anterior lobes devoted to intellect, spring from the 
 motory tract, and are less intimately connected with the sensory tract of 
 the spinal marrow. 
 
 The convolutions of the anterior lobes bear an analogy to the periphe- 
 ral expansion of a simple nerve of motion ; while the convolutions of the 
 middle and posterior lobes, and the cerebellum, bear an analogy to the 
 peripheral expansion of the combined nerves of sensation and motion. 
 
 The functions of the convolutions of the brain, and of the laminae of the 
 cerebellum, being to manifest respectively thought and mental feeling, 
 they do not produce what, for distinction's sake, may be called bodily pain. 
 
 These convolutions and the cerebellum, although situated, when man 
 is in the erect position, above the spinal cord, neverthless stand in the 
 same relation to it, as do the peripheral expansions of the cerebral nerves ; 
 that is to say, they are composed of the distal ends of the fibres, which 
 can be traced inwards to the spinal cord. 
 
 If an experimenter were to separate the motory branch of the fifth 
 nerve, (arising in the cms cerebri.,* the motory tract,) and expanding on 
 the head and face, — from the sensory branch of the same nerve (arising 
 from the posterior columns of the spinal cord, about an inch and a half 
 below the pons Varolii, the sensory tract, j along its whole course ; and 
 if he were to destroy the former, or motory branch, at its periphery, the 
 animal would experience no pain., because this is a nerve of motion ; and 
 no convulsions would ensue until the lesions reached close upon the mo- 
 tory tract itself ;| because the influence of irritation on nerves of motion is 
 propagated only outwards from the spinal cord ; and in the case here sup- 
 posed, the mutilations and irritations would proceed inwards from the 
 distal extremity of the nerve towards the spinal marrow. The whole 
 portions of the nerve lying outwards from the point of irritation, as this 
 
 * Mr. Solly describes this branch as arising from the " inter-cerebellar commissure, 
 very close to the cerebellum," — Lib. cit.^. 249 ; but he adds, that its origin from these 
 fibres proves they *' must be a portion of the motor tract." — P. 251. 
 
 t I here suppose the whole filaments to be destroyed, commencing from the periphery. 
 If the nerve were merely irritated at any part of its course, the muscles, which derive 
 their filaments from the part of the nerve below the point irritated, would be thrown 
 into contraction, while those deriving their filaments from points above the part irritated 
 would remain quiescent. 
 
60 • 
 
 point by successive mutilations approached the spinal marrow, would be 
 necessarily destroyed, and therefore could produce no movements. 
 
 When Magendie, Flourens, and other physiologists, cut away the con- 
 volutions of the anterior lobes, they performed an experiment analogous 
 to this which I have now described. They commenced at the distal ex- 
 tremity of the fibres of the convolutions which are connected with the mo- 
 tory tract, and they destroyed them in proportion as they carried their 
 ablations towards the spinal cord. Whatever the functions of these con- 
 volutions might be, the power of manifesting them must obviously have 
 ceased by their destruction ; and as it was known that the convolutions of 
 the brain do not manifest ordinary sensation, they were not authorized, 
 by the analogy of the nerves, to expect either pain or convultions to be 
 excited until they arrived at the motory tract itself; which accordingly 
 was actually the case. When Magendie cut the corpora striata and tu- 
 bercles, the animals " rolled," " went forward, " extended," and " bent 
 their heads and extremities." 
 
 Again, if the nerves of motion and sensation ramified on the hand were 
 destroyed in combination, commencing from the surface of the skin at the 
 extremity of the fingers, and proceeding upwards to the spinal cord, pain 
 would be felt, because a nerve of sensation had been destroyed, and such 
 nerves propagate their impressions inward from their peripheral expan- 
 sions towards the spinal cord and brain ; but, for the reason before stated, 
 there would be no convulsions, until the motory tract of the spinal cord 
 itself was reached and irritated. 
 
 The experiments of Magendie and Flourens, in cutting away the con- 
 volutions of the middle and posterior lobes of the brain, were analogous 
 to this supposed proceeding. They removed parts which manifest men- 
 tal emotions, but do not produce pain ; and the organs being destroyed, 
 no emotions and no pain were manifested. These organs are connected 
 by some fibres with the motory tract, but these fibres were cut away from 
 their distal extremities, and no effect on motion was produced until the 
 motory tract itself was assailed ; all which facts accord with the views of 
 the structure and functions of the brain and spinal marrow now presented. 
 
 These experimenters held Dr. Gall's discovery of the functions of the 
 convolutions of the brain in too much contempt to allow themselves to see 
 these plain connections and results. Indeed they did not proceed as if it 
 were possible that his ideas could be true. Still their experiments, how- 
 ever little calculated to throw light on the functions of the convolutions, 
 produced phenomena which harmonized with the functions ascribed to 
 these parts by Dr. Gall. Cuvier reports, that when Flourens destroyed 
 the hemispheres, the animals so mutilated became " quite drowsy ;" they 
 " had no will of their own," and " made no spontaneous motion." Fur- 
 ther, " he pricked the hemispheres without producing either contraction 
 
61 
 
 of the muscles or any apparent pain to the animal." In short, Flourens 
 found that, by cutting downwards from the surface of the convolutions of 
 the brain, he did not cause either muscular contraction, or excite pain, 
 until he arrived " at the top of the medulla oblongata, at the spot where 
 the quadrigeminal bodies are attached to it," but that, by irritating the 
 motory and sensory tracts at this point, he produced both pain and con- 
 vulsions. Magendie produced motion by iiritating the corpora striata. 
 
 These facts appear to show that the proper or peculiar functions of the 
 sensory and motory tracts commence at these parts ; and they accord with 
 Dr. Gall's views of the structure and functions of the convolutions. 
 
 In irritating the brain from below upioards, Flourens found that, after 
 he had passed the point at which the tubercles are attached, his operations 
 produced neither pain nor convulsions. 
 
 This fact also accords with the views of the structure and functions 
 now presented. If the convolutions had been organs of motion or of or- 
 dinary sensation, convulsions and pain should have followed by irritating 
 their fibres at the end next the spinal marrow ; but their functions are to 
 manifest intellectual perception and mental emotions, and Flourens does 
 not report that these powers were not disturbed by his irritations. There 
 are no muscles which receive nerves of motion, nor mucous surfaces 
 which receive nerves of sensation, above the corpora striata and corpora 
 quadrigemina in the brain. These fibres, therefore, which ultimately 
 constitute the convolutions, although proceeding from the motory and 
 sensory tracts, may reasonably be presumed to perform functions distinct 
 from motion and sensation. Our view is, that they are the organs of 
 mental faculties which use muscular motion and sensation as their instru- 
 ments of manifestation ; and the relations of the convolutions to the two 
 tracts in question accord Avith this idea. 
 
 Finally, it will be observed that the fibres of the cerebellum spring 
 from the sensory tract, and also from the motory tract, and that it is situa- 
 ed close to the commencement of these tracts, assuming the commence- 
 ment to be at the tubercles, as asserted by Flourens. 
 
 The results observed by Flourens in his experiments on the cerebel- 
 lum, as reported by Cuvier, were these : " During the ablation of the 
 first slices of the cerebellum, only a little weakness and a want of har- 
 mony in the movements occur. At the removal of the middle slices, an 
 almost general agitation is the result. The animal, continuing to hear 
 and to see, executes only abrupt and disorderly movements. Its faculties 
 of flying, walking, standing up, &c., are lost by degrees. When the cere- 
 bellum is removed, the faculty of performing regulated movements has en- 
 tirely disappeared." 
 
 Although muscular motion is excited, according to jNIagendie, by irri- 
 tating the corpora striata, and, according to Flourens, by irritating the 
 
62 
 
 tubercles, the precise points at which this influence of irritation com- 
 mences is not well ascertained. In cutting away the hemispheres of the 
 brain, the entire convolutions appear to have been removed without mus- 
 cular action having been induced ; whereas it is said that movements 
 were manifested on removing the first slices of the cerebellum. These 
 facts, if they were not liable to great complication and uncertainty from 
 the deep injuries in which they involved the nervous system in general, 
 would appear to shew that the surface of the laminae of the cerebellum is 
 moie directly related to the motory tract than is the surface of the con- 
 volutions of the brain. The motions, however, described by Flourens as 
 accompanying the mutilations, may have been caused by intense pain, 
 arising from irritation communicated through the cerebellum to the sen- 
 sory tract, or by irritation communicated through the same medium to 
 the motory tract, in consequence of the very close approximation of the 
 cerebellum to these tracts. Whether the difference of the effects pro- 
 duced by injuring the convolutions, and by injuring the laminse of the 
 cerebellum, may have arisen from the closer approximation of the cere- 
 bellum than of the convolutions, to both the motory and sensory tracts, 
 it is difficult to determine ; but not one of these results excludes the fact 
 that the cerebellum manifests the instinct of reproduction. 
 
 Farther, there is no specification of the depth to which either the first 
 slices, or the second slices, in these experiments extended, while the last 
 slices extirpated the cerebellum entirely, or cut down directly on the sen- 
 sory and motory tracts. If we consider the connection and close ap- 
 proximation of the cerebellum to the motory and sensory tracts, we 
 shall have no difficulty in discovering how very applicable the follow- 
 ing words of Cuvier are to the phenomena which ensued upon these 
 operations : " After all," says he, " it must be observed, that in too 
 deeply extirpating the tubercles, we interfere with the medulla oblongata 
 and then violent convulsions, which last long, make their appearance." 
 He might have said, with equal reason, that when we too deeply extir- 
 pate the cerebellum, we interfere with the medulla oblongata; and we 
 need not be surprised that an animal which has suffered this mutilation 
 should appear as "in a state of apparent drunkenness," unable to regu- 
 late its movements. 
 
 Dr. Vimont considers that the processus vermicidaris, or middle portion, 
 of the cerebellum, does not perform the same functions with the two late- 
 ral masses ; and he states that he had found it " always large in the 
 climbing animals, such as the cat, the squirrel, and the martin ; and in 
 those whose footsteps are very sure, or which are able to walk easily on 
 sloping ground, or on steep places." Mr. Solly, on the other hand, ob- 
 serves on this point as follows : " Reil held, with Gall and Spurzheim, 
 and I have no doubt he was correct in his opinion, that the ' cerebellum is 
 
63 
 
 not composed of elementary portions essentially different, but is one ho- 
 mogeneous mass.' As I understand the cerebellum, it is one instrument 
 for the production of power, and not many instruments united together. 
 It consists, like the cerebrum, of two hemispheres united anteriorly by a 
 commissure called the pons Varolii ; and by Reil, it is described as being 
 united posteriorly by another commissure, which, projecting on its upper 
 and under surface, forms what have been called, from their appearance, 
 the processus vermijormis superior and inferior. I confess this portion of 
 the cerebellum does not appear to me to be an apparatus of union, but 
 rather a centre of power placed in the mesial line, and connected laterally 
 with the two hemispheres, perfectly analogous to the cerebellum of the 
 bird and hare ; Reil himself stating that, in the brain of the hare, there is 
 little more than a vermiform process. Indeed, a mere section of it ought 
 to be sufficient to convince us that it is no true comissure." — Lib. cit. 
 p. 196. I leave the reader to form his own judgment whether the whole 
 cerebellum performs a single function ; or if, as Dr. Vimont thinks, the 
 middle portion is connected with motion, and the two lateral portions 
 with the instinct of reproduction. 
 
 Professor Broussais says, " I ascribe the direction of the (voluntary) 
 movements, the acts, the aptitudes, which have a reference to generation, 
 to the influence of the cerebellum. But I maintain that these cannot be 
 accomplished without the permission, nay, without the assistance, of the 
 brain ; and that it is in this sense alone that the cerebellum can be con- 
 sidered as the regulator of muscular action." 
 
 These remarks agree with the views of the structure before presented. 
 The cerebellum is composed of fibres connected with the motory tract, 
 and of fibres connected with the sensory tract. It is an organ of feeling, 
 but it also influences voluntary motion by instinctive impulses, as the 
 other feelings do. It is obvious that it may accomplish this effect by 
 means of the fibres before described, which connect it directly with the 
 motory tract of the spinal cord. 
 
 Dr. Broussais continues — " The brain always remains master of the 
 movements of the cerebellum tending towards the act of generation, so as 
 to be able to assist them ; and it effectually exerts this power, in a variety 
 of circumstances, as every one knows." The view of the structure be- 
 fore presented, which regards the anterior lobe as the organ of will, and 
 as composed of fibres, connected directly with the motory tract, accords 
 with these remarks of Broussais. The will^ by means of the powerful and 
 direct influence which the anterior lobe exerts over the motory tract, 
 " remains master" of all the voluntary movements. 
 
 It is now generally admitted by physiologists, that the optic nerves ter- 
 minate in the corpora quadrigemina, which are, in fact, their proper gan- 
 glia. The functions of the retina and optic nerve are to receive and trans- 
 
64 
 
 mit the impressions of light to the brain. It, therefore, is an organ of 
 sensation. These impressions, however, instinctively produce a great 
 variety of muscular movements, especially in the eye itself and its integu- 
 ments. 
 
 The corpora quadrigemina, which are its ganglia, are derived from the 
 corpora restiformia, or sensory tract.* But Reii says, that these corpora 
 also derive fibres from the corpora pyramidalia, or motory tract. This 
 structure corresponds with the idea that the optic nerves are organs of 
 sensation, but that they also influence motion. 
 
 Farther, the eyes are moved by the third pair of nerves, or common 
 ocuLo-MuscuLAR, and by the fourth pair, or innek oculo-muscular. 
 Mr. Solly describes the third pair as connected by one portion " with 
 the motor tract in its passage through the pons Varolii. The other por- 
 tion is partly lost in the locus niger, and party mingled with those fibres 
 which the inter-cerebral commissure, or processus e cerebello, sends 
 through at this point." (p. 246.) line, fourth pair " arise from the inter- 
 cerebral commissure, close to the optic tubercles ; the nerves proceed, in 
 fact, from those fibres which descend to the centre of the crus cerebri, so 
 that we at once observe an immediate connection between the fourth 
 pair and the third, and, as we shall presently see, with the motor root of 
 the fifth also." p. 247. 
 
 This structure, which derives the nerves that move the eyes from the 
 motory tract, is calculated to render them subject to the will, while their 
 origin also from " the inter-cerebral commissure, close to the optic tuber- 
 cles,'''' is in harmony with their subserviency to the instinctive impulses 
 of the organ of vision. Many motions of the eyes are instinctive, and 
 many voluntary. The circumstance of the eyes being provided with two 
 nerves of motion, and one of them, the third pair, having a double root, 
 strengthens the conjecture that there may be two motory tracts, one for 
 voluntary and another for instinctive motion. Some of Mr. Grainger's 
 observations seem to favor this idea. 
 
 * There is still some obscurity in the works of different anatomists on this point; 
 which arises probably from a want of precision in their views of the exact limits of the 
 olivary and restiform bodies. 
 
FIG- 15. 
 
65 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 GANGLIONIC SYSTEM OF VEGETATIVE LIFE. 
 
 Figure 15, 
 
 Is a view of the ganglions of the organs of the body, and other struc- 
 tures, connected with tiie great sympathetic nerve, reduced from Manec's 
 grand plate, by John Harrison Curtis, Esq., London. 
 AAAA, Semilunar ganglion and solar plexus. The ganglion is placed 
 
 upon the base of the two pillars of the diaphragm, one being on each 
 
 side, and the right generally larger than the left. 
 
 B, Small splanchnic nerve. Consists in the union of two or three twigs, 
 
 furnished by the last thoracic ganglia. 
 
 C, Great splanchnic nerve. Formed by the junction of three, four, five, 
 
 or eight twigs, coming from as many thoracic ganglia. 
 DDD, Thoracic ganglia. Ten or eleven in number, corresponding with 
 the posterior part of the lateral side of the body of the dorsal verte- 
 brae ; most of them rest on the head of the ribs ; others correspond 
 with the level of the intercostal space. 
 
 E, Internal branches. All of them are attached upon the body of the ver- 
 
 tebree, and advance, ramifying and communicating with each other, 
 towards the median line, where they are distributed over the oeso- 
 phagus and the aorta. 
 
 F, External branches. Two for each ganglion, very different from each 
 
 other; one large, red, pulpous, and going to the intercostal nerve; 
 the other much smaller, white, giving off no twigs, and passing from 
 the intercostal to the ganglion. 
 
 G, Right coronary plexus. Passes between the pulmonary artery and 
 
 the aorta, and accompanies the anterior coronary artery. 
 9 
 
6G 
 
 H, Left coronary plexus. Passes before the left branch of the pulmo- 
 nary artery, goes to the posterior side of the heart, and accompanies 
 the left coronary artery. 
 
 I, Inferior cervical ganglion. Placed behind the vertebral artery. 
 
 J, Inferior twig.s. Commonly a single branch communicating with the 
 first thoracic oan2;lion. 
 
 K, External threads. Very slender, and communicating with the last 
 cervical and the last two dorsal pairs ; some filaments pass round the 
 subclavian artery. 
 
 L, Internal twigs. Very minute, and distributed to the longus colli, upon 
 the anterior part of the spine : some of them descend to the pulmo- 
 nary plexus. 
 
 M, Anterior threads. Two or three in number, constituting the inferior 
 cardiac nerves. 
 
 N, Middle cervical ganglion. Placed on a level with the body of the 
 fifth or sixth cervical vertebra, and covered by the internal jugular 
 vein. 
 
 O, Interior twigs. Three or four in number, all passing over the infe- 
 rior cervical ganglion. 
 
 P, External twigs. Vary much in number, and give off ramifications 
 communicating with the cervical pairs and the phrenic nerve. 
 
 Q, Superior cervical ganglion. Situated on the anterior and lateral part 
 of the second, third, and fourth cervical vertebrae. 
 
 R, Superior branches. Two in number, and placed behind the internal 
 carotid artery. 
 
 S, Inferior branch. Rarely double, and descends upon the great rectus 
 muscle as far as the middle cervical ganglion. 
 
 T, External branches. Their number very variable ; they communicate 
 with the first, second, and third cervical pair. 
 
 U, Submaxillary ganglion. Situated upon the internal side of the sub- 
 maxillary gland, a little below the stylo-glossal muscle. 
 
 V, Vidian nerve. A branch springing from the posterior side of the 
 spheno-palatine ganglion. 
 
 W, Naso-palatine branch. One of the internal branches of the spheno- 
 palatine ganglion, entering the nasal fossce by the spheno-palatine 
 foramen. 
 
 X, Spheno-palatine ganglion. Placed in the summit of the zygomatic 
 fossa. 
 
 Y, Ophthalmic ganglion. Situated in the orbit, and occupies the exter- 
 nal side of the optic nerve. 
 
 Z, Auditory nerve and membrane of the tympanum, containing, within 
 its cavity, four small bones, viz : the stapes, the incus, the malleus, 
 and the os orbiculare 
 
G7 
 
 1, Renal plexuses. Furnished by threads coming from the solar and 
 coeliac plexuses, and from the last dorsal ganglion, the first lumbar, 
 and the small splanchnic nerve. 
 
 2 2, Lumbar ganglia. Commonly four or five ; the first corresponds 
 with the body of the first lumbar vertebra, the last vs'ith the fifth. 
 
 3, Internal branches. Numerous ; go downwards and inwards to the 
 
 aorta, where they are lost in the aortic plexus. 
 
 4, External branches. Two of these, at least, arise from each ganglion; 
 
 they follow a course more or less flexuous towards the anterior 
 branches of the lumbar nerves. 
 
 5, Aortic flexus. Formed by threads from the solar plexus, superior 
 
 mesenteric, renal, small splanchnic nerve, and internal branches of 
 the lumbar cranglia. 
 
 The " ganglions," connected with the great sympathetic nerve, are bo- 
 dies composed of two nervous substances ; the white or fibrous, and the 
 gelatinous or pulpy, into which the first is plunged. The pulpy matter 
 of the ganglions is commonly of a grey color, of different degrees of in- 
 tensity ; sometimes, however, it has a yellowish, a redish, or a whitish 
 cast. It is easily distinguishable from the nervous filaments which it 
 surrounds. The fibres of the white substance, the second element of the 
 ganglions, anastomose repeatedly ; they also cross each other frequently ; 
 sometimes in every direction, or, in their course, parallel with that of the 
 nerve upon which the ganglion is formed. Ganglions of this last kind 
 are commonly oval shaped, but those in which several nerves meet and 
 inosculate, have, for the most part, very irregular forms. 
 
 " The nerves frequently emanate from distant and opposite sources to 
 unite, anastomose, or twine together, and then to separate and run off in 
 different directions. This is the particular arrangement to which the 
 term plexus is applied." — Spurzheiin. 
 
 In regard to the character and functions of the great sympathetic nerve, 
 its ganglions, and the nerves that issue from thein, Bichat says, — " The 
 ideas of anatomists upon this important nerve, seem to me very little ac- 
 cordant with what nature proclaims to be just. All agree in representing 
 it as a medullary cord, extending from the head to the os sacrum, send- 
 ing various branches, in its course, to the neck, the chest, and the abdo- 
 men ; having, in short, a distribution analogous to the spinal nerve, from 
 which, or from those of the neck, it is said by some to derive its origin. 
 Whatever the name chosen to designate it may chance to be, sympathe- 
 tic, intercostal, or trisplanchnic, the mode of considering it will still be 
 found to remain unchanged. 
 
 " This mode I regard as altogether erroneous. In fact, there exists no 
 such nerve, as these names are used to signify. That which is taken 
 for a nerve is, in truth, but a suit of comnun'rations between different 
 
68 
 
 nervous centres, situated at various distances from each other. These 
 
 centres are the ganglions, scattered through the different regions of the 
 body. They have all an independent and isolated action. Each is a par- 
 ticular focus, sending a multitude of ramifications, to carry into the re- 
 spective organs the irradiations of the centre whence they proceed." 
 
 " What anatomist," he continues, " has not been struck by differences 
 among the nerves ? Those of the brain are larger, whiter, more dense, 
 less numerous, and offering few varieties ; whilst extreme tenuity, great 
 number, especially around the plexuses, greyish color, peculiar softness 
 of tissue, frequently accruing varieties, are, on the other hand, the distin- 
 guishing characters of the nerves that issue from the ganglions. The 
 only exception in either are in the branches of communication between 
 the cerebral nerves and in a few of the twigs that unite the little nervous 
 centres." 
 
 " A glance," says Bichat, " enables us to discover the greatest differ- 
 ence among them (the ganglions.) There is evidently as great a distinc- 
 tion between the ganglions and the nerves that issue from them, as there 
 is between the cerebral nerves and the brain itself There is difference 
 of consistency and other outward qualities, and there is difference of pro- 
 perties." 
 
 On these and other observations of Bichat on the same subject, Spurz- 
 heim remarks, that " notwithstanding all this, the opinion in regard to 
 the use of the ganglions, which Johnstone, Bichat, and Reil entertained, 
 and which others have adopted from them, is by no means exact. They 
 do not interrupt the reciprocal influence of the brain and nerves of the 
 spinal cord, nor of the brain and viscera of the chest and belly, either in 
 the healthy or pathological state of the body. They most certainly do 
 not prevent impressions made on parts supplied with nerves from them, 
 or diseased sensations of the viscera from being felt. On the contrary, the 
 ganglions would appear essential to the structure of the nerves of sensa- 
 tion. They, however, abstract the parts they furnish with nervous en- 
 ergy, from the influence of the will. They also originate nervous fibres, 
 and serve, farther, as points of communication between different nerves. 
 Lastly, as the existence of a nervous fluid is not impossible, nay, as in 
 all likelihood such a fluid does exist, the ganglions may probably aid in 
 its secretion or evolution, and modify its circulation or distribution." 
 
 Willis and many of the old anatomists have ascribed to the ganglions 
 the secretion of what they call the vital spirits. 
 
 On a comparison of all the facts which have come to my knowledge in 
 regard to the structure, situation, connection, and use of the ganglions, 
 connected with the great sympathetic nerve, 1 have no doubt they do 
 "evolve" a nervous fluid, and have none but the fluid they evolve is 
 magnetic. 
 
FIG. 16. 
 
69 
 
 i 
 
 They are undoubtedly nervous centres, and consecutive ma^netio 
 poles, and each a particular focus, sending a multitude of ramifications to 
 conduct into the respective organs the irradiations of the centre from 
 which the nerves proceed, to maintain Ly the action of the magnetic 
 forces continued motion of the organs of the body and other structures 
 with which they are connected. They are elementary organs of vegeta- 
 tive life, having the semilunar ganglions and strong magnetic poles resting 
 on the pillars of the diaphragm fur a common centre, and a connection 
 with the brain and cerebellum by the great sympathetic nerve at n, Fig. 7, 
 which completes the circuit of their connection with the brain, cerebel- 
 lum, organs of the body, and other structures. 
 
 Bichat divided correctly the ganglions, nerves, and plexuses into nu- 
 merous apparatuses, individually necessary to the offices of the different 
 organs ; and Spurzheim, from his knowledge of the subject, believed that 
 division to be founded in nature. The nervous masses of vegetative life 
 he also believed were independent of those of phrenic life, in as far as their 
 existence was concerned, and also recognised their communications be- 
 tween themselves, and with the masses of the phrenic functions. 
 
 GANGLIONIC SYSTEM OF PHRENIC LIFE. 
 
 Figure 16, 
 
 Is intended to show at one view the situation and comparative size 
 of the ganglions of the brain, cerebellum, medulla oblongata, and spinal 
 nerves. 
 
 a a, Great superior ganglions — color, redish z^ey. 
 b 6, Great inferior ganglions — color, bluish white. 
 c e, Cerebellar ganglions — color, bluish white. 
 i i, Olivary ganglions — color, bluish white. 
 hhh, Ganglions of spinal nerves. 
 n n, Pyramidal bodies — color, bluish white. 
 o, Restiform bodies — color, bluish white. 
 d dy Posterior quadrigeminal bodies — color, bluish white. 
 c c, Anterior quadrigeminal bodies — color, bluish white. 
 », Pineal gland — color, redish grey. 
 /, Medulla oblongata — color, bluish white. 
 «, Spineal cord — color, bluish white. 
 tJ, Middle cineriterous portion of spinal cord — color, redish grey. 
 
70 
 
 The ganglions of the brain, cerebellum, and spinal nerves, or those be- 
 lon<^in<^ to phrenic life, are more or less round or oval, and are composed 
 of the white fibrous and cineriterous substance, the latter surrounding the 
 former like the ganglions of vegetative life, except the great superior gan- 
 glion, in which the redish grey, cineriterous, and the white fibrous sub- 
 stance are disposed in alternate layers. 
 
 The former arrangement of the two different substances, or different 
 kinds of matter in the other ganglions, corresponds with the arrangement 
 of the same kinds of matter in the brain and cerebellum, which is reversed 
 in the crura, medulla oblongata, and spinal cord. (Fig. 6 and 15.) 
 
 Physioloo;ists have given us no light on the subject of the cause of such 
 disposition of these substances. We, however, know that different kinds 
 of matter maintain different forces, and that one of thece forces repels and 
 at the same time expands, while the other attracts and contracts. We 
 also know the repulsive force diverges, or is a diverging force, (Fig. 13,) 
 and the attractive force converges, and is, therefore, a converging force, 
 (Fig. 14,) and corresponds with the arrangement of the fibres of the 
 brain ; and as they are good conductors of the magnetic forces, it cannot 
 require, with a knowledge of all these facts, a very great effort of the ima- 
 gination to see that the diverging fibres may radiate from, and the con- 
 verging fibres point to, a pole in the centre of the brain. 
 
 Assuming, then, that the different kinds of matter of which the brain 
 is composed is imbued with these forces, then the order in which they 
 are disposed, necessarily establishes converging lines of the magnetic 
 forces, from the redish grey cineriterous matter in the surface of the brain 
 to the great inferior ganglions, while diverging lines of the forces are es- 
 tablished between the redish grey matter of the great superior ganglions, 
 and the same kind of matter in the convolutions ; for the white fibrous 
 matter in the centre of the brain, and the redish grey matter in its cir- 
 cumference, would attract each other, when one of their forces would 
 converge ; while the redish grey matter of the great superior ganglions, 
 and of the surface of the brain, would repel each other, when their oppo- 
 site forces would diverge, and thus correspond with the converging and 
 diverging fibres. 
 
 The action of the diverging and converging forces may be demonstrated 
 in various ways ; one of the most simple of which is their action on iron 
 filings, when attached to poles of the same and of opposite denominations. 
 When attached to poles of the same denominations they repel and expand, 
 as seen in fig. 17, but when attached to poles of opposite denominations, 
 they attract and contract, as seen in fig. 18, with a power proportioned 
 to the quantity of the forces in the spaces they occupy. 
 
 There can be no dispute about these facts, either in regard to the order 
 in which the different kinds of matter are disposed in the brain, the direc- 
 
FIG. IT. 
 
 FIG. 1 
 
 FIG. 19. 
 
 FIG .20 
 
71 
 
 tion of its fibres, or the action of these forces, which demonstrate their 
 accordance, with the necessary arrangements, to form a pole in a central 
 part of the brain ; for they are subjects of the plainest occular demonstra- 
 tion, and it only remains to show a connection of the brain with these 
 forces, in diiierent and extensive surfaces, to demonstrate the necessary 
 existence of one or more poles in this organ. 
 
 In studying this subject, it will be necessary to examine the different 
 structures of the body, as a mechanist does a mechine, before we can un- 
 derstand either the kind of power by which motion is produced in the 
 human system or the sources from which it is derived. 
 
 EXCRETING SYSTEM. 
 
 On viewing the human frame, we find it covered with a membranous 
 complex structure called the skin. Besides three membranes which are 
 classed under the general term skin or integuments, there are found in it 
 innumerable minute globular bodies called papillary glands. These little 
 globate bodies are found to be highly organized, having minute arteries 
 terminating, and minute veins commencing, in their structure. They are 
 fouild also, by means of magnifying glasses of great power, to have mi- 
 nute ducts issuing from them, and terminating every where with open 
 orifices on the surface of the skin. 
 
 On an examination of the organs, as the brain and spinal cord, eyes, 
 heart, lungs, liver, spleen, pancreas, kidneys, cystis, uterus, stomach, and 
 intestines, we find them all, without a solitary exception, covered with a 
 kind of skin called a serous membrane, in which is inclosed an incalcula- 
 ble number of minute glands or elementary organs, with ducts termi- 
 nating in open orifices on the surfaces of these membranes, like those of 
 the common covering of the body. The glands of both structures are 
 found, on an examination of the orifices of these ducts, to excrete an 
 aqueous or watery fluid, by which these, surfaces are constantly main- 
 tained in a humid or moist state. The great quantity of this fluid seen 
 running off" from the skin, and its accumulation in the cavities containing 
 the organs, when these glands are excited to inordinate action, attest both 
 the perfection of their mechanism and their fitness for their specific use. 
 
 If we now proceed to examine the membrane which lines the internal 
 parts of the body, we shall find it, with slight modifications, characterized 
 by the same structure as the serous membranes. This modification prin- 
 cipally consists in its having what is called a villous, instead of a serous 
 surface, like the serous membranes. We find the whole tract of the ali- 
 mentary canal, including the mouth, sesophagus, stomach, and intestines, 
 lined with this membrane, fB well as the internal parts of every organ. 
 
72 
 
 On a minute examination of the structure of the mucous membranes, we 
 find them, like the skin and serous membranes, enclosing numerous little 
 round or ova! glands or villi, as they are termed, having, like the papil- 
 lary glands of the skin, their appropriate arteries, veins, and ducts termi- 
 nating with open orifices on the surface. They are farthei characterized 
 by numerous little cavities, crypts or follicles, as they are called, which 
 have more or less a spheroidal shape, and which also open upon the sur- 
 faces of these membranes. These ducts and follicles are found to be fill- 
 ed with a semi-fluid or mucus, which is constantly issuing from them, 
 and which spreads upon these membranous surfaces. 
 
 In pursuing this subject, we have thus found two different kinds of sur- 
 faces disposed in two different ways, and thus covered with two different 
 kinds of fluids ; and it is easy to see that there must have been some ob- 
 ject in this order and disposition of these different kinds of matter. 
 
 On investigating the nature or qualities of these fluids, it is found that 
 the excretions from the skin and serous membranes are more or less acid, 
 and those from the mucous membranes more or less alkaline. They are 
 sometimes so strongly acid and alkaline as to excite the curiosity of the 
 most common observer. The acid is found to be the muriatic and the 
 alkali, soda and muriate of soda or common salt. The acids and alkalies 
 which possess directly opposite properties, and have at the same time the 
 strongest affinities for each other, are universally diffused in the earth as 
 well as in the vegetable and animal kingdoms. They constitute two 
 great and principal divisions of matter, one of which, the acid, for the 
 sake of distinction, is called negative matter, and the other, the alkali, 
 positive. Now it is satif<factorily ascertained, from repeated experi- 
 ments, that each of these different kinds of matter gives out constantly an 
 innate and different kind of force. It is also ascertained in the same 
 manner that the alkaline or positive matter gives out the negative force, 
 and that the acidified gives out the positive. The positive matter then, 
 on the internal surfaces of the body and organs, is constantly giving out 
 the negative force, and the negative matter on the external surfaces of the 
 body and organs, the positive force. Besides the immense quantities of 
 these forces accumulated on the different surfaces by the process of excre- 
 tion, large quantities are constantly evolved in the decomposition of food, 
 in the process of digestion ; and in the decomposition of the air, in the 
 process of breathing. On a further examination of the human structure, 
 we find four hundred and thirty-six muscles of different forms disposed in 
 different ways for the purpose of producing motion. We know that they 
 are formed for this purpose, for we can see that some of them expand, 
 and others contract, when we move the body or limbs. For when we 
 bend an arm, we find that the muscles on the outside of it expand, while 
 those on the inside contract. On extendiag the arm, we find this order 
 
73 
 
 reversed; for then the muscles on the inside expand, while those on the 
 outside contract with equal force. One end of each of these muscles is 
 attached to the lower part of the bone belonging to the upper part of the 
 arm, called the humerus, and the other ends are attached to the lower end of 
 the bones of the lower part of the arm, near the wrist, called the ulna and 
 radius ; so that while the lower part of these bones is pushed on one side, 
 when the muscles of that side are expanded, it is pulled at the same time 
 on the opposite side, when the muscles on that side are contracted ; and 
 thus motion is produced by the simultaneous action of these muscles. 
 
 Now it is a remarkable fact, that every one of these four hundred and 
 thirty-six muscles which thus produce motion in different parts of the 
 body, is covered with a membrane, the outer surface of which has a se- 
 rous, and the inner side a mucous surface ; hence these membranes are 
 called mucO'Serous membranes. All these different surfaces, then, like 
 those of the skin and membranes of other parts of the body, are covered 
 with different kinds of matter, presenting together immense surfaces, from 
 which constantly issue two forces of different kinds. 
 
 The reader who has seen a common galvanic battery, cannot fail to ob- 
 serve that this arrangement of surfaces corresponds with that of the dif- 
 ferent metallic surfaces of the battery. He will also notice that these 
 forces thus maintained on these membranous surfaces, exactly correspond 
 with those necessarily maintained on different surfaces of the battery. 
 The two forces are conducted from the two metallic surfaces to the poles 
 of the battery by two metallic wires, and if we can now find conductors 
 to convey the forces from the skin and different membranous surfaces to 
 poles, the resemblance will be complete and satisfactory. 
 
 In pursuing this subject we first find numerous minute threads, called 
 nerves, penetrating the little glands of the skin, serous and mucous mem- 
 branes, and every fibre of a muscle. On tracing these nerves, we see 
 them uniting together and increasing in size in proportion to the distance 
 from these surfaces, and at length conjoining with the brain and spinal 
 cord. The spinal cord is formed into four columns, united first with a 
 broad base, and then with the brain 
 
 These forces are, therefore, conducted from the skin and membranous 
 surfaces and concentrated in the brain to form poles, or a motive power 
 to put in motion this apparently complicated yet really simple machinery. 
 
 This structure, arrangement, and order of the different parts of the hu- 
 man body, were well known to Malpighi, Ruych, Haller, Hunter, and 
 Bichat, and are recognized by every anatomist of the present age, and now 
 present to our view a galvanic battery altogether superior to any ever 
 made by man. 
 
 The forces elicited from different kind of matter, and known by the 
 names of electricity, magnetism, and galvanism, are now believed, by sci- 
 10 
 
74 
 
 entific men, to be the same, their effects only being varied by common 
 causes ; and there can now be no doubt ihat they are innate in every kind 
 of matter, either in an organized or unorganized state, in quantities propor- 
 tioned to the density of the matter or other abiUty to retain them ; the 
 quantity obtained from even one drop of water having been found suf- 
 ficient to put a small battery in motion. 
 
 The common galvanic battery was first constructed by Galvani, and 
 hence called the galvanic battery, fig. 19. 
 
 It is in two parts. A is the battery, and B B the poles connected with 
 the battery A by two copper wires C C. The battery is constructed with 
 alternate circles or layers of sheet copper and sheet zinc. The circles of 
 copper are connected at D, and the circles of zinc at E. These connec- 
 tions terminate in thimbles, in which mercury is placed, to cover the 
 ends of the copper wires, and connect them with the magnet. 
 
 The poles of the battery BB are made of round soft iron, bent in the 
 form of a horse-shoe, and then wound with six coils of copper wire, cov- 
 ered first with oiled silk, and terminating in thimbles, as seen at F F. If 
 the battery A be now placed in a jar of water in which a mixture of sul- 
 phuric and nitric acid has been poured, the acid begins to act upon the 
 circles of copper and zinc, and the two latent forces being liberated by 
 this action, are attracted separately along the opposite wires to the poles 
 of the battery. The pole which is connected with the copper circles 
 will be positive, and that connected with the zinc will be negative. 
 
 Iron and steel rings, discs, and iron and steel of any other form can be 
 magnetised on the poles of such a battery, and one or more poles commu- 
 cated from them to these metallic instruments, and from these to others. 
 
 In pursuing the investigations which resulted in an entire conviction 
 of the necessary existence of a pole in the centre of the brain, strong sus- 
 picions were excited of the existence of a secondary pole, in each lobe of 
 the cerebellum, from the direction of the fibres to their ganglions, and 
 from the manner in which they radiated from them, and also of the exis- 
 tence of a secondary pole in each of the anterior lobes of the cerebrum, 
 from the convergance of the convolutions, on one side, and their promi- 
 mence on the other, in the organs of casuality ; fig. 20. 
 
 The brain and cerebellum would then, if these suspicions were well 
 founded, present the phenomenon of a strong pole in the centre between 
 its middle lobes, and in the third ventricle, and four secondary poles in its 
 circumference ; and as no example of such an arrangement of poles could 
 be found in the whole range of the science of magnetism, it rendered such 
 an arrangement of them in the brain improbable. A disc of saw plate, 
 however, eight inches in diameter, and the tenth of an inch thick, with a 
 round hole in the middle, of an inch in diameter, Avhich would represent a 
 
F I (i . 21 
 
 ^^<^;^§0^§§iMlJii/!^>>^ 
 
 FIG. 2 2 - 
 
75 
 
 middle horizontal section of the brain, was now submitted to actual expe- 
 riment, in the following manner : — 
 
 The middle of the plate or disc was carefully let down in a perpendicu- 
 lar direction on the middle of the positive pole of the galvanic battery, 
 and after having remained there a moment, was raised from its position in 
 a perpendicular direction, turned over, and the opposite side of the plate 
 placed upon, and then removed from the negative pole of the battery in 
 the same manner. 
 
 The plate was then covered with white paper, and fine iron filings were 
 strewed over it, through a fine sieve, when they were immediately ar- 
 ranged by the forces in the plate in the manner seen in fig. 21. 
 
 This experiment was repeated eleven times on plates of from four to 
 fifteen inches in diameter, and always with the same result. It may 
 therefore be inferred to be constant. It presents the double phenomenon 
 of a strong pole in the centre of the open space, in the centre of the plate, 
 and four secondary poles or satelites in the circumference ; corresponding 
 precisely with those before traced in the brain and cerebellum. 
 
 On applying the dipping needle to these poles, they were found to be of 
 different denominations. Those in the circumference at cc, were found 
 to be positive, and those at dd negative poles. When, however, the or- 
 der of magnetising on the different poles of the battery was reversed, the 
 character of the pole in the centre was changed from a positive to a nega- 
 tive pole, and the positions of the positive and negative poles in the cir- 
 cumference were also changed ; the positive occupying the positions of 
 the negative, and the negative those of the positive poles, as seen in fig. 
 22. The secondary poles in the circumference of the brain must be, 
 therefore, of opposite denominations, in the order of those seen in the disc. 
 
 The magnetic axis of the positive and that of the negative secondary 
 poles, cross each other in the centre of the open space in the inside of the 
 disc, each forming two sides of an inverted plane triangle, the base of 
 each of which, from the form of the disc, necessarily forming a spherical 
 side of a triangle, and as the latter is in the circle of the disc, and as this 
 disc is a middle section of a hollow sphere, it necessarily follows that when 
 a hollow sphere or body, more or less round, is magnetised in the same 
 manner, inverted cones are formed. For as the disc is a middle section 
 of a sphere, so are the plane and spherical sides of the triangles middle 
 sections of inverted cones. 
 
 The diverging and converging forces of the pole in the centre of the 
 disc, act constantly on the same kinds of forces of the secondary poles in 
 its circumference, according to their laws, in a contrary direction, and 
 consequently arrange the magnetised iron filings, around the latter in cir- 
 cles, as seen in fig. 21. 
 
 On a careful measurement of the angles of lines, drawn from the centre 
 
76 
 
 of the secondary poles of one denomination, in one hemisphere, to the se- 
 condary poles of an opposite denomination, in another hemisphere, from 
 the median line between the two hemispheres, in well formed brains, 
 they were found to correspond very nearly with the angles of the magne- 
 tic axis in the disc, from a line drawn from a to b, fig. 23. (See AAFF, 
 fig. 5, DD ss, fig. 10, and BB CC, fig. 16.) 
 
 Figure 23, 
 
 The brain is seen placed on its base, and laid open by an incision along 
 the median line, through the corpus callosum, the substance between 
 the great superior and great inferior ganglions of each hemisphere, and 
 medulla oblongata. The primary bundles of fibres of the cerebellum cut 
 away, to show its ganglions and vegetative structure ; and a part of the 
 anterior portion of the brain also cut away, to show its fibres, cut at right 
 angles with their direction. 
 BB, Anterior portion of the brain. 
 CC, Ganglions of the cerebellum. 
 EE, Corpus callosum. 
 A, Third venticle. 
 a a, Anterior quadrigeminal bodies. 
 c c, Posterior quadrigeminal bodies. 
 /, Connection of posterior quadrigeminal bodies, 
 c, Connection of the great sympathetic nerve. 
 dd, Division of the striated bodies into two parts, to show the passage of 
 
 the great bundles of fibres, b. 
 s, Pineal gland with its anterior cords. 
 w, Interior of fourth ventricle. 
 n n, Great inferior ganglions. 
 pp, Great superior ganglions. 
 X X, White fibres in fourth ventricle. 
 V, Posterior commissure. 
 r, Middle or soft commissure. 
 0, Anterior commissure. 
 
 SECRETING SYSTEM. 
 
 I have in the previous part of this chapter given a concise view of the 
 motive system, which was formed for the purposes of motion. The ex- 
 cretions, it will have been seen, are attracted from the blood and then re- 
 pelled from the body. On a farther examination of the human structure, 
 
FIG. 23. 
 
FIG. 2 4. 
 
 FIG. 26, 
 
 FIG. 25. 
 
 FIG 27. 
 
77 
 
 we find another system in which chyle is attracted from the mass in the 
 intestines ; lymph, from the lymphatic glands, and fluids from the sto- 
 mach as well as from every other cavity of whatever size or kind in the 
 whole structure, and conveyed to the heart. We find, therefore, one for- 
 mative system in which the fluids are attracted to the centre of the body, 
 and a motive system by which they are repelled from it. 
 
 The existence of such a system as this is indispensible, not only to fur- 
 nish the fluids necessary for the support and growth of the body, but to 
 supply the waste of those that are necessarily repelled from it, to maintain 
 its different surfaces in positive and negative states, for the purposes of 
 motion. 
 
 This system consists of a vast number of minute vessels taking their 
 origin with patulous or expanded orifices in almost every part of the skin, 
 serous and mucous membranes, and in nearly all the most minute, as well 
 as the largest cavities of the body. They unite and increase in size as 
 they advance from these surfaces and cavities, in two divisions, one from 
 the upper, and the other from the lower part of the body, and at length 
 unite with two large veins very near the heart called venee cavae. In 
 their course to these veins they pass into and then out of a great number 
 of glands, varying in size from that of a very small seed to a large bean, 
 which attract from the blood and mix with the fluids in these vessels a 
 semi fluid called lymph, and are hence called lymphatic glands. When 
 these are viewed through a magnifying glass, we can see the vessels and 
 the nerves b b and c c, penetrating the gland on one side and passing out 
 of it on the other, as seen in fig. 24. 
 
 The lymph secreted by these glands is very thin, under the influence 
 of the natural temperature of the body in health, but when it is reduced 
 the lymph becomes more or less thick, according to the amount of the 
 reduction, and its motion in these minute vessels become more or less 
 difficult. Some of these vessels become entirely obstructed in this way, 
 and the lymph secreted by many of these glands, is accumulated in them 
 in consequence of these obstructions by which the glands themselves are 
 expanded. 
 
 By these accumulations the glands are sometimes enlarged in various 
 parts of the body, to the size of that seen in the figure, before they cease 
 secreting, when the accumulated lymph begins to harden down, and 
 sometimes in a few weeks or a few months becomes as hard as old cheese, 
 and looks, as well as cuts like it. On opening the gland with a scalpel 
 in this state, its interior presents a beautiful conglobate arrangement of the 
 acini, as seen in fig. 25, and as the same is seen through a magnefying 
 glass, fig. 26. 
 
 The organization, it will be seen, is geometrical, and constitutes a beau- 
 tiful comparison with the conglobate form of snow, as seen through a mi- 
 
croscope, ( Fig. 27,) constructed geometrically in the atmosphere with the 
 same forces that produce motion in the gland. The}- are no doubt magne- 
 tised bodies, having, like the brain, a pole in the centre and four satelites 
 in their circumference. 
 
 There are two classes of these glands, in regard to size and situation, 
 which are connected with the brain, through the spinal cord, by the 
 nerves of sensation, while the mucous glands of the mucous and muco- 
 serous membranes are connected with it, through the same channel, by 
 the m.otor nerves or nerves of motion. The lymphatic glands of the 
 laro-est class are situated in places near the structures to which they be- 
 long, and are called by different names, according mostly with the names 
 given to the places in which they are found, while their satelites, with 
 which they are connected, or those of the smallest and most numerous 
 class are situated in the substance of the structures. 
 
 The thymus gland of the first class is situated under the sternum or 
 breast bone, — assists in the office of secretion for the infant, and disap- 
 pears at an age when every other part of the animal system becomes per- 
 fectly developed. The pineal gland is situated in the brain, glandula 
 concatenata; or series of glands in the neck, the thyroid gland upon the 
 cricord cartilage in the lower and front part of the neck, the bronchial 
 around the bronchial tubes, the cardiac near the heart, the axillary in the 
 armpits, the dorsal along the dorsal, and lumbar along the lumbar verte- 
 brae, the mesenteric in the mesentery, the pelvic in the pelvis, the sacral 
 in the sacrum, the inguinal in the groin, and popliteal in the ham, &c. 
 
 The series of these glands along the neck with some of their satelites, 
 together with the principal nerves of the neck and face, with which they 
 are connected, and which continue along the whole length of the spine 
 under the names of dorsal, lumbar, and sacral glands, before noticed, 
 may be seen in fig. 28. 
 a. Porta dura of the seventh nerve. 
 6, Branches ascending along the side of the head, 
 c. Branches to the eyelids. 
 
 rf, Branches to the muscles which move the nostrils. 
 e. Branches to the side of the neck and throat. 
 ^, Connections formed with the cervical nerves. 
 a, Par vagum, or pneumogastric nerve distributed to the larynx, lungs, 
 
 heart, stomach, &c. 
 h, Spinal accessary nerve, 
 i. Ninth nerve or lingualis. 
 j, Sympathetic nerve. 
 k, Laryngeal nerve. 
 /, Recurrent laryngeal nerve- 
 w, Frontal nerve, a branch of the fifth 
 
FIG. 28. 
 
79 
 
 n, Superior maxillary nerve, a branch of the fifth. 
 
 o, Maiadibula labialis, a branch of the fifth. 
 
 p^ Temporal branches of the second division of the fifth. 
 
 9, Sub occipital nerve ; the first of the spine. 
 
 r, Second cervical nerve. 
 
 /, Third cervical nerve. 
 
 On an examination of the fluid that has passed through the lymphatic 
 glands on its way to the heart, with a magnifying glass, it is found to 
 contain a great number of minute round bodies of a white or milky color, 
 which are accumulated in the blood and form its globules. And as every 
 part of the body is found to be made up of minute round bodies connected 
 together by connecting substance, there can be no doubt that they are 
 formed in these conglobate glands, after the pattern of their acini. 
 
 These positive secretions, with the chyle from the intestines, are at- 
 tracted to the heart, and then repelled from it through the arteries to be 
 deposited for the renewal and growth of the body, as well as for supply- 
 ing the excreting system with the necessary fluids for excretion, and the 
 secreting system for secretion. 
 
 A full and constant supply of these secretions or round elementary bo- 
 dies and connecting substance, was necessary to maintain the body in a 
 healthy state, and as the supply through these glands was liable to inter- 
 ruptions from various causes, a large organ, called the spleen, was con- 
 structed with acini to secrete the same fluids, and furnish at all times the 
 necessary quantities for the exigencies of the body. 
 
 We sometimes eat, and at the same or other times, drink more than is 
 necessary to supply the wants of the secreting and excreting systems, or 
 more than they can secrete or excrete ; and as this excess or superabund- 
 ance must, with that which was necessary, be attracted into the circu- 
 lating mass of fluids, it was necessary to have other organs to separate 
 the excess of positive and negative matter ; for under other circum- 
 stances the body would be soon overloaded with matter, and motion 
 would consequently cease. 
 
 The liver was therefore formed to separate the superabundance of po- 
 sitive, and the kidneys the superabundance of negative matter. 
 
 The positive matter thus excreted might be, and is accumulated first 
 in a cistern or gall bladder, and then conveyed through a tube into the 
 intestines, and mixed with other positive matter there ; but it would not 
 do to have the negative matter excreted by the kidneys, and accumulated 
 in its cistern or bladder, conveyed through a tube into the intestines, be- 
 cause it was necessary to keep them constantly covered with positive 
 matter, and it was consequently conveyed to the surface in another di- 
 rection. 
 
 Plants have a similar secreting system ; the fibrous or hairy roots of 
 
so 
 
 plants are vessels with open orifices, through which nutritious matters 
 are attracted from the earth to the bulbs or poles of their roots, and are 
 thence repelled in other vessels through the whole of the cellular and 
 vascular tissues of the plant, tertiiinating in the vasa propria and conglo- 
 bate glands, which secrete the peculiar fluids of the species. 
 
 These fluids are magnetised and changed from the positive to the ne- 
 gative state in the leaves and buds or lungs of the plants, which attract 
 and repel the air through appropriate tubes, and are then attracted to 
 their bulbs to be again repelled from them as before, and deposited for 
 their nourishment and growth. 
 
 Plants have also an excreting system in their skin or bark, as well as 
 in membranes, similar to those of animals, and while those on the surface 
 are maintained like those of animals in a negative state, those of their in- 
 ternal surfaces are maintained in a positive state. Their excretions from 
 their globate glands in the bark and membranes, are like those of the dif- 
 ferent species of animals different in different species. 
 
 The calyx and stalks of the moss rose, as well as of many others of 
 the same species, are more or less covered with prominent glands, from 
 which is repelled an aromatic fluid. 
 
 Their fragrance or perfume, and that of the different kinds of willow, 
 with the geraniums, as well as other nectariferous flowers of the higher 
 orders of plants, are like those of the higher orders of animals, the pro- 
 ductions of their excreting systems, and form, like theirs, a delightful 
 contrast with the disgusting odors from the same systems in the noxious 
 and lower orders of the vegetable, as well as of the animal kingdom. 
 
ai 
 
 CHAPTER IV, 
 
 SENSATION AND MOTION. 
 
 The form and developemetit of the convolutions of the brain differ more 
 or less, not only in the different hemispheres, but in different individuals, 
 like the different forms of the body, head, ears, eyes, and nose. 
 
 The nerves are connected with the brain, medulla oblongata, and spinal 
 cord by a broad base, (Fig. 3, p. 24 ; fig. 4, p. 25 ; fig. 5, p. 42 ; fig. 10, 
 p. 48 ; fig. 16, p. 69,) and with the convolutions, slvin, membranes, and 
 muscles by fibres or small filaments. The nerves are therefore the cords 
 of communication between the convolutions, skin, membranes, and mus- 
 cles, and are good conduclors of the megnetic forces, while the other parts 
 of the body are non-conductors of these forces, and these are precisely 
 the necessary conditions and arrangements for the purpose of accumulating 
 these forces in the centre, and a knowledge of the sensations in the con- 
 volutions in the circumference of the brain. 
 
 The elements of sensation are produced by a modification of the mag- 
 netic forces in the ganglions of phrenic life, and are repelled to the skin 
 and serous surfaces of the body by one set of nerves of sensation, while 
 the sensations, produced in the skin and serous surfaces, are attracted to 
 the convolutions by another. These ganglions were consequently distri- 
 buted to the proper situations to produce such results. 
 
 If we divide the posterior branch D, of the spinal nerve B, fig. 4, p. 25, 
 or a branch of the nerve, sensation cea?.es m the part to which it is distri- 
 buted, but the power of motion continues the same as before. If, how- 
 ever, we divide the motor branch of the nerve C, the power of motion 
 ceases also. So if we first divide the branch C, or any of its branches, 
 the power of motion ceases in the part to which it is distributed, but 
 11 
 
82 
 
 sensation continues the same as before. They are therefore the nerves 
 of sensation and voluntary motion, and are common to all animals from 
 the worm up to man. By them we feel and move, — feel pain and plea- 
 sure, and recede from one or advance to the other, according to the incli- 
 nation excited by the sensation. 
 
 Inclinations, agreeable or disagreeable, are concomitant of and belong 
 to the opposite qualities of the sensations, like the expansions to the re- 
 pulsions and the contractions to the attractions, and they follow them in 
 the same order. 
 
 Sensation, inclination, motion, and form are then, in this order, the at- 
 tributes of these male and female forces, and are the agents by which all 
 nature is formed and animated ; by which the stars, sun, earth, planets, 
 and their satelites were formed, animated, and are moved in orbits with 
 unerring precision, and by which all the orders, genera, species and va- 
 rieties of the vegetable and animal kingdoms were formed with a preci- 
 sion, and adorned with a beauty that defies imitation. 
 
 Nothing can, therefore, equal the adaptation of these forces to produce 
 such results ; for besides their unlimited power, which can make a world 
 tremble like a leaf, the great velocity of their motions and their great and 
 almost inconceivable tenuity, enable them to penetrate the most minute 
 orifices, and construct an infinite variety of bodies of every form and size, 
 and produce motion in the smallest with the same geometrical accuracy 
 as in the largest structures. 
 
 There are thirty-nine pair of nerves distributed through the body, for 
 different and specific purposes ; and as an organ is supposed to be requir- 
 ed for the fulfilment of each, there must be in that case thirty-nine organs 
 of the brain and cerebellum, including the eyes, nose, and ears, and is 
 supposed to be a maximum number which necessarily places man at the 
 head of the animal creation. 
 
 Observations by Dr. F. J. V. Broussais, Member of the Institute of 
 France, Professor to the Faculty of Medicine at Paris, &c., &c., on 
 THE Organ and Propensity of Amativeness. Extracted from his 
 Cours de Phrenologie. Bailliere, Paris and London, 1836 ; 8vo., p. 164. 
 
 " Professor Broussais, after describing the cerebellum and the functions 
 ascribed to it by Dr. Gall, whose opinions he adopts, as being supported 
 by his own observations, proceeds, on page 164 of his Cours de Phreno- 
 logie, as follows : — 
 
 The vivisectors, or those who practise experiments on living animals, 
 have considered the cerebellum as the regulator of muscular movements. 
 They found on the assertion, that when the cerebellum is injured by cut- 
 
S3 
 
 ting slices out of it, the muscular movements become disordered, the ani- 
 mal can no longer direct them according to its will, or according to the 
 end which it appears to have in view ; but similar results are obtained 
 when sections are cut away from the base of the brain, towards the quad- 
 rigeminal tubercles for example; in a word, at the points where the 
 principal nerves of muscular movement unite. 
 
 I acknowledge that I do not comprehend the meaning of the function 
 ascribed to the cerebellum, expressed in these terms — the regulator of 
 muscular movements. In aid of what faculty does the cerebellum regulate 
 these movements ? Is it for the intellect, for the will ? This is not 
 proved. The will regulates motion in the infant as well as in the adult, 
 in the eunuch and in the entire man ; and yet the cerebellum differs much 
 in these different cases. I know that it may be alleged that it executes 
 both functions ; that, in point of fact, it diminishes in volume when it no 
 longer excites to generation, but that it preserves sufficient dimensions to 
 regulate movements. I do not deny it to exert an influence on the volun- 
 tar3' movements, as will immediately be seen ; I mean to prove only that 
 this is not its sole function, and that it exerts a considerable influence on 
 the act of generation. 
 
 Does it regulate muscular movements in reference to the fulfilment of 
 its own functions .' I believe that it does, under certain conditions. This 
 kind of regulating power, then, would be nothing more than a prerogative 
 belonging to it in relation to the generative functions ; on this point I 
 shall enter into some explanations. I have observed in some animals — 
 in fowls, for example — that a blow inflicted on the nape of the neck, 
 makes the animal draw back ; makes it walk backwards sometimes for 
 several seconds. Some diseases of the cerebellum produce the ten- 
 dency to fall backwards. A young man, in whom this organ was 
 affected, in consequence of solitary erotic excesses, felt himself inclined to 
 draw backwards, and occasionally fell backwards. But do these facts 
 prove that the cerebellum is the regulator of the muscles in all cases ? 
 They would rather lead us to think that this organ specially exerts an in- 
 fluence on the extensor muscles of the head, on those of the spine, those 
 of the pelvis, and of the organs contained in it, which are seen to enter 
 into great activity in the act of copulation ; in short, on the muscles of 
 which the organ makes the greatest use in executing its generative func- 
 tion. I can positively affirm, that the capacity for regulating the muscu- 
 lar movements, or manual dexterity, or dexterity of any kind, are not at 
 all in relation to the cerebellum. I have positive evidence that men pos- 
 sessing a large cerebellum can be extremely awkward. 
 
 There is another organ, that of constructiveness, which appears to ex- 
 ert a much greater influence over the regularity of voluntary movements, 
 and to which manual dexterity appears to belong. We shall study it in 
 
84 
 
 a subsequent part of our course. The organ of resistance may be men- 
 tioned also as conducing to this effect. 
 
 Let us, however, consider a little more at length the relations of the 
 cerebellum with the muscular apparatus of locomotion. 
 
 The brain influences all the muscles. This is a fact proved in the most 
 positive manner by pathology and pathological anatomy. An effusion, a 
 rupture which takes place at the converging points of ihe fibres of one of 
 the lobes of the cerebellum, produces as complete a hemiplegia as that 
 which results from effusions occurring in the corpora striata and optic 
 thalamic which belong to the brain ; whence it evidently follows that all 
 the locomotive muscles are in communication, by their nerves, with the 
 cerebellum. We have no reason, therefore, to be surprised that the ex- 
 cite'ment of the cerebellum convulses them, and that the compression of 
 the same organ paralyses them. Moreover, all the muscles assist more 
 or less in the accomplishment of the act of generation, although some 
 contribute to it more powerfully than others. It is necessary, therefore, 
 that all of them, without exception, should be in connection with the 
 brain. 
 
 Let us still add a few remarks, which may assist in throwing light on 
 the question. 
 
 We assert that, in the normal state, the cerebellum alone is not compe- 
 tent to move the muscles. No fact is more certain ; for if the brain do 
 not act, or if it act incompletely, the movements necessary for the accom- 
 plishment of generation do not take place. It follows that the cerebellum 
 alone is not sufficient to execute voluntary movements, and that to ac- 
 complish this object the intervention of the brain is necessary. It may 
 be granted, that the cerebellum excites them and regulates them when 
 the brain acts in concert with it, and the will assists. That it induces 
 the brain to regulate them, with a view to the fulfilment of its functions, 
 is a fiict which may be observed in many of the domestic animals, both 
 birds and quadrupeds, in which the movements connected with genera- 
 tion commence whenever the individuals of the other sex are perceived to 
 be in a determinate attitude. Every one knows that even the presence of 
 the female is not necessary to give rise to these movements, for they 
 commence in the dog whenever we raise it up in a certain manner. It is 
 clear that if his brain did not act, the cerebellum alone would not execute 
 these movements. But if the brain assist, the cerebellum will not fail to 
 legulate them after its own manner, under the conditions just mentioned ; 
 or rather to cause them to be regulated by the will, on which it acts as an 
 instinct. Let us add that, although the will may direct these movements 
 in man, we must acknowledge that they are first reduced to a determinate 
 order by the cerebellum, because it is this organ alone which excites 
 
85 
 
 them in the lower animals, who cannot be taught by education, and in 
 ■whom they cease to appear after castration. 
 
 I ascribe, then, the direction of the movements, the acts, the aptitu ""es, 
 ■which hav^e a refeience to generation, to the influence of the cerebellum. 
 But I maintain that these cannot be accomplished without the permission, 
 nay, without the assistance, of the brain ; and that it is in this sense alone 
 that the cerebellum can be considered as the regulator of muscular action. 
 Thus the brain always remains master of the movements of the cerebel- 
 lum tending towards the act of generation, so as to be able to arrest them ; 
 and it effectually exerts this power, in a variety of circumstances, as 
 every one knows. 
 
 You are aware that Gall has availed himself of a passage in an ancient 
 Greek author to support his opinion on the cerebellum. But that passage 
 is of no consideration in the present state of the science. We have much 
 better methods of arrivinsr at the truth. Gall has the honor of having; es- 
 tablished the proposition, as a positive fact, that the cerebellum is the 
 primary organ of generation. In demonstrating this point, he proceeded 
 by the method of direct or empirical observation, — that is to say, by 
 establishing, by numerous facts, that persons in whom the posterior 
 and inferior part of the head is much developed, and who have the cere- 
 bellum large, are more inclined to the generative act than those whose 
 heads present a different developement.* 
 
 These observations of Dr. Gall have been subsequently confirmed by 
 all inquirers who have studied the subject with due attention, and espe- 
 cially with impartiality; and phrenologists possess considerable collec- 
 tions of skulls and casts which support them. The evidence is so con- 
 clusive, that the generative function is ascribed to the cerebellum, but 
 ■without being able to affirm that it executes no other functions. "I" 
 
 Nevertheless, some individuals, who are opposed to phrenology, main- 
 tain that the generative propensity has been observed very powerful in 
 persons who had scarcely any cerebellum, or whose cerebellum had been 
 destroyed, or in whom only the rudiments of it existed. J I do not know 
 to what extent such alleged facts merits our confidence. For my own 
 part, I declare that they will inspire me with none, until they shall have 
 been verified by phrenologists. It is necessary to be on one's guard 
 against facts which are attested only by the adversaries of a science, be- 
 
 * It will be observed that the question here does not relate to any action exerted by 
 the cerebellum on the muscles, but to an impulse communicated to the genital organs. 
 
 I I have stated in most of my works, the opinion that the cerebellum also exercises 
 an influence on all the viscera. It is known that, when over irritated, it excites vomit- 
 ing, &c. 
 
 I It has not been said that these individuals were incapable of regulating their muscu- 
 lar movements. 
 
86 
 
 cause it is well known to what extent the spirit of speculation may lead 
 to falsehood in assertion. We exhibit collections of positive facts, and we 
 daily repeat our observations. If some exceptions exist, we do not deny 
 them, but set them down as points to be explained. It is not sufficient 
 to shew us merely single cases ; our opponents must make collections in 
 contradiction to ours, and the histories of the individuals must be com- 
 pletely authentic. This has not been done, and we are justified in doubt- 
 ing the truth of these assertions. I defy those who advance them to pro- 
 duce proofs, — I shall not say superior to those which we exhibit, but at 
 all equal to them. For my own part, whenever, since I knew the sys- 
 tem of Gall, I have been consulted by individuals who complained of the 
 inactivity or infidelity of the generative organs, I have immediately di- 
 rected my attention to the cerebellum, and I have always found it very 
 depressed. When children have been presented to me, who, before the 
 age of puberty, have manifested an extraordinary propensity towards the 
 sexual act, and who have divined the process supplementary to it, I have 
 always found the cerebellum very largely developed. This has never 
 failed. I defy the opponents to produce pathological facts which can be 
 weighed in the balance against those which I possess of this description. 
 Dr. Gall has also remarked that diseases which irritate the cerebellum, 
 maintain the organs of generation in a state of morbid excitement. No- 
 thing is more true. M. Serres has made the same observation ; and se- 
 veral other observers, worthy of confidence, have reported analogous 
 facts. Other contradictory facts have been cited. It has been said that 
 inactivity of the genital organs has coincided with other diseases of the 
 cerebellum, such as scirrhous tumors and tubercles. Who does not know 
 that chronic diseases causes organs to lose the power of exercising their 
 functions .'' Even a smatterino- of medical knowledo;e is sufficient to be 
 convinced of this truth. Thus, a disease of the cerebellum, which at 
 first presented the characteristics of inflammation, and was attended by 
 excitement of the muscles and of the functions of generation, may termi- 
 nate in degeneration of the parts, which shall produce inertness in the or- 
 gan, and destroy this excitenjent. The objections, then, are not of much 
 weight. Besides, without forcing facts, without straining our ingenuity, 
 without hunting for sophisms, who does not know that a moderate ex- 
 citement of the brain exalts the movements of the moral and intellectual 
 faculties, and that a more powerful excitement, which induces congestion, 
 paralyses them .'' Why will it not be allowed that the cerebellum, when 
 excited to a certain extent, may increase the activity of the genital organs, 
 and that, at a later stage, when congested to excess, it may paralyse 
 them. This should be the case; and, indeed, cannot be otherwise But 
 the adversaries of a doctrine take advantage of all facts which appear to 
 them to be capable of shaking its credit. 
 
87 « 
 
 It has been said, also, that extraordinary and morbid excitement of the 
 genital organs has taken place in coincidence, or in connection, with dis- 
 eases of the spinal marrow. I can easily conceive this to be the case ; 
 because the nerves which communicate feeling and activity to the gene- 
 rative organs do not proceed directly from the cerebellum to them ; they 
 descend through the spinal marrow. Why, then, if the spinal marrow be 
 irritated, should these nerves not excite the genital organs .' This is very 
 conceivable, and we see proofs of it in the interesting work of M. Olivier 
 d'Angers, as well as in the experiments of Dr. Segalas, who has produced 
 emissions in guinea pigs, by irritating the spinal marrow in the lumbar 
 region. A nervous trunk, when irritated, produces excitement in all 
 the parts on which the nervous filaments proceeding from it are rami- 
 fied. 
 
 Thus it appears that all these objections are of very little importance, 
 and can do nothing to invalidate the results of direct observations, which 
 are constantly repeated. 
 
 Dr. Gall has been so bold as to hazard the statement that the develope- 
 ment of the genital organs exercises no influence on their activity ; that 
 they may be inert although very much developed, if the cerebellum be 
 very little so. At first 1 refused to admit the correctness of this fact ; but 
 experience has proved to me that it is true. I have ascertained the inert- 
 ness of the genital organs in man, although very considerably developed ; 
 but the cerebellum was depressed. I have ascertained also the contrary, 
 in opposite conditions, in such a manner that I can no longer doubt. I 
 assure you that it has not been from rashness, nor without reflection and 
 numerous observations, that I have ventured to take up the defence of 
 phrenology. I have multiplied observations, as far as it has been possi- 
 ble for me to do so, before entering the lists of its defenders. 
 
 We must, however, consider the manner in which the cerebellum acts 
 in executing the function of generation, which appears to be its principal 
 function. Perhaps Gall has scarcely entered into sufficient details on this 
 subject. I shall attempt, so far as my limited ability will permit, to sup- 
 ply this defect. 
 
 The cerebellum certainly does not form the ideas connected with gene- 
 ration : these belong to their proper organs (in the anterior lobe of the 
 brain). This fact is very observable in the lower animals. Many of 
 them, whose ideas are very obtuse, nevertheless present a very powerful 
 instinct of generation. Erotic ideas, then, must not be ascribed to the 
 cerebellum ; it is by the manner in which the latter excites the brain 
 that it calls up these ideas in man ; it keeps them up, because a relation 
 has gradually become established between it and ideas of that kind. When 
 the perceptions of the senses have arrived at the intellect, these percep- 
 tions become associated with the cerebellum in proportion as this organ is 
 
I 88 
 
 increased in growth, in the same manner as other ideas associate them- 
 selves with other feelings.* 
 
 In a former lecture I have given some explanations on this point. Do 
 not therefore, reo-ard the cerebellum as the immediate seat of sexual ideas, 
 but as the organ which excites these ideas, and as a means of keeping 
 them up and of recalling them. 
 
 The cerebellum appears to be the primitive organ which excites the 
 oro-ans of generation to secretion and erection at the developement of 
 puberty. The cerebellum begins to grow large before the organs of gene- 
 ration develope their powers. Thus, it is the cerebellum which puts 
 them in action, which impels them to develope themselves, and which, 
 in short, excites them to the secretion of a prolific fluid and erection. 
 But, at the same time, it excites the encephalic apparatus. It acts, then, 
 in two directions ; for the ideas relative to generation assume an entirely 
 different color, when the cerebellum is developed, from that which they 
 
 • This portion of the text will probably appear obscure to readers who are not ac- 
 quainted with phrenology. It may be thus elucidated. According to phrenology, the 
 intellectual faculties alone form ideas, and they are manifested by the anterior lobe of 
 the brain. The feelings are connected with the posterior and middle lobes ; and the 
 intensity of each feeling bears a proportion (other conditions being equal,) to the size of 
 of its own special organ, and not to the size of the intellectual organs. Hence, if lascivi- 
 ous objects be presented to the eyes, or addressed to the ears of two different individ- 
 uals, they may see them, and hear them, and understand them, with equal precision, by 
 means of their intellectual organs, if these be equal ; but if, in the one, the cerebellum 
 be extremely deficient, the objects will excite in him a very feeble sexual emotion ; 
 while, if the cerebellum be very large in the other, they will make a deep impression, 
 and call forth a lively interest in him. In this case, the ideas or conceptions of the ob- 
 jects (being equally clear in both individuals,) depend on one set of organs, (the intel- 
 lectual,) which they possess in an equal degree ; while the emotion (differing so widely 
 in intensity) depends on another organ, (the cerebellum,) in the size of which they dif- 
 fer ; in other words, it is not the cerebellum, but the anterior lobe, which forms ideas. I 
 have found these views confirmed by many facts. For example, — those individuals in 
 society whose delicacy is most sensitive, when allusions are made to the sexual feeling, 
 are nut those who have a small cerebellum, and in whom the feeling itself is most weak 
 Such persons, although their intellect be good, are dull in apprehending these allusions 
 when veiled ; and when the expressions used are too distinct to be misunderstood, they 
 appear to them to partake as much of the character of impertinences as of indelicacies. 
 On the contrary, when the cerebellum is large, and the corresponding feeling is strong, 
 in combination with large organs of the moral sentiments, which furnish purifying and 
 controlling motives, the persons thus constituted are extremely sensitive to indelicate 
 allusions. They dicine them even when shrouded in the most studied ambiguity ; they 
 understand their nature, and could enjoy them, but that their moral feelings condemn 
 them ; and from this conflict and condemnation arises the sensitiveness of their minds 
 in regard to such topics. When the cerebellum is very large, and the moral organs are 
 deficient, there is a want of delicacy corresponding to the deficiency of the purifying 
 and controlling powers. The individual is then very much in the condition of the lower 
 animals in regard to this feeling. — Translator. 
 
89 
 
 previously possessed. It excites the sentiments and intellect. Moreover, 
 the cerebellum receives excitement from the genital organs depending on 
 the double cause which I have just mentioned, secretion and erection. 
 There is a reciprocity of action between them. Thus the sexual excitement 
 may begin by the imagination, or by the perception of the object, or origi- 
 nate in the organs of generation themselves. 1 must avoid entering into 
 details on this point. In the last case, as soon as the organs are excited, 
 they communicate a stimulus either to the cerebellum, which reacts on 
 the brain, or to the brain, which in its turn excites the cerebellum. 
 
 The cerebellum is maintained in its normal degree of developement by 
 the continuance of the generative action. If the genital organs, the or- 
 gan of secretion in particular, which is the foundation of this function, 
 disappear, the cerebellum diminishes. Castration proves this fact : the 
 cerebellum becomes depressed, the lower part of the head shrinks, while 
 the other parts preserve nearly their original dimensions. When the bull 
 is converted into an ox, the nape of the neck is observed sensibly to 
 shrink. Nevertheless, this shrinking does not proceed so far as it does 
 when castration has been performed before the developement of the or- 
 gans of generation and of the cerebellum ; and the muscular system pre- 
 serves a greater volume and more energy in animals which have been 
 castrated after the evolution of the genital organs, than in those who have 
 been mutilated before it. This is a fact which has been often observed, 
 and which is now turned to account. If one wishes to have a strong 
 horse, for example, it is usual not to subject him to castration until after 
 he has been completely developed. In this case, the falling in of the 
 nape of the neck never goes so far as if the operation had been performed 
 before the evolution of his generative system, although it does take place 
 to a perceptible extent. Hence it is clear that the cerebellum preserves 
 its normal volume as long as the genital organs preserve their action ; and 
 that, when this action is withdrawn, the cerebellum, and the muscles 
 also, losing their activity, experience a diminution in volume. 
 
 There is another important fact which has been turned to advantage 
 on both sides of this argument. When castration takes place in man, 
 after the complete developement of the genital organs, he continues to 
 form erotic ideas, while he entertains none, if the operation has been per- 
 formed before puberty. Every one knows that in those countries in 
 which their manners tolerate this species of mutilation, certain eunuchs 
 continue to feel an inclination for the other sex when they have suffered 
 castration only after complete developement. Those who cultivate Ro- 
 man literature will recollect certain verses of Juvenal, too coarse to be 
 quoted, in which he castigates the lubricity of the Roman ladies. He 
 mentions that they did not mutilate the young men chosen for their baths, 
 and with whom they intended to abuse themselves, until after the com- 
 12 
 
90 
 
 plete developement of puberty. At this epoch, the cerebellum having 
 acquired its full developement, had modified the other organs of the en- 
 cephalon in such a manner that erotic ideas did not disappear completely, 
 and that erection could still take place without secretion. 
 
 Another physiological and pathological observation appears to me to 
 merit attention. When erotic excitement has been long abused, it estab- 
 lishes in the nerves of the whole generative system, in those of the 
 neighboring organs, and even in all the lumbar and femoral muscles, a 
 mode of action, accompanied by a kind of sensation which tends to pass 
 from pleasure into pain, and which, for want of a better phrase, may be 
 named une volupte douloureuse. This perversion of sensibility does not 
 cease to make progress, and ends in a considerable diminution of the mus- 
 cular vigor of these regions. The species of semi-paraplegia which re- 
 sults from it is generally incurable. 
 
 I shall now exhibit some specimens of the cerebellum. In this head 
 (shewing a cast to his audience,) there is an enormous developement of 
 it. The distance between the two ears is prodigious, even disgusting and 
 repulsive, from the resemblance which it bears to a brute. This man 
 was guilty of several crimes against chastity in England, each more 
 abominable than another, which forced him to go into exile. You will 
 observe also that those parts (at the sides of the head,) where the selfish 
 propensities are situated, surpass in developement all the other regions of 
 the encephalon, and greatly exceed the intellectual organs in size. No 
 controlling power opposed the action of the organs which produced his 
 crimes. You have here (showing other casts,) examples of the cerebel- 
 lum much developed in men who possessed distinguished intellectual fa- 
 culties with elevated sentiments, and their high reputation proves that 
 the generative instinct never led them to reprehensible actions. Here 
 again is the head of a man who was passionately devoted to natural his- 
 tory, and curious in collections. He was very fond of women. You ob- 
 serve that the cerebellum is very much developed ; but the higher facul- 
 ties are very powerful, they were cultivated, and the honorable recol- 
 lections which the savant has left behind him, shew that the organ of 
 generation did not reign despotically over his conduct. 
 
 The same observation applies to the head of Gall,* and to many others 
 which it is unnecessary to present. 
 
 Here, again, is the head of Pigault-Lebrun, whose romances partake 
 largely of the erotic quality, but, after all, are not gross. You see in this 
 other head the perceptive organs well developed, much self esteem and love 
 
 * The cerebellum was largely developed in Gall, and although the feeling did not 
 subjugate his intellect, it produced irregularities of conduct which were reprehensi- 
 ble. — Translator. 
 
NERO 
 
 CEREBELLUM VERY LARGE. CEREBELLUM LARGE. 
 AARON BURR. AARON BURR. 
 
 CEREBELLUM LARGE. 
 
 CEREBELLUM LARGE. 
 
^4H''§ 
 
 f% 
 
 Cerebellum moderate. 
 
 Cerebellum small. 
 
 Cerebellum moderate. 
 
 Cerebellum very small 
 
 Bust of the skull of a murderer. 
 
 Cerebellum large. 
 
 Cerebellum very large. 
 
91 
 
 of approbation, in a word, organs capable of guiding the action of the cere 
 bellum. I wish you always to study the organs in this manner, I mean in 
 their mutual relations. I could greatly multiply these observations ; but 
 as we are obliged to take our examples from persons who are well known, 
 to inspire the greater confidence, one feels a delicacy in bringing too many 
 forward. 
 
 I shall now shew you several examples of an opposite [description. 
 This head is that of a mathematician who felt aversion to the sex, and 
 was never married. He has the reputation of having remained in the 
 ' virgin state. Here is another whose condition was precisely the same. 
 You may easily conclude that their actions were dictated by those regions, 
 which you perceive to be predominant, the anterior and superior, and not 
 by the posterior region, the depression of -which is strikingly conspicuous. 
 
 I here shew you the head of Bontillier, a brigand. He was abandoned 
 from the first to all sorts of vices, and at last degraded by the crime of 
 parricide. You observe the enormous developement of the posterior and 
 lateral regions, and no adequate powers of control in the anterior lobe. 
 He was besides uneducated. There is always a deficiency in the de- 
 velopement of the controlling organs in those men who have been guilty 
 of disgraceful crimes in relation to the cerebellum. 
 
 AUXILLIART FACULTIES. 
 
 After these details, I shall notice the organs which favor the action of 
 the cerebellum, and those which tend to repress it. I shall follow this 
 course in examining all the other organs, wherever they admit of my do- 
 ing so. The organs which favor the action of the cerebellum are those of 
 the soft affections, of friendship and attachment, and especially those of 
 the love of children, imitation, the sentiment of mirthfulness, ideality or 
 imagination, a considerable activity of the perceptive organs, particularly 
 of music and of benevolence. All these, to use a vulgar expression, lend 
 strength to temptation. 
 
 ANTAGONIST FACULTIES. 
 
 The feelings and intellectual faculties which act in a contrary direc- 
 tion to the cerebellum, are rage, hatred, cunning, and circumspection ; 
 because these last organs force men to reflect, and during reflection the 
 activity of the instinct of propagation diminishes. The organ of acquisi- 
 tiveness may be added ; almost all misers are indifferent to sexual plea- 
 sures. This is a remarkable fact. One of the greatest enemies of this 
 
92 
 
 function is shame, combined with a want of self-confidence, especially 
 when these two are remarkably strong. Want of self-confidence pro- 
 duces much relative impotency ; that is to say, impotency which exists 
 only in certain circumstances, and which may occur with a suflnciently 
 vigorous generative power. I assure you, without hesitation, that I have 
 been much assisted by the system of Dr. Gall in my diagnosis of ana- 
 phrodisia {the want of the generative power.) I easily recognise the in- 
 dividuals in whom the defect of power is relative merely, caused by the 
 want of courage and self-confidence, combined with a large developement 
 of the organ of credulity (wonder). Such are the inen who are made to be- 
 lieve that their scrotum is tied,(qu'ils ont I'aiguillette nouee,) words which 
 may be paraphrased by the expression, that they labor under relative im- 
 potency. The opposite conditions are not less striking for the observer ; 
 for the men who have abundance of self-conceit always act up to their 
 means, whatever these may be. It is, therefore, not without cause that 
 coxcombs, presumptuous persons, and even fools, are renowned for their 
 success with the fair sex. It is curious to trace the relations of these 
 vulgar opinions to the anatomy and physiology of the brain. 
 
 On the other hand, and in regard to the influence of the intellect, it is 
 not the less certain, that the generative power is enfeebled by the sustain- 
 ed exercise of reflection, by abstract researches into causation, and by me- 
 ditation ; by the excessive study of mathematics, and by all those kinds of 
 labor which tend to call the nervous energies towards the organs of thought 
 situated in the anterior lobe. An excessive developement of the organs 
 of order and weight are not favorable to the functions of the cerebellum. 
 Men extremely formal, regulated, and methodical, experience in these dis- 
 positions a kind of counterpoise, which preserves them from excesses to 
 which, otherwise, this organ would prompt them. At the same time you 
 will bear in mind that the organ is sometimes so predominant that it over- 
 comes all these obstacles ; but unless it is so to a great extent, it may be 
 guided by these other powers. The effect of these influences may be ob- 
 served in both sexes, but more particularly in women, for whom, in 
 general, celibacy is less distressing than for men. In a word, all 
 the feelings which tend to egotism, (according to Dr. Sarlandiere, 
 who admits a group of this nature,) all the faculties which dispose to re- 
 flection and meditation, furnish checks against the abuses of the organ of 
 generation ; while gaiety, dissipation, pride, presumption, imagination, 
 and intellectual idleness, all contribute to increase its activity. 
 
 An extremely large developement of the cerebellum tends to produce 
 excesses, of which the following are the consequences : These excesses 
 induce exhaustion of the nervous energy more efficaciously than the ex- 
 traordinary activity of any other propensity, because the act of generation 
 partakes to some extent of the nature of a convulsion. It weakens pro- 
 
93 
 
 digiously the locomotive power, and at the same time the vigor of the 
 intellectual faculties, in such a manner that it is one of those functions, 
 the excess of which is the most prejudicial to the individual. A multi- 
 tude of diseases are the results of its abuse, and especially convulsive af- 
 fections, disturbances of circulation, and derangement of digestion. Its 
 moral eftects are disorder in affairs ; for such excesses induce stupidity, 
 or at least a deplorable indolence. 
 
 These consequences should not be lost sight of in education. Those 
 young persons who feel themselves in danger of being overcome by this 
 propensity, should betake themselves, in due time, to the corrective in- 
 fluences which we have pointed out, if they do not wish to expose them- 
 selves to moral and physical degradation, and abridge the course of their 
 existence. 
 
 DEFECT OF DEVELOPEMENT. 
 
 The effects of deficient developement of the cerebellum may be men- 
 tioned. This defect weakens the benevolent affections : we have already 
 remarked that the malevolent affections tend to depress the generative 
 functions. Defect of the cerebellum permits the egotistical sentiments to 
 assume the ascendancy. The best judges of human nature desire always 
 to see this propensity rather a little too vigorous than too weak. It then 
 exercises a favorable influence on the benevolent affections. This fact is 
 certain. Eunuchs afford evidence of it. The selfishness of these beings 
 is proverbial. In our day they do not act important parts in public af- 
 fairs ; but history presents us with examples of eunuchs who were minis- 
 ters of state, generals of armies, in a word, distinguished personages. Al- 
 most always, egotism, coldness of heart, defect of benevolence, and jeal- 
 ousy, have characterized them.* 
 
 * The doctrine in the text appears to be rather vaguely expressed. The organ of ama- 
 tiveness never produces, as its proper function, any other feeling than that of love be- 
 tween the sexes, and it is not, therefore, a generous or moral propensity. Its direct 
 object is the gratification of the being who experiences its impulses. It exercises, how- 
 ever, an extraordinary influence in exciting to activity all the other organs with which 
 it is combined ; but there is no preference, in this respect, in favor of the moral organs. 
 If it be large, and be combined with large moral organs, it will stimulate them into acti- 
 vity towards the opposite sex, and a young man will then become chivalrously kind, 
 good, and brave, in every thing regarding women. Its influence will he the same in 
 the case of the opposite sex. They, under the influence of a similar combination, will 
 be kind and generous to men. The extraordinary interest which some women feel in 
 boys, out of all reasonable proportion to their love of girls, arises from the same combi- 
 nation. 
 
 But if the same degree of the organ of amativeness be combined with deficient moral, 
 and large animal organs, it will stimulate the latter, and the unhappy possessor of this 
 
94 
 
 Depraved manifestations of this propensity have much less reference to 
 the predominance of the cerebellum than has been generally believed. 
 This species of corruption is owing rather to the deficiency of the moral 
 and intellectual faculties. It is favored by bad education, by example, by 
 the sequestration of the sexes. Certain other propensities may contribute 
 to it, such as the love of children, for these affections are nearly related. 
 The propensity, in some persons, to enjoy their own sex may also, ac- 
 cording to some late observations, occasionally bear reference to the indi- 
 vidual himself possessing several feminine qualities. It is suspected, for 
 example, that the taste which prompts a man to substitute one of his own 
 sex for a woman, proceeds from the predominance of some organs pecu- 
 liar to woman, particularly in the passive object. In like manner, the 
 analogous vice in females, supposes a woman who possesses masculine 
 qualities by the configuration of her brain. These ideas are not my own. 
 They were communicated to me by a phrenologist, an accurate observer, 
 who will publish them by and bye. I am far from appropriating them. 
 They are very interesting ; because it is repugnant to reason to ascribe to 
 the generative propensity, Mhich has such a determinate and direct ob- 
 ject, as the approach of the two sexes, disgraceful vices, that degrade 
 men without realizing the object intended by nature. 
 
 The generative instinct acquires vigor by exercise, if the act has not 
 been carried so far as to exhaust the strength and deteriorate the organs. 
 It is weakened by inactivity. This fact is easily proved by observing 
 Cenobites and all persons who live in celibacy. After having painfully 
 resisted the propensity in youth, both sexes at last become entirely mas- 
 ters of it, to such a degree as scarcely to feel its existence at an age at 
 which those who have been in the practice of exercising it moderately, 
 still enjoy decided powers of reproduction. 
 
 These remarks accord perfectly with the previous observations which 
 I made relative to castration. We state that the generative organ long 
 maintains its activity in the male sex, when it is properly exercised, pro- 
 vided no organic affection exist in the vicera ; while it decays in the op- 
 posite conditions. 
 
 combination will become only the more sensual, brutal, selfish, and ferocious, the more 
 he is governed by his cerebellum. This power of the cerebellum to excite the organs of 
 the animal propensities, where these predominate, explains the atrocious murders which 
 some men commit on the victims of their sexual passion, not only in the fury of storming 
 besieged towns, but in cool blood. Many years ago I saw a man and woman walking 
 on the brink of the precipitous rock which forms the western front of Salisbury Craigs, 
 near Edinburgh. A few minutes afterwards I heard an alarm, and saw the body of the 
 woman lying at the foot of the sloping bank below the rock, dashed to pieces. Her 
 paramour had pushed her over the precipice to avoid the consequences of his illicit 
 love. He escaped down the slanting side of the hill, and was never afterwards heard 
 of. — Translator. 
 
95 
 
 I have treated of this function at considerable length, because it is very 
 important, and phrenologists in general ascribe to it a high rank. It is, 
 indeed, the most indispensible of all, for it leads to the preservation of the 
 species; p. 187. 
 
96 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 APPLICATION OF THE MOTIVE POWER OF THE HUMAN SYSTEM TO DETER- 
 MINE THE CHARACTER OF A LARGE CLASS OF CHRONIC DISEASES. 
 
 The motion of the magnetic forces, along the spinal nerves, furnish 
 us vrith the means of distinguishing, with great fecility and perfect preci- 
 ison, a large class of chronic diseases of the organs and limbs. 
 
 This class of diseases, often mistaken by the best physicians, and 
 known by the general name of tubercular disease, attacks and consigns, to 
 a premature grave, its millions, every year, of the most amiable and talent- 
 ed portion of our race ; and as these symptoms are believed to be of great 
 importance both to the physican and his patients, I shall select and copy 
 here, from my Case Book, a few cases in which these magnetic symptoms 
 were practised, to show the ease and certainty with which the disease is 
 now distinguished. 
 
 Mrs. J. P., of good constitution, light complexion, and naturally full 
 habit, aged 22 years. 
 
 Called to see her January 11th, 1835. She has a swelling on the 
 right side of her neck and face, which commenced about the 10th of No- 
 vember last, and has been out of health about three years. 
 
 Suspecting tubercula, and without making further inquiries, and in the 
 presence of a number of gentlemen and ladies, I commenced an examina- 
 tion of the lymphatic glands along both sides of the spine, and first with 
 those of the first cervical vertebroe, and pressed with the finger upon one 
 lying close to the right side of the vertebrae, and of the size of a very 
 small bean, which produced a scream from severe spasmodic pain, which, 
 on every repetition of the pressure, darted violently and with the rapidity 
 
97 
 
 of lightning into the external cervical and submaxillary tubercles, and into 
 the upper jaw, ear, and right side of the head ; and on her complaining 
 of its darting also into her throat, I examined it, and found two tubercles 
 rising conspicuously in the right tonsil, and one in the gum of the upper 
 jaw, all of which were very sore, and also painful under pressure. I now 
 applied pressure in the same way to these cervical and submaxillary tu- 
 bercles on the side of the neck and the under jaw, which produced the 
 same kind of pain in them, which, at every repetition of the pressure, 
 darted violently along the neck and under the clavicle into the upper por- 
 tion of the right lung. I now applied pressure to the left side of the first 
 vertebra, on a still smaller tubercle, and she screamed again, and pointed 
 her finger to the spot the pain darted to, on the upper portion of the left 
 side of the neck, and on examination I found there a large submaxillary 
 tubercle, and on applying pressure to this, the scream was again repeated, 
 and she at the same time applied her hand to the left breast or mamma, 
 and then pointed out the course of the pain from the tubercle along the 
 neck and under the clavicle into the breast. I now examined it, and 
 found it every where literally crammed with tubercles of the size of peas ; 
 breast one-third larger than the right ; color of the skin natural. The 
 other breast flaccid every where, and neither gland or tubercle to be felt 
 in it or in the axilla of the left side. 
 
 The small tubercles along the right side of the other cervical vertebrae 
 were sore or tender, and pressure on the upper ones sent darting pains 
 into the right side of the neck, and on the left side of the lower one into 
 the region of the heart, and checked her breathing. Pressure applied now 
 on the sides of the first, second, third, and fourth dorsal, produced pain 
 which darted into the stomach ; and on the second, third, fourth, and fifth 
 lumbar, produced the most severe spasmodic pain, and darted violently 
 into the uterus. Pressure on the sides of the other vertebrae produced no 
 pain or effect whatever. 
 
 I now inquired at what time she first discovered tubercles or swellings 
 on the side of her neck } She answered, about the first of June, or the 
 first of July, her attention was first directed to one on the side of her face 
 in front of the ear, that was very sore, and at times painful, and that at 
 such times there was " soreness along the chords" of the neck, but " ne- 
 ver thought of examining there for tubercles." I now told her she must 
 have white swellings of some of her joints or limbs, besides that of the 
 neck and face, when she presented her left arm permanently flexed in an 
 obtuse angle. On removing the clothing from this arm, it presented a 
 white swelling of the elbow joint and arm. The swelling of the arm was 
 united to that of the joint, and extended more than half way to the 
 shoulder, and there was plainly felt along the under side of this swelling, 
 or under and inner side of the arm, a large or wide ganglia of tubercles, 
 13 
 
98 
 
 extending from the elbow six or seven inches above it. These tubercles 
 were of the size of peas, near the elbow, but became gradually smaller, 
 and of the size of small seeds where they were lost in the upper part of 
 the swelling. 
 
 I inquired now, whether she had any other swellings about her, when 
 she answered, " no, that's all," but I told her it would not do, — she must 
 have white swellings of the limbs and joints of the right side, as well as 
 of the left ; and after viewing me for a moment with an expression of 
 hesitancy, she began to make preparations to show me her right leg. It 
 was swelled from the ankle to the knee, and had an elastic and puffy feel, 
 and I plainly felt along the front and sides of the tibia, small tubercles 
 from the size of small seeds to that of a small pea. She now told me she 
 would show me the other one. It was swelled, and in all respects like 
 that of the right leg. 
 
 Diagnosis, tubercula of the uterus, both legs, left arm, left breast, heart, 
 stomach, right lung, cavity of the ear, right lobe of cerebellum, right side 
 of the neck, upper jaw of right side, and right tonsil. 
 
 On applying the stethescope to the region of the heart, I found its ac- 
 tion strong, and it appeared to strike hard against the ribs, but its sound 
 was subdued or muffled, and its action M'as felt and heard under the clavi- 
 cle of the right side, very nearly as plain as in its own region, but could 
 hear it very slightly under the left clavicle, and left and right side of the 
 back. The respiration was natural in every part of the chest, except in 
 the upper portion of the right lung, where it was very slight, and at times 
 inaudible. Diagnosis by stethescope. Hypertrophy of the heart and tu- 
 berculated upper and front portion of the right lung. 
 
 I now inquired into the history of this case, which is as follows : — 
 
 The disease commenced about three years since, when she was living 
 in Cincinnati, and soon after an attack of cholera, with the usual symptoms 
 of chlorosis. Her catamenia commenced M^ien she was fifteen, but ap- 
 peared but twice during that year, and only two or three times a year 
 since that time, and then only from the influence of medicine, up to the 
 first of December, 1833, when she was married. 
 
 Previous to her marriage, they had been absent eleven weeks, but ap- 
 peared in a day or two after, and have reappeared since that time oftener 
 than before, in a proportion of about two to one, but have always been 
 very slight or small in quantity. About three years since, a discharge 
 commenced from the uterus which was adhesive, and of a white or milky 
 color, and after a few months became of a yellow color, with cheesy mat- 
 ter or flocculi, and has continued to this time. Her feet and ankles began 
 to sv/ell about six months after the discharge commenced, and about a 
 year from that time, her legs began to swell and be painful. Her back be- 
 came very weak soon after the discharge commenced, and has continued 
 
99 
 
 so to this time, and she has frequently more or less pain along the lum- 
 bar vertebrae. About the middle of December, 1833, and two weeks after 
 her marriage, her left arm began to swell and be painful, and in the first part 
 of June last, her left breast began to swell, and she soon began to feel dart- 
 ing pains in it at intervals of from one to five or six days, which still con- 
 tinue, and are gradually becoming more frequent and violent. In the first 
 part of July last, her right ear began to swell, was very red, and soon be- 
 came very painful, and the pain extended through the cavity of the ear 
 into the right and middle portion of the head, and in three days the swel- 
 ling of the ear subsided and left a tubercle of the size of a pea on the up- 
 per side of the jaw, near the ear ; but the pain in the internal ear and head 
 has continued with intervals of ease. On the 10th of November last, this 
 tubercle began to enlarge, and to be irritated ; and the external cervical 
 and submaxillary tubercles of the same side began to increase in size, and 
 to be painful, and soon after the throat, with the gum of the upper jaw of 
 the right side became sore and painful, and in a few days after, the right 
 side of the neck, with the lower and upper jaw, began to swell, and with 
 the ear and right side of the head became very painful. Her heart began 
 to beat very hard about the last of November, and this strong or hard 
 beating continues. On the 26th of December she began to cough and ex- 
 pectorate, and this cough and expectoration continues. 
 
 Her stomach, from the commencement of the disease in the uterus, has 
 been more or less disordered with the first mild and then acute symptoms 
 of dyspepsia — bowels confined. 
 
 The marasmus has been slow but constant, and is now much advanced, 
 with flaccidity of the muscles. 
 
 The disease, it will be seen by the history of this case, was traced with 
 great accuracy to the different organs and limbs. It was then in an ac- 
 tive state, in consequence of a cold ; for when I repeated the examination, 
 about two weeks from that time, after the cold had subsided, and the dis- 
 ease had consequently become passive, the pain produced by pressure did 
 not dart into the diseased organs as before. 
 
 We can, therefore, not only determine the character of the disease by 
 these symptoms, which are constant in all the cases, but we can deter- 
 mine whether it is in its active or passive state, in patients of all ages and 
 conditions, without any pi'evious knowledge of them. 
 
 When the disease commences in one organ or limb, it is frequently pro- 
 pagated to the other organs or limbs, as is seen in this and the following 
 ca^es : — 
 
 Mrs. T. S., aged 31 years. She came to see me August 14, 1836, and 
 says she has been out of health about five years. The examination in 
 her case was commenced as usual, by an examination of the spine, and 
 first, of the first cervical vertebra. 
 
100 
 
 Pressure on a small tubercle of the right side of it produced severe 
 pain, which darted into the right side of the throat, and right side of the 
 head. Pressure on the right side of it produced pain, which darted into 
 the left side of her throat. Pressure on the sides of the second joint also 
 produced pain, which darted into the upper and front part of the neck. 
 Pressure on the 2, 3, 4, and 5 dorsal, produced severe pain, which dart- 
 ed into the stomach. Pressure on the right side of the 7, 8 and 9 pro- 
 duced severe pain also, which darted into the region of the liver. Pres- 
 sure on the 3 and 4 lumbar dorsal was painful. Pressure on the other 
 cervical dorsal and lumbar vertebrjE, produced no pain or effect whatever. 
 
 I now examined the line of glands along the neck, and under the jaws, 
 and found them very much enlarged, and told her that her tonsils and pa- 
 late were enlarged, and that she had dyspepsia, chronic inflammation of 
 the liver and leucorrhcea, besides swellings of some of her limbs. 
 
 She said that was right, and that the disease commenced in the uterus 
 five years before, and about a year after it commenced in her liver, and 
 in a few months after that, in her stomach ; and that it was now nearly 
 three months since her ankles and legs began to swell. It is now a year 
 since her catamenia disappeared, and they have not since returned. On 
 examining her throat, found the tonsils and palate very much enlarged, 
 and the tongue one-third larger than natural. The tonsils are very sensi- 
 ble to pressure, and have, with the palate and rest of the throat, a dark 
 red color, and during the last few weeks the act of deglutition, or of 
 swallowing solid food, has been difficult and painful. She has had more 
 or less [pain in the right side of her head with dizziness, during the last 
 few months. She is also very pale, feeble, and emaciated. 
 
 Mr. W., merchant, aged 28 years, called upon me May — , 1836, who 
 told me he had been out of health a number of years, and had been grow- 
 ing much worse during the last few weeks. 
 
 On applying pressure to the 2, 3, and 4 dorsal it produced a dull pain 
 in these vertebrae. Pressure on the right side of the spine, between the 
 7 and 8 and 8 and 9 dorsal, produced the same kind of pain Pressure 
 on the right side, between the 12th dorsal and first lumbar vertebra, pro- 
 duced severe pain, which darted into the region of the right kidney, 
 showing the disease in an active state in the last organ, and in a passive 
 state in the liver and stomach. There also appeared to be a swelling 
 along the right side of the spine, extending from the 9th dorsal to the 5th 
 lumbar vertebra, which had a puffy or elastic feel, and on comparing this 
 with the left side of the spine, this swelling and puffiness was very con- 
 spicuous. Diagnosis. Tubercula of the liver, stomach, right kidney, 
 and spine. 
 
 The disease, he informed me, commenced in the liver about three years 
 before, and that it was about a year since it commenced in his stomach, 
 
FIG. 29. 
 
 Cervical vertebra- 
 
 I'ress licrr to fiiiH 
 symptoms of tubui- 
 lula of the head, 
 ihioat, and tongue. 
 
 'Icre to find them of 
 I lie arms. 
 
 Ili'ie to find them 
 if the lungs and 
 
 lieart. 
 
 Here to find them of 
 il](^ stomach and 
 laisfe intestines. 
 
 IIiTo to find them of 
 I lie liver. 
 
 Here to liiid them of 
 I lie small intestines. 
 
 Here to find them of 
 ilie kidneys. 
 
 Here to find them of 
 I lie uterus. 
 
 And here to find 
 llieiii of the genital 
 
 organs. 
 
101 
 
 and three weeks since it extended to his kidney, and gave him the most 
 serious alarm for his safety. He has, as usual in such cases, consulted 
 and employed a number of physicians in this case, and rigidly followed 
 their prescriptions, and yet the disease in the liver continued to grow 
 worse — was extended to the stomach, and has now extended to the rio-ht 
 kidney, and right side of the spine. 
 
 These forces point to the disease in every other part of the system that 
 may be tuberculated, in the most arbitrary manner, as in these cases 
 without any regard to the classification of nosologists, or the pedantic 
 theories of the schools. 
 
 In tubercula of the stomach, and its immediate appendages, called dys- 
 pepsia, pressure between the 2d, 3d, and 4th, and sometimes 5th and 6th 
 dorsal spaces, (counting from the last or large joint of the neck,) pro- 
 duces pain. 
 
 In tubercula of the liver, called chronic inflammation of the liver, or 
 liver complaint, pain is produced by pressing on the right side, between 
 the 7th and 8th, and 8th and 9th dorsal spaces, and directly opposite to 
 the lower part of the right shoulder blade 
 
 In tubercula of the spleen, pain is produced by pressure on the left side 
 of the last named, or 7th and Sth, and 8th and 9th dorsal spaces, and op- 
 posite to the lower part of the left shoulder blade. 
 
 In tubercula of the right kidney, pain is produced by pressure on the 
 right side of the space between the 12th or last dorsal, and first lumbar 
 vertebra, and in tubercula of the left kidney, pain is produced by pres- 
 sure on the left side of the 12th dorsal and 1st lumbar. 
 
 In tubercula of the uterus, called leucorrhcea, chlorosis, amenorrhoea, 
 and menorrhagia, pain is produced by pressure, between the 2d and 3d, 
 and 3d and 4th, and sometimes 4th and Sth lumbar spaces, or between 
 all the joints of the small of the back, expect the 1st and 2d. 
 
 In tubercula of the genital organs, pain is produced by pressure, be- 
 tween the Sth or last lumbar space, and the os-coxyx. 
 
 This pain, produced by pressure, is always more or less severe, in pro- 
 portion to the severity of the disease. If there is but little disease, the 
 pressure will produce but little pain ; but if there is much disease, the 
 pain will be severe. 
 
 The disease, in whatever organ it may be, is always either active or 
 passive, and if it is active, when such pressure is made, this pain, on every 
 repetition of the pressure, will dart into the diseased organ, with a force or 
 violence, proportioned to the intensity of the disease. 
 
102 
 
 These are the natural and scientific symptoms of the disease in its 
 active and passive state in the organs — they are produced by natural 
 causes, and are very plain, invariable, and easily understood. 
 
 When the disease has commenced in one organ or limb, it is frequenti}'- 
 propagated from that to another organ or limb, as in the case of Mrs. J. P. 
 — cases in which it is propagated from the tonsils and uvula to the lungs, 
 and from the stomach to the lungs, and from the liver to the stomach, 
 and from the uterus to the ankles, legs, and stomach, are very common. 
 
 In distinguishing the disease, and in tracing it in the different organs 
 and limbs, I commenced and pursued the examinations as detailed in the 
 cases appended to this work as I commonly do, without any previous 
 knowledge of them. Any person of common education and capacity 
 may easily distinguish the disease in the same way, in any of the organs 
 or limbs. 
 
 In examining patients with chronic diseases, it should not be forgotten 
 that the disease is sometimes in an active, but most commonly in a passive 
 state. If the disease were constantly in an active state, patients would 
 die with it in a few weeks, like those with acute diseases, instead of 
 living as they do months, and sometimes years. We can always tell, in 
 an instant, whether it is in an active or passive state, in the organs, by 
 pressure in the proper places on the spine. If the disease is active, the 
 pain produced by the pressure will dart into the diseased organ with a 
 violence proportioned to the intensity of the disease, but if it is in a 
 passive state, pressure produces pain in the spine only, which does not 
 dart into the diseased organ as in its active state, but is more or less 
 severe in proportion to the progress of the disease. 
 
 In many cases of the disease affecting the different organs, pain more 
 or less severe is felt along the vertebrse, when none is felt in the diseased 
 organ. We frequently find the same phenomenon in disease of the 
 hip-joint, where the pain is in the knee instead of the hip. 
 
 Patients consequently refer the disease to the place where the pain is 
 felt, and some physicians who have no more knowledge than they, agree 
 with them, and apply their remedies to the same place. Large blisters 
 have been applied to the knee, and cupping, blistering, setons, issues and 
 the moxa to the spine in such cases without mercy during many months, 
 and an enormous amount of suffering has been frequently endured in this 
 way with little or no benefit to the patient. 
 
 Pain is also produced by pressure on the chronic enlargements or white 
 swellings of the joints and limbs. 
 
 In these cases large tubercles, as well as smaller ones will be found on 
 one or both sides of the neck or groin, and always on the same side with 
 the disease. 
 
103 
 
 CAUSE OF THE SYMPTOMS. 
 
 When, in the last stage of this disease, motion ceases in these organs, 
 or death ensues, we find, on examination, that they are all enlarged, 
 thickened or swollen, and their specific gravity much increased. On a 
 further examination we find the primary lymphatic glands attached to 
 the organs with the subsidiary glands in their substance, as also, those 
 of the series along the side of the spine, with their satellites (coimected 
 with the organs through the spinal nerves) tuberculated. 
 
 In tubercula of the lungs, or consumption, the tubercles are generally 
 found occupying the upper portion of the lungs, and the left lung more 
 frequently than the right. They are frequently formed in clusters, like 
 clusters of grapes, as may be seen at F'and G in Fig. 21, (representing 
 a back view of the organs, spinal cord, and its connection with the spinal 
 nerves, the great sympathetic nerves, with the ganglions or consecutive 
 poles and series of lymphatic glands). At other times, the tubercles are 
 seen either thinly scattered about in one, or in one and a part of another, 
 or in both lungs ; but at other times one or both lungs are nearly every 
 where filled with them, and are in this organ generally of the size of 
 peas, when they have arrived to their mature state. They then begin 
 to soften in the middle, when the whole mass is gradually changed into 
 a thin fluid, mixed with cheesy matter, which soon makes its way into 
 the bronchial or air tubes, and excites cough and expectoration of tuber- 
 culous matter. Sometimes, however, although rarely, it makes its way 
 into the cavity of the pleura, and produces pneumato-thorax. 
 
 In the cases where there are only a few tubercles in the luno-s, and at 
 a sufficient distance to prevent them from breaking into each other, and 
 one or two soften down, and produce a small excavation, they do not ne- 
 cessarily endanger life ; for in such cases patients may, and do live many 
 years, although they may have two or three such excavations form every 
 year. 
 
 In the cases where they are in clusters, and after one has softened 
 down and produced a small excavation, others adjoining it soften down 
 and break into it, and in a few days or weeks, produce in this way exca- 
 vations proportioned to the size of the clusters ; and these may be from 
 half an inch to two inches in diameter ; and when the whole of one or 
 both lungs are nearly every where crowded with tubercles in a mature 
 state, a large excavation is generally formed, which might contain an 
 orange. 
 
 Haemoptysis or hemorrhage from the lungs, frequently accompanies 
 consumption ; and when blood is raised in small quantities, not much 
 exceeding a wine glass full, it is generally exuded from the mucous mena- 
 
104 
 
 Spinal nerves con- 
 nected with tlie left J] 
 arm. 
 
 Left lung. 
 
 Stomach. 
 
 Spleen. 
 
 Portion of the small 
 iiitcsimes and inesen- 
 tary. 
 
 Left kidney. 
 
 Uterus. 
 
 Spinal nerve con- 
 nected with the sa- 
 crum. 
 
 Spinal nerves distri- 
 buted to the lower 
 limbs. 
 
 Spinal cord. 
 
 Spinal nerves con- 
 E nected with the right 
 
 Right lung. 
 
 TT '■ S tomach. 
 
 ,Liver. 
 
 ■^ Small intestine and 
 
 inosentary. 
 
 L Right kidney. 
 
 ]\yj —"Uterus. 
 
 Tvr'm..-. Spinal nerve con- 
 
 -"^ " nected with the sacrum 
 
 Spinal nerves distri- 
 
 O "N:' — bated to the lower 
 
 limbs. 
 
 brane of the bronchia, in place of its ordinary excretions, and is com- 
 monly a slight affection requiring little or no attention ; but when raised 
 in larger quantities, it is almost always the consequence of the eflFusion of 
 blood into the air cells ; and is an affection which, from its exact resem- 
 blance to the effusion of blood in the brain, in apoplexy, is now called 
 pulmonary apoplexy. 
 
 These glands, around which the blood has been effused, are larger than 
 natural, and are in clusters, and occupy a circumscribed space, commonly 
 from one to three inches in diameter, in the centre of which a clot of 
 blood is sometimes found. 
 
105 
 
 Young people who lead a sedentary life, and do not consequently give 
 to all their muscles, or the connecting substance of the organs, that ex- 
 ercise which is necessary to health, are very subject to hemorrhage from 
 the lungs. The muscles and connecting substance do not have their na- 
 tural exercise, and consequently do not get their natural portion of nou- 
 rishment from the secreting organs. They become soft and weak, while 
 the secretions or nourishment which should have been absorbed by them 
 accumulate in the secreting organs, and distend them. The blood accu- 
 mulates in the vessels around them, and bursts from the feeble barriers 
 or connecting substance and muscles with which they are surrounded. 
 The blood consequently either gushes from the lungs, when the patients 
 generally linger a few months, or the heart or some of its large vessels 
 give way, and they instantly sink never to rise again. 
 
 Hemorrhage from the lungs may also be produced by an aneurism 
 breaking into the bronchia, or by the rupture of a blood vessel in an ex- 
 cavation ; but these cases are very rare, and are quickly followed by 
 death. v 
 
 Chronic Bronchitis should not be confounded, as it frequently is, 
 with tubercular consumption. It can always be distinguished from the 
 latter disease by the absence of the symptoms we have given to distin- 
 guish it. Pressure on the space between the 7th and last cervical verte- 
 brae, and first dorsal, produces no pain or effect whatever in chronic 
 bronchitis, or pulmonary catarrh, as it is sometimes called, and dissec- 
 tions show it to be a chronic disease of the mucous glands of the mem- 
 brane that lines the inside of the bronchial or air tubes of the lungs, 
 which have no connection with the nerves of sensation. 
 
 The mucous membranes, therefore, have really no sensibility; and all 
 their apparent sensibility is the consequence of the presence of the papil- 
 lary lymphatic glands which rise from the serous membranes, conspicu- 
 ously through them in some places, for the purposes of sensation, as in 
 the tongue, nose, and genital organs. 
 
 In tubercula of the heart, its power or force is increased in the first 
 stage of the disease, in consequence of the thickening and hardening of 
 its walls, which either terminates in an effusion from its serous surface, 
 and consequent dropsy of the chest, or in the last stage begins to soften 
 down, become weak, till at length the blood bursts through its feeble bar- 
 riers into the pericardium. In tubercula of the stomach H.H., called 
 dyspepsia, the tubercles are generally small, and are found thinly scattered 
 about in its membranes and in clusters, as seen in the figure, producing 
 a thickening of the organ in patches of a size and number according with 
 the dimensions of the clusters. 
 
 In tubercula of the liver I. the tubercles are sometimes in clusters, 
 
106 
 
 and at other times only a few are found in it, as is frequently seen in the 
 tuberculated livers of cattle and hogs. 
 
 Adhesions of the tubercu'lated portions of this organ are sometimes 
 formed with the intestines, stomach, or peritoneum, through which tu- 
 berculous matter from its abscesses is discharged into the intestines, 
 stomach, or on to the surface of the body. 
 
 In tubercula of the spleen J. and the kidnies L.L., the tuberculations 
 are similar to those observed in the liver, and need not be repeated. 
 
 In tubercula of the intestines K.K., the disease is always found most 
 intense in the small intestines, in consequence of their intimate connec- 
 tion with the mesenteric glands, involved in the same disease with their 
 satellites in the membranes of these intestines at the same time. The 
 tubercles are found more or less thinly scattered about in them, and in 
 clusters, producing a thickening of these intestines in patches like those 
 of the stomach, and at last terminate in ulceration. 
 
 In tubercula of the uterus M.M., called in its different stages amen- 
 orrhoea, leucorrhcea, menorrhagia, and chlorosis, the tubercles are in 
 different cases found in different parts of it, sometimes in its body, at 
 other times in its neck, and frequently in both, producing a thickening of 
 its body, neck, and membranes, with an enlargement of a part or of the 
 whole organ. 
 
 A suppression of the catamenia, more or less complete, or a mucous 
 discharge from its mucous membrane, a muco-serous discharge from both 
 the mucous and serous membranes, with prolapsus uteri, ulceration or 
 hemorrhage are the uniform consequences of these tuberculations, in- 
 volving either the whole or different parts of the structure. 
 
 In tubercula of the muscles, called in its first stage chronic rheumat- 
 ism, the tubercles are generally found near the extremities of the muscles, 
 or near the joints, and in its last stage in the fascia or membranes enclos- 
 ing the muscles. 
 
 The swellings that arise over these tubercles, from the accumulation of 
 their secretions in the lymphatic vessels, are soft and pufiy, without dis- 
 colouration of the skin, and are hence called white swellings, when af- 
 fecting the limbs or joints of the limbs. They are, however, sometimes 
 called by other names, when the disease appears along the joints of the 
 spinal column, as King's evil in the neck, curvature and distortion of the 
 spine, spinal disease, spinal irritation, nervous disease, and nervous irri- 
 tation of the spine, showing most conclusively an entire want of knowl 
 ed2:e of the true character of the disease. 
 
 These swellings terminate in ulceration or abscess, and generally dis- 
 charge their tuberculous matter upon the surfaces of the joints or limbs. 
 The bones, like every other part of the body, are formed with the round 
 
107 
 
 elementary bodies, including the lymphatic and other glands, with their 
 vessels and nerves, but have a solid instead of the soft and elastic con- 
 necting substance of the organs, membranes, muscles, and skin, for the 
 purpose of covering and protecting some, and of supporting every part 
 of the whole system. When the disease commences in them, it goes 
 through its natural order as it does in the organs, membranes, muscles, 
 and skin, of tuberculation, swelling, and ulceration or abscess. In its 
 active state, in bones of very hard texture, the pain is sometimes very 
 violent, and of the kind called spasmodic, in consequence of their slow 
 and difficult expansion; but there is generally but little pain, with 
 long intervals of ease ; and when, in the course of the disease, the ele- 
 mentary organs of which the bones are formed, are destroyed by ulcera- 
 tion, the small excavations, once occupied by them, are very conspicuous, 
 and the channels of their vessels and nerves easily traced. 
 
 CAUSE OF THE TUBERCULATIONS. 
 
 The frequent changes in the atmosphere, from the positive to the nega- 
 tive state, and its modification at the same time by heat and cold, is a 
 common cause of tubercula of the organs and limbs ; because these 
 changes and modifications of the atmosphere produce corresponding chan- 
 ges in the positive and negative states of our bodies, and modifications of 
 the secretions and excretions. 
 
 When the organs or limbs are tuberculated from this or any other 
 cause, they are more or less sensible to pressure, because it contracts 
 them ; but when the pressure is removed they expand, and the pain 
 ceases. So when the atmosphere is damp and cold, it is in a negative 
 state, and the attractions and contractions are prevailing over the repul- 
 sions and expansions, and contract the tuberculated organs or limbs, when 
 such patients have more pain, and feel more dull and heavy than they do 
 when the atmosphere is clear and dry, and in a positive state. For when 
 the atmosphere changes from the positive to the negative state, the body 
 changes at the same time from the positive to the negative state. When 
 attractions and contractions commence in the tuberculated organs and 
 limbs, and produce dull or aching pains, which torture such patients more 
 or less, until the atmosphere changes froin the negative to the positive 
 state, when the pains cease, and they arise from their cots, throw open 
 the doors, and walk abroad with buoyant spirits. 
 
 Tuberculated organs and limbs are also not only concomitant of, but 
 frequently the consequence of intermittent, yellow, bilious, and typhus 
 fevers, diarrhceas and dysenteries, &c. 
 
 7 
 
108 
 
 " This influence of the meteorologico-medical constitution of the 
 weather is appreciable even on external diseases, wounds, and opera- 
 tions. Dessault and Bichat paid much attention to this subject ; and the 
 rich collection of the memoirs of the old Academy of Surgery furnishes 
 numerous examples of allusion to it." 
 
 But not only do the different seasons of the year exert a decided influ- 
 ence upon the general characters of prevailing diseases, but even the va- 
 rious periods of a single day appear to have a somewhat analogous effect. 
 It was a favorite doctrine of Hippocrates, that there was a strict relation 
 between the action of the diurnal revolution and that of the annual revo- 
 lution of the sun on the production and the progress of diseases ; sicnt in 
 anno continentur periodi aigriludinum^ eodem modo una die. The morning was 
 the analogue of the Spring, the noon was the analogue of Summer, the eve- 
 ning represented Autumn, and night corresponded with the Winter. The 
 year was thus considered only a lengthened day, and each day a year ex- 
 cessively contracted. Many of our medical classics, who have belonged 
 to the Hippocratic school of medicine, have confirmed and illustrated these 
 views of the old Coan by numerous observations : we may mention the 
 names of Sydenham, Triller, Baillou, Ramazzini, and Huxham, as among 
 the most distinguished writers of this school. The most important of 
 their conclusions are these : — 
 
 " Various diseases exhibit certain features of change during the day 
 and during the night ; patients, too, in their turn, have their feelings af- 
 fected differently in a similar manner ; and physicians have remarked that, 
 even at different periods of a single diurnal epoch — that is to say in the 
 time between the rising and setting of the sun — diseases often exhibit di- 
 verse phenomena." 
 
 Thus inflammatory diseases, those which are characterized by an ex- 
 altation of the vital forces, undergo usually towards morning their chief 
 exacerbations : at the same period too their inversion most frequently 
 takes place. 
 
 Catarrhal and mucous fevers, which are generally characterized by the 
 slowness of their movements, and the atony which accompanies them, 
 commence most frequently, and also become most exasperated, on the 
 approach of night. 
 
 Bilious fevers, which seem to occupy a place between inflammatory 
 and mucous diseases, have their paroxysms as well as their most frequent 
 invasion about noon. 
 
 The period of the paroxysms approaches to either the morning or the 
 evening, according as the prevailing diathesis is of a sthenic or of an 
 asthenic character. 
 
 It is during the day, that by far the greatest number of accessions and 
 paroxysms of intermittent fevers occur- On the other hand, the exacer- 
 
109 
 
 bations of hectic fever usually occur in the evening and during the 
 night ; the sweats take place almost exclusively towards the morning. 
 
 Ramazzini, in his account of the epidemic constitution of 1690, de- 
 scribes an ataxic remittent fever, of which all the symptoms became 
 greatly aggravated on the approach of sunset. The patients were alarm- 
 ingly ill during the whole night ; but from the first appearance of the 
 sun, all the bad symptoms ceased, and the patients could rise and walk 
 about, velut ungues ad soleni, cutem curantes, erecti — to use the expression 
 of the writer. 
 
 Huxham, too, in his beautiful treatise on malignant angina, remarks 
 that this disease, during its entire progress, presented exacerbations dur- 
 ing the evening ; and that, even when the patients were tranquil and 
 comfortable during the day, the symptoms always became aggravated in 
 the evening. 
 
 We may here, with advantage, allude to a curious approximation, that 
 has recently occurred to our minds, between the facts now mentioned and 
 the beautiful discovery of M. Daguerre. 
 
 According to the observations of this gentleman, the hours in the morn- 
 ing and in the evening, equidistant from noon, and corresponding, there- 
 fore, to the same amount of elevation of the sun above the horizon, are 
 not, however, equally favorable for the production of photographic ima- 
 ges. He has found that at all seasons of the year, in circumstances of the 
 atmosphere apparently exactly similar, the image is formed a little more 
 quickly at seven o'clock in the morning, for example, than at five o'clock 
 in the afternoon, at eight p. m. than at four p. m., and at nine a. m. than 
 at three p. m. 
 
 Now, if such be the case with the action of light on dead matter, there 
 may be something analogous to it in its influence on living bodies both in 
 disease and in health. The human frame, it is well known, is more sen- 
 sitive than the most delicate instruments that can be made ; why then may 
 it not be acted upon in some peculiar way by the ever-varying conditions 
 of the light and heat of the sun ? It is, therefore, quite possible that the 
 discovery of M. Daguerre may give rise to the discovery of many pheno- 
 mena in physiological and medical science. 
 
 The great fact of the diurnal movements is seen not only in some acts 
 of human life, but also in many phenomena observed among the lower 
 animals. But the same law does not apply to all, or give rise to uniform 
 results ; for the influence of light and heat is often manifested in a man- 
 ner that is difierent and even quite opposite, not only in individuals, but 
 even in tribes both of the animal and of the vegetable kingdom. There 
 are some nocturnal species of animals among mammals, birds, reptiles, and 
 insects. 
 
no 
 
 The same phenomenon of diurnal movements is observed in several 
 functions of vegetable life. Every one has heard of the sleep of plants, 
 Flora's clock, &c., &c. Draparnaud has observed that at the end of 
 autumn, when the weather begins to become cool, the flowers of the ipo- 
 moea violacea, and of several species of mirabilis, which are usually night- 
 blowing flowers, open at this period of the year during the day also. 
 
 Analogous diurnal movements have been observed in various pheno- 
 mena of meteorology ; as, for example, in the indications of the compass 
 and the barometer. It is at the hottest hours of the day that hail is gene- 
 rated most abundantly, and in Europe it almost always falls during the 
 day. 
 
 It is probably by following out such analogies as these, in bringing them 
 together, and comparing them, that we may hope to discover the laws 
 which these phenomena obey, and the general causes which give rise to 
 them. — Gaz. Medicale. 
 
 Man, however, before he can succeed in the objects of such compari- 
 sons, must first learn the universal cause of motion, and the laws by 
 which it is governed, through the whole range of the solar system, when 
 he will learn it is to the laws of the magnetism of the human system, and 
 of the medium which surrounds it, to which he must look to " discover 
 the phenomena they obey ;" for our mother earth is a magnetised body, 
 and imparts its elements of sensation, inclination, and motion to man and 
 the myriads of bodies belonging to the animal and vegetable kingdoms. 
 It is magnetised geometrically, or in the most regular and perfect manner, 
 as is shown by collating the numerous observations on the dip and varia- 
 tion, — has two magnetic poles, which mark the arctic and antarctic cir- 
 cles, determine those of the tropics, and the inclination of the earth's axis 
 to the plane of the ecliptic. 
 
 These poles, with their meridians, revole from east to west, by the in- 
 fluence of the repulsive and expansive force of our magnetised sun, while 
 the earth revolves on its axis, and in its orbit, from west to east, by the 
 influence of his attractive and contractive force. 
 
 The annual rate of motion of these poles determines both the amount of 
 the repulsive force, and the diameter of the sun as seen from the earth ; 
 while the amount of this force upon the earth, with the varying inclina- 
 tion of its axis, from the spiral motion of its magnetic poles, determines 
 alike its form, and a long period of revolution in another orbit. 
 
 The earth moves in this orbit, as in the former, from west to east, and 
 the ocean moves slowly over it, from east to west, at the same time, by 
 the force of the spiral motions of these poles, draining the valleys and 
 mountains on one side of our globe, and inundating in its course those on 
 
Ill 
 
 the other.* In the mean time the magnetic poles traverse the northern 
 and southern hemispheres, pass the equator with the axis in the plane of 
 the ecliptic, and then mount to the opposite terrestrial poles, with the 
 axis perpendicular to it.* They then descend with the axis, as before, 
 pass the equator, and again mount to the terrestrial poles, in one entire re- 
 volution of the magnetic poles, the ocean, and of the earth in this orbit. 
 
 During this revolution of the ocean and the poles, two geological stra- 
 ta are formed over our globe, — in the valleys and upon the mountains, — 
 and they are necessarily of two kinds, or a positive and a negative stra- 
 tum,! which, with the remains of volcanic disruptions, answers in the 
 most positive manner all the demands of geology ; while the motion of 
 the earth in this orbit disclose the cause of the astonishino; changes which 
 have taken place in the climate, and in the vegetable and animal king- 
 doms, over every part of our globe; for every part of the earth passes 
 through the plane of the ecliptic, in every revolution, and feels, in its 
 turn, every where alike the never fading influence of a tropical sun. 
 
 If man could, at any time, be satisfied with the knowledge he had at- 
 tained, he might rest here from his labors, and contemplate in detail the 
 effects of this influence over every part of the earth ; but the mammoth, 
 the mygalonix, and the long list of other ancient animals of a similar size, 
 having disappeared from the earth, he can have no rest until he shall 
 have ascended to the highest pinnacle of the temple of science, where he 
 can see in the vast expanse before him the earth moving round the sun 
 in this orbit; has marked the other changes, produced by the varying in- 
 clination of its axis to the plane of the ecliptic, and has learned the causes 
 which have sustained these huge animals on the earth during one period 
 of time, and overwhelmed them in another. Where he can view the 
 
 * The water is now falling in the European and rising in the North American conti- 
 nent. It is receding in the Baltic, by actual measurement, at the rate of about 5 feet in 
 100 years ; and from numerous observations of different persons along the Atlantic coast 
 of this continent, the water is supposed to be rising here at the rate of about 3 feet in 100 
 years. 
 
 * According to La Place, the angle of the earth's axis with the plane of the ecliptic, 
 does not vary more than about 2" 40'. The calculations from which he obtained this 
 result were, however, founded upon the hypothesis, that the increase and decrease of 
 this angle is produced by the attractions of the planets or of Jupiter. He knew nothing 
 of the spiral motions of the magnetic poles, their rate of motion, time of revolution 
 round the earth from east to west, or of their great revolutions from pole to pole, and 
 consequently knew nothing of the amount, or of the true cause of the variation of this 
 angle. 
 
 t The magnetic character of the northern and southern hemispheres are changed every 
 time the magnetic poles pass the equator. Two strata are therefore formed in every 
 revolution ; one of which is a positive and the other a negative .stratum, or one stratum 
 of one kind of rock, and the other of another kind, which corresponds with the order in 
 which they are uniformly found in the earth. 
 
112 
 
 earth revolving round the sun in a perfect circle,J with its axis perpen- 
 dicular to the plane of the ecliptic, — the magnetic poles and magnetic 
 meridians corresponding with the terrestrial poles and terrestrial meri- 
 dians, and the sun shining in triumph from pole to pole in every part of its 
 annua] orbit. Where he can see the continents and islands covered every 
 where with a luxuriant foliage, with majestic forests and elysian fields, 
 during one period of time ; and the poles at the equator, the axis in the 
 plane of the ecliptic, and the earth moving round the sun in its extreme 
 elliptical orbit, shorn of its vegetation, covered with snow, and presenting 
 every where a cold and barren waste, saving a zone or belt, in the extreme 
 oblique apparent course of the sun in another. 
 
 He can then see that the quantity of vegetation on the earth is very lit- 
 tle, or minimum, when the earth's axis is in the plane of the ecliptic ; and 
 very abundant, or at its maximum, when it is perpendicular to it ; and he 
 can then comprehend the reasons why these animals were supported in 
 abundance in one period, and became extinct in another. 
 
 He can also see from this eminence that the number, as well as the 
 size, of animals on the earth, is minimum in the middle of the iron and 
 forlorn age, when the axis is in the plane of the ecliptic, and maximum, 
 in the middle of the golden and happy age, when it is perpendicular to it. 
 
 These great changes in the relative position of the earth's axis with the 
 plane of the ecliptic, and the consequences resulting from them, were well 
 known to the ancients, and were taught in their temples from time imme- 
 morial, and are beautifully described by ancient and modern poets. 
 
 " That forms are chang'd I grant, that nothing can 
 Continue in the figure it began : 
 The golden age to silver was debas'd : 
 To copper that, our metal came at last. 
 
 The face of places, and their forms, decay ; 
 And that is solid earth that once was sea : 
 Seas, in their turn, retreating from the shore. 
 Make solid land what ocean was before ; 
 And far from strands are shells of fishes found, 
 And rusty anchors fixed on mountain ground : 
 And what were fields before, now, wash'd and worn 
 By falling floods from high, to valleys turn. 
 And crumbhng still, descends to level lands ; 
 And lakes, and trembling bogs, are barren sands : 
 And the parch 'd desert floats in streams unknown, 
 Wand'ring to drink of waters not her own ; 
 
 t It is now ascertained, by accurate observations, that the earth is slowly approachino- 
 the sun. It is mainly the consequence of the periodical decreasing eUipticity of the 
 earth's orbit, and not from a resisting medium, as commonly supposed ; for the earth 
 can approach the sun from no other cause, except that of its condensation by the action 
 of the magnetic forces, which cannot be appreciable, except by observations, taken at 
 very distant periods of time. 
 
113 
 
 Here nature living fountains opes ; and there 
 Seals up the wombs where living fountains were ; 
 Or earthquakes stop their ancient course, and bring 
 Diverted streams to feed a distant spring." 
 
 Dryde.n's Pythagorean Philosophy.* 
 
 Having thus seen and contemplated the various effects of the physical 
 causes produced by the varying inclination of the earth's axis to the plane 
 of the ecliptic ; and having assured himself that we are again advancing 
 in another golden and happy age, and that the time v^^ill again come 
 " when there shall be no more thence an infant of days, nor an old 
 man that hath not filled his days,''^ but "when a child shall die an 
 hundred years old, and the age of a man shall" again " be as the age of 
 a tree ;" he may then direct his view to the other revolving orbs in our 
 system, where he can see the planets with the ever changing phases of 
 their satellites in an immense plane, passing in review before him with 
 great rapidity around the sun in their annual, and with a very slow 
 motion, in their millionary orbits. Some with their axis in this plane, 
 and the orbits of their satellites perpendicular to it, in the middle of their 
 iron or forlorn age of general deluge ; and some with their axis perpen- 
 dicular to this plane, and the orbits of their satellites parallel with it in 
 the middle of their golden and happy age ; while the axis of others, with 
 the orbits of their satellites, are seen to be variously inclined to this plane, 
 presenting, with the changes of their tropical and polar circles, and with 
 the variety of their plumage, the most enchanting scenery ever beheld 
 by man. 
 
 The remains of the ancient temples of the Eastern nations, as the Phe- 
 nicians. Persians, Assyrians, Egyptians, Chinese, and Hindoos, on which 
 their astronomical observations were made, and which have withstood 
 the assaults of time during an immense period, and of the barbarians dur- 
 ing the last 2noo years, attest both the great importance these nations 
 attached to the science of astronomy, and the untiring industry with 
 which they pursued their studies in it. They were their observatories 
 and their temples of science, in which the highest branches of astronomy 
 were taught, as well as the elements of that science now taught among 
 the Western nations. 
 
 The hi2;her branches included a knowledge of the magnetism of the 
 earth, of the motions of the magnetic poles around it, from east to west, 
 the phenomena of the variation of the needle, the spiral motions of the 
 
 * Pythagoras spent 22 years in Egypt and India to complete his education ; and, on 
 his return to his native country, taught the system of astronomy he learnt there, the 
 elements of which were long after published by Copernicus, and are now called the Co- 
 pernican system. 
 
 15 
 
114 
 
 magnetic poles, the revolution of the ocean, and of the earth's axis in its 
 millionary orbit, as well as the changes produced on the earth by the con- 
 tinued operation of these causes. 
 
 According to the received chronology of the Western nations, the oldest 
 observatory was on the temple of Belus ; and historians inforna us that 
 Berosus, the astronomer of Babylon, told Alexander, and the philosophers 
 who accompanied him in his expedition, about 330 years B. C, that it 
 was then 430,000 years since the earth's axis was in the plane of the 
 ecliptic, and presented them with astronomical observations during that 
 period. 
 
 This period, however, must have been longer, or, in other words, they 
 could not have been mean years, for the motion of the earth on its axis 
 varies in the different ages, and is minimum when the axis is in the plane 
 of the ecliptic, and maximum when it is perpendicular to it ; the mean an- 
 nual rate acknowledged by the Eastern nations, and proved by the observa- 
 tions of Pytheas 330 years B. C, as compared with the observations at Pa- 
 ris in 1801, being 33'" 45"", whereas the mean rate of the period given 
 by Berosus, ascertained by dividing 66*^ 10',* the angle of the axis at that 
 time with the plane of the ecliptic by 430,000, is only 33'" 15"" Besides 
 the depression of the terrestrial meridians, or the depression of the terres- 
 trial poles, varies also in the different ages, and is minimum or when 
 the axis is in the plane of the ecliptic, and maximum or 32' 26" when it 
 is perpendicular to it, making a depression of 16' 13" at each pole, and a 
 protrusion at the equator of 16' 13. "I The magnetic poles then, in 
 placing the axis in a perpendicular position, in regard to the plane of the 
 ecliptic, traverse the earth from the equator 90° — 16' 13". Now, 2,000 
 years at the mean rate, the number of years required to be added to the 
 number given by Berosus, to complete the maha yucjX of 432,000 years, is 
 18' 36" 40'", and if we now subtract from this amount the 16' 13" 
 it will leave 2' 23" 40'", equal (at the mean rate) to 270 years from 
 the fall of Babylon to the end of the maha yug, and the commencement of 
 the call yug^ of 144,000 years, making in the whole, at the completion 
 of this last period, 576,000 years, or one-quarter of a revolution of the 
 earth in this orbit. 
 
 There cannot, it is believed, be any mistake in these facts which can 
 
 * There should be added to this amount 2' 03" 18'" 45"" for refraction, which 
 would make the true angle of the axis at that time 66" 12' 03" 18'" 45"". 
 
 t The amount of the depression at each pole, on the 15th September, 1837, as calcu- 
 lated by the action of the magnetic forces, was 11' 59" 22'" 16"", and the protrusion 
 at the equator 11' 59" 22'" 16"", and there can be no doubt but these were the exact 
 amounts of the depression at the poles, and of the protrusion at the equator, at that time. 
 
 X A term of three agesoi 144,000 years each, used by the ancient astronomers. 
 
 § Age of heat. 
 
115 
 
 make any material variation in the results we have obtained, except, per- 
 haps, in the exact amount of the number given by Berosus, which might 
 have been a few years more or less, and omitted to be mentioned by the 
 historian. It was probably about 60 years more ; for the philosophers of 
 Babylon, in common with those of other eastern countries, who had been 
 admitted in the inner temple, and initiated into the Elysian mysteries, 
 proclaimed every where, in language expressive of great joy, the com- 
 mencement of a new and happy age, about 330 years after the taking of 
 Babylon by Alexander. 
 
 It was, therefore, about 431,670 mean years from the time the axis 
 was in the plane of the ecliptic to the fall of Babylon, and the number 
 given by Berosus, the number of revolutions of the earth on its axis dur- 
 ing that period. 
 
 The Egyptians claimed to have accurately observed 373 eclipses of the 
 sun, and S32 of the moon, during a period of 48,853 years, or from Vul- 
 can to Alexander. The Hindoos, who are now universally acknowledged 
 to be the oldest astronomers, allege that one of their books was written 
 near the middle of the last golden age, or at a period when the angle of 
 the axis with the plane of the ecliptic was 89*^ 14'.* They also claim to 
 have observed 1,577,917,828 days in a maha-yug^ from sun rise to sun rise, 
 which gives 365d. 15h. 31' 31" 24'", for the mean length of a day 
 during that period, which is now reduced to 365d. 6h. 9' 11" 30"', 
 makins: a decrease of 9h. 21' 19" 54'" since the time of the mean, and 
 a difference of about '455 years in a period of about 433,841 years, or 
 since the axis was in the plane of the ecliptic, and the deluge at its max- 
 mum.| 
 
 * The angle of the earth's axis with the plane of the ecliptic, may hereafter be obtained 
 with accuracy, at any time, by adding to the angle, found at Paris in ISOl, 33'" 45"" 
 for every year after that time, and the small amount of increase of this rate. The time of 
 year in which the observation was made should also be known, when either the angle of 
 the axis or the obliquity of the ecliptic may be determined, at any time, with perfect ac- 
 cury, to the end of this period, unless the observation at Paris should require a small 
 correction for solar nutation, which is said to be too small to be detected by observation, 
 but which is shown by the action of the magnetic forces of the sun on those of the earth, 
 to amount to 2" 39'" 39"",— the diameter of the circle in which the terrestrial pole 
 moves around the mean pole being 5" 19"' 18'"'. 
 
 Obliquity of the ecliptic, by observation at Paris in 1801, 23'=, 27' 58". 
 
 Obliquity of the ecliptic, by calculation in 1841, 23°, 27' 35" 30'". 
 
 The average increase of tlie mean rate amounts to only 1" 03"" in a thousand 
 years. 
 
 t The water is equally diffused over the earth and covers the valleys when the 
 deluge is at its maximum. When the angle of the axis with the plane of the ecliptic, 
 begins to decrease, the ocean begins to recede from the equator, and spreads over the 
 valleys. 
 
116 
 
 The length of a day is now 11" less than it was in the time of Hyppar- 
 chus, 276 B. C * 
 
 It would be easy to add to these evidences, which are regarded as con- 
 clusive, a long list of well established facts, which correspond with them, 
 but it cannot be necessary to do so, for many of them will naturally recur 
 to the mind of the intelligent reader. 
 
 Having now advanced in the golden age more than 1840'|" years, we 
 find the average heat of the earth, and the average age of man increas- 
 ing, and there can be no doubt but they will both go on increasing in 
 a gradually increasing ratio to the middle of this age, or until the earth's 
 axis is again perpendicular to the plane of the ecliptic. J 
 
 We find, therefore, that besides the diurnal and annual changes in the 
 temperature, and constitution of the atmosphere, man is subject to other 
 great changes in the temperature and constitution of the atmosphere, 
 which belong to long periods of time, and which n^t only produce great 
 changes in the diseases to which he is subject, but great and remarkable 
 changes in the moral and physical character of our race, and hence the 
 necessity of corresponding changes in the treatment of diseases. 
 
 Having shown the magnetic symptoms to be constant and uniform 
 in a large class of chronic diseases, and the remote and proximate causes 
 which produce them, with the causes which change their character in dif- 
 ferent periods of time, we may now show that the age in which we live 
 demands a radical change in the treatment of diseases, by deinonstrating 
 the fact that the cases of the large class of tubercular diseases of the or- 
 gans and limbs, uniformly lost by the old empirical remedies, may now be 
 as uniformly saved by a very different and scientific treatment, adapted to 
 the scientific symptoms by which they are distinguished. 
 
 The change in the character of inflammatory diseases during the last 
 30 years is very great ; for patients affected with diseases of this, class, 
 will not now usually bear with impunity, more than about one-half of the 
 depletion, that was required and sustained at that period. 
 
 * The angle of the Moon's axis with the plane of its orbit is about 4", and is in- 
 creasing at the annual rate of 6'" 36"" in an increasing ratio ; and will become perpen- 
 dicular to the plane of its orbit in 142,155 mean yeai-s, or at the same time the earth's 
 axis becomes perpendicular to the plane of the ecliptic. The plane of the equator and 
 the plane of the Moon's orbit will then correspond with the plane of the ecUptic. 
 
 t 1845. 
 
 J The amount of the average increase of the heat of the earth, is about one quarter 
 more than that found by M. Arago. 
 
 The bills of mortality and the rates of life insurance show that the age of man is in- 
 creasing. According to the ancients, the minimum age of man is only 70 years, and 
 his mean age only about 300, while his maximum age is more than 900 years. 
 
117 
 
 This amount of change in the character of diseases will appear very 
 great, as it is, for the time ; but it is not, however, greater than the other 
 great changes in the intellectual and physical character of man during the 
 same period, from the great and continued changes in the physical causes 
 by which he is surrounded, and which must go on increasing with an in- 
 creasing ratio to the end of this age, when they will arrive at their max- 
 imum. 
 
 The ocean is depressed at the poles at the rate of 50 yards for every 
 1000 years, and is protruded at the equator the same number of yards in 
 the same time ; it is also protruded in other latitudes severally as fol- 
 lows, in periods of 1000 and 100 years. 
 
 Lat. 
 
 'oles. 
 
 1000 Years. 
 
 100 Years. 
 
 Equator. 
 
 1000 Years. 
 
 100 Yaars. 
 
 
 
 Yds. 
 
 Yds. 
 
 
 o 
 
 Yds. 
 
 Yds. 
 
 90 
 
 50 
 
 5 
 
 Lat. 
 
 00 
 
 50 
 
 5 
 
 67i 
 61i 
 54 
 
 25 
 18 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 
 22 1 
 28| 
 36 
 
 25 
 18 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 49i 
 47f 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 
 40i 
 42| 
 
 5 
 2i 
 
 1 
 F 
 
 4 
 
 45 45 
 
 The depression of the ocean, it will be seen, is maximum at the pole& 
 and minimum in lat. 45° ; while the protrusion of the ocean is maximum 
 at the quator, and minimum in lat. 45°. The deluge is consequently 
 maximum in the latitudes north of 45° in the northern, and in the lati- 
 tudes south of 450 in the southern hemisphere, when the earth's axis is 
 in the plane of the ecliptic ; and it is also maximum in the middle lati- 
 tudes, or those between 45° and the equator, when it is perpendicular to 
 it. Man and other animals are consequently driven, in different ages, 
 from the latitudes of the maximum floods between 50^ and 90° to 
 the latitudes or the minimum floods, between 40° and 50°, where the 
 earth is constantly habitable, and where a greater quantity of animal mat- 
 ter must consequently accumulate than in any other part of the earth. 
 This corresponds with the observations of M. Bailly, who found the 
 greatest quantity of animal matter between 44° and 45^. The action of 
 the magnetic forces upon the ocean must necessarily produce a current in. 
 it from the equator towards the poles at one period, and from the poles 
 towards the equator at another. This fact is observed during the present 
 period ; and the currents are from the poles towards the equator. 
 
 The force of these currents is maximum at the poles and minimum in, 
 the low latitudes, where they are merged in the force of the currents- 
 from east to west, produced by the repulsive force of the sun. Note C. 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 REMEDIES FOR TUBERCULAR DISEASES. 
 
 Having learned the symptoms by which we can with ease and cer- 
 tainty distinguish tubercula of the organs or limbs, and having also 
 found the remote and proximate cause of these symptoms, we have sur- 
 mounted the greatest difficulties we had to encounter, to effect the great 
 object we had in view — that of saving from a premature grave a great 
 number, every year, of the fairest and most talented portion of our race. 
 
 The object is therefore worthy of our greatest ambition, and we should 
 pursue it with an ardor corresponding to its great importance. 
 
 Before undertaking to remedy disease, &c., it will be necessary for us 
 to find the proper materials by which we may repair injuries to the hu- 
 man system as a machinist does to repair the injuries to a machine ; and 
 for this purpose, it will not only be necessary to refer to the laws of mo- 
 tion, but to the phenomena attendant on tubercular swellings of the or- 
 gans and limbs. 
 
 We have seen in the illustrations of the laws of motion by which the 
 body is governed, that repulsions expand and attractions contract. If 
 then an organ or limb is increasing in size, it follows that the repulsive 
 
119 
 
 and expansive force within the organ is prevailing over its attractive and 
 contractive force. It also necessarily follows, that to reduce these swell- 
 ings, it is important that the attractive and contractive force prevail over 
 the repulsive and expansive force. 
 
 Nature frequently cures cases of this disease by a change in the action 
 of these forces in this order. Thousands of cases of tubercular disease 
 of the stomach, intestines, and liver, under the names of fevers, diar- 
 rhoeas, and dysenteries, produced in the hot months, when the repulsive 
 and expansive force in the atmosphere is prevailing over its attractive 
 and contractive force, are cured in the cool months, when the attractive 
 and contractive force of the atmosphere is prevailing over the repulsive 
 and expansive force. When the hot weather commences, then those 
 diseases begin to appear ; and when the change of season gives to cool 
 weather the ascendant, they begin to disappear, as is well known to the 
 most common observers. 
 
 If we can now find means to counteract the force by which the organs 
 and limbs are thus expanded, we shall not only be able to assist nature 
 in repairing the injuries sustained during the progress of these expan- 
 sions in the hot months, but we shall be able to repair the injuries in the 
 cases in which these natural influences have failed. On an examination 
 of the natural constitution of matter, we find there are two great divi- 
 sions in the earth, one of which has a contractive, and the other an ex- 
 pansive force ; or the contractive force of one, and the expansive force 
 of the other, have a great preponderance over their opposite forces. We 
 allude to the acids and the alkalies. The immense quantity of muriatic 
 acid, and of soda, required to form the muriate of soda or common salt 
 in the ocean and in the land, shows that these two kinds of matter- are 
 very generally diffused, and were first condensed with the water from the 
 gases which probably constituted our globe in its primeval state. And 
 as the muriatic acid, or the chlorine gas concentrated in the muriate of 
 soda, forms the basis of the other acids, or a large proportion of the acids 
 of our earth, so it is probable soda or a gas concentrated in it, forms 
 the base of the greatest number of alkaline bodies. However this may 
 be, we know that chlorine combined with other negative matter, has a 
 strong power of contraction ; and soda united with other positive matter, 
 a strong power of expansion. We have familiar examples of the first in 
 the case of acids, and of the last in the case of soaps. If, therefore, we 
 can convey to the tuberculated organs and limbs, constantly and steadily, 
 a harmless negative matter, in quantities suflacient to make the attrac- 
 tions and contractions in the organs and limbs prevail over the repulsions 
 and expansions, we ought to be able to cure these diseases in their first 
 stages as uniformly as they are produced. 
 
 Physicians have long been in the habit of prescribing chlorine for their 
 
120 
 
 patients, combined with negative matter — with mercury, under the names 
 of chloride of mercury, commonly called muriate or oxy-muriate of mer- 
 cury, and sub-chloride of mercury or calomel, and with iron, commonly 
 called muriate of iron. 
 
 They have also been sometimes in the habit of prescribing it in com- 
 bination with gold, under the names of chloride and per-chloride of gold, 
 and these combinations have been taken into the stomach, mixed with 
 the chyle, attracted to the heart, and then repelled from it, through the 
 arteries, to every part of the body, or to every part of every organ, limb, 
 or other structure. 
 
 These, with Iodine, to which I have already referred, are the reme- 
 dies principally relied on by physicians to cure or palliate this class 
 of diseases. They are, however, differently selected, and they are pre- 
 scribed in doses differing according to the diversities of medical opinion. 
 The difference in the intervals of time, also, in which these remedies are 
 directed to be taken, is very great ; and the result of such practice is 
 that which might very naturally be expected — an almost constant fail- 
 ure in curing the disease, and consequently an entire want of confidence 
 in their efficacy. 
 
 We have, on the contrary, very successfully, during a period of more 
 than twenty-five years, prescribed chlorine, united with gold and other 
 neo-ative matter, (by processes which it would be both tedious and use- 
 less to describe here,) in the form of a pill, in the same quantity and in 
 the same intervals of time, in all conditions of patients affected with 
 chronic diseases of this class. Note A. 
 
 As the series of lymphatic glands or secreting organs along the spi- 
 nal column, and their satellites around the vertebrae, with the spinal 
 nerves are involved more or less in the disease of the organs with which 
 they are connected, — I use, also, a plaster composed of bitumen and 
 iron, placed on the spine, for the purpose of making the skin under it 
 excrete a mucous or positive matter, instead of its natural aeriform or 
 negative matter during the progress of the cure ; and for the same rea- 
 son, the plaster is also applied over the white swellings of any part of 
 the body, joints or limbs. Large quantities of the magnetic forces are 
 evolved in the process of the decomposition of these remedies in the 
 oro-ans, and on the surface of the skin, which increase the strength of the 
 primary and consecutive poles situated within the organs — gradually re- 
 duce the tuberculated organs and limbs — remove the compression of the 
 nerves and re-establish the natural action of the motive power of the 
 system. Note B. 
 
 As a per-chloride of gold and soda is one of the principal articles that 
 enter into the composition of the pills, we are pleased to be able to in- 
 troduce here the following notice from a French periodical, of its effects 
 
121 
 
 in the class of diseases in which we have so long used it, and to which 
 our attention was directed by the kindness of a friend : 
 
 " M. Legrand, to whom the profession is already indebted for a valua- 
 ble work on the employment of salts of gold in the treatment of syphilis, 
 has recently proposed in a memoir read before the Academy, apparently 
 with much reason, the use of the same mineral in the cure of scrofula, 
 when it affects the soft parts of the human frame, as the skin, the adi- 
 pose and cellular tissue, certain parts of the mucous membranes, and par- 
 ticularly the lymphatic glands, both external and internal, and, in short, 
 any texture not osseous or immediately connected with the osseous tex- 
 ture. 
 
 " This agent, M. Legrand, exhibits, either externally by means of au- 
 riferous frictions, or by dressing the sores with pure gold in the form of an 
 impalpable powder mixed with lard ; or, internally, in the form of pills or 
 pastilles, or rubbed on the mucous papillated surface of the tongue. In 
 the first case, that of impalpable powder, one-sixtieth part, or about four 
 or five grains of gold powder, are made into an ointment with half an 
 ounce of lard. M. Legrand, however, thinks he has ascertained that it 
 has not a medicinal action on the economy equal to that of the oxides or 
 of the salts. 
 
 " The forms of the mineral most strongly recommended are, the oxide of 
 gold by potass ; the oxide of gold by tin, occasionally called the stannate 
 of gold ; and, lastly, the per-chloride of gold and soda, more generally 
 known under the name of the muriate of gold and soda, in the order now 
 specified, the most energetic being placed last. These last preparations 
 are indeed so active, that they cannot be administered in doses above 
 l-15th, l-12th, or 1-lOth of a grain; and in large doses they would pro- 
 duce most serious disturbance in the economy. 
 
 " These preparations, however, unlike antimony, arsenic, or mercury, 
 are void of corrosive properties, and seem chiefly to excite the animal 
 tissues to more salutary action ; and, according to M. Legrand, they are, 
 when not sanative, not injurious. Hence their use may be much longer 
 continued than those of the preparations of mercury or arsenic." 
 
 M. Legrand is mistaken in supposing that the per-chloride of gold has 
 a curative effect in disease of " certain parts of the mucous membranes." 
 It has no effect whatever on the mucous glands, and no apparent effect 
 upon any part of these membranes, nor has my combination of it, except 
 in cases where the disease of the membrane is dependent on tubercular 
 disease of the serous membrane to which it is united, and which disap- 
 pears with the disease of the latter. He is also mistaken in supposing 
 it has no sanative effect in osseous textures. It must be admitted, how- 
 ever, that it has very little, when used alone, compared to its action in 
 the combination in which I use it. 
 
122 
 
 The energy and efficiency with which these medicines must act, on 
 the principles of magnetism, may be inferred from the following extract 
 from Farraday's Researches on the " Absolute quantity of magnetism in 
 matter." 
 
 " If two wires, one of platina and one of zinc, each one-eighteenth of 
 an inch in diameter, placed five-sixteenths of an inch apart, and immer- 
 sed to the depth of five-eights of an inch in acid, consisting of one drop 
 of oil of vitriol, and four ounces of distilled water, at a temperature of 
 about 60 degrees Fahrenheit, and connected at the other extremities by 
 a copper wire, eighteen feet long and one-eighteenth of an inch in thick- 
 ness, yielded as much electricity (magnetism) in little more than three 
 seconds of time, as a Ley den battery of fifteen equal jars of such a size 
 that each contains one hundred and eighty-four square inches of glass, 
 coated on both sides, independent of the bottoms, and charged by thirty 
 turns of a very large and powerful plate electrical machine in full action. 
 This quantity, though suiBcient if passed at once through the head of a 
 rat or cat, to have killed it as by a flash of lightning, was evolved by the 
 mutual action of so small a portion of the zinc wire and water in con- 
 tact with it, that the loss of weight sustained by either would be inap- 
 preciable by our most delicate instruments." 
 
 Mr. Farraday deduces from his experiments that the quantity of elec- 
 tricity belonging to a compound matter is identical with the quantity 
 necessary to effect a separation into its elements. Hence may be inferred 
 the enormous quantity of electricity contained in a single grain of water, 
 from the quantity required for its decomposition. " It must be in quan- 
 tity sufficient to sustain a platinum wire of an inch in thickness, red hot, 
 in contact with the air, for three minutes and three-quarters." " I have 
 endeavored," he says, " to make a comparison by the loss of weight of 
 such a wire, in a given time, in such an acid, but the proportion is so high 
 that I am almost afraid to mention it. It would appear that 800,000 
 such charges of the Leyden battery, as I have referred to, would be ne- 
 cessary to supply electricity sufficient to decompose a single grain of 
 water ; or, if I am right, to equal the quantity of electricity, which is 
 naturally associated with the elements of that grain of water, endowing 
 them with their natural chemical affinity." 
 
 The influence of magnetism on animals in augmenting the force of the 
 contractions and expansions of the muscles, and in altering the morbid and 
 establishing the natural secretion, has been proved by a great number of 
 facts. The experiments of Dr. Philip are so well known to the medical 
 and philosophical world, that it is almost an act of supererogation to repeat 
 them ; but as this little work is intended for all classes of readers, we deem 
 it advisable to introduce an abstract of them Dr. Philip " found that the 
 secretion of the gastric juice in the stomach, which had been suspended 
 
123 
 
 by the division of the 8th pair of nerves, was restored on establishing 
 the voltaic current of electricity through the divided portion of the nerves 
 next to the stomach The accuracy of the experiment on which this 
 conclusion is founded, was for a long time disputed ; but it has been lately 
 satisfactorily established, by their careful repetition at the Royal Institu- 
 tion by Dr. Philip, in conjunction with Mr. Brodie. Dr. Philip appears 
 also to have succeeded in showing, that when the lungs and muscles are 
 deprived of their proportion of the nervous influence, so that their func- 
 tions are impeded, and the breathing has become difficult and laborious, 
 increased facility is obtained in carrying on these movements by the 
 stimulus of the galvanic power. 
 
 " It appears, then, from these facts, that the galvanic energy is capable 
 of supplying the place of the nervous influence ; so that, by means of its 
 assistance, the stomach, otherwise inactive, digests its food as usual, and 
 the muscular apparatus of the lungs are roused from a state of compara- 
 tive torpor to one of healthy action." Dr. Philip, indeed, contends "that 
 the inferences deducible from these experiments establish the identity of 
 galvanism, electricity, and nervous influence." 
 
 Directions for using the remedies. 
 
 One pill must be taken night and morning, during three weeks, after 
 which one pill every night ; except in cases of children under three 
 years and over one year and a half, when half of a pill only must be 
 given every night on going to bed, until the disease is cured, no matter 
 what the state of the stomach or intestines. In cases of children under 
 a year and a half old and over three months, a quarter of a pill may be 
 taken at bedtime in any convenient medium. 
 
 For children, the pill may be dissolved in water at the rate of four tea 
 spoonsful of water to one pill, if care is taken to shake the solution well 
 before using; it. 
 
 Privation in dieting is neither necessary nor proper during the use of 
 these pills ; but on the contrary the most nourishing food must be taken 
 in all cases where the stomach will bear it, and it will always be borne 
 after a few days use of the pills. 
 
 Patients must not only take the most nourishing food, but must take 
 any kind the appetite craves ; that is when they have eat all they can 
 of one kind of food, they may take what they can of another, and then of 
 another, &c. 
 
 As soon as the swellings begin to lessen in the organs or limbs, the 
 latter are flaccid and weak, and want support ; they must get it from 
 food. 
 
124 
 
 DirectiaKS for using the Plaster in cases where the disease is affecting the 
 organs, as in consumption, dyspepsia, SfC. 
 
 In tubercula, or what is called scrofula or chronic disease, affecting 
 the head or face, the plaster must be applied to the middle and upper 
 part of the back of the neck or upper cervical vertebrae — in consump- 
 tion, and also in chronic disease or hypertrophy of the heart, it must be 
 applied over the lovrer half of the neck and extend dovs^n between the 
 shoulders over the first, second, and third joints of the neck, or dorsal 
 vertebrae, — in dyspepsia it must be applied over the first, second, third, 
 fourth, fifth and sixth joints of the back between the shoulders, or from 
 the large and last joint of the neck to the seventh dorsal vertebrae — in 
 chronic disease of the liver it must be applied over the seventh, eighth 
 and ninth dorsal vertebrae — in chronic disease of the spleen it must be 
 applied over the same vertebrae — in chronic disease of the intestines and 
 mesentery or chronic diarrhoea, it must be applied over the eleventh and 
 twelfth dorsal, and first and second lumbar vertebrae — in the uterus or 
 chronic disease of this organ or leucorrhoea, chlorosis or menorrhagia, it 
 must be applied over all the joints of the small of the back or lumbar 
 vertebrae. In such cases, the leather or cloth for the plaster may be cut 
 five inches wide, and spread very thin three inches wide, leaving a mar- 
 gin on the sides and ends of about an inch, and must be renewed by 
 adding a little more of the plaster, as often as the plaster becomes loose 
 and does not adhere. If the plaster is renewed very often, or oftener 
 than once in two or three days, and spread thick, it will in some cases 
 make the back very sore ; and in such cases, it may be discontinued two 
 or three days, or until the pimples it produces are healed, and then re- 
 applied as before, and its use continued until the disease is cured. 
 
 As the disease very frequently affects more than one organ at the 
 same time, as the stomach and liver, or the lungs, stomach and liver, the 
 plaster should in such cases be placed over all the joints through which 
 the spinal nerves are connected with the diseased organs. 
 
 In the cases in which the disease of the organs is not very severe, 
 the pills alone will be sufficient to cure it without the aid of the plaster, 
 and in the bad cases that would require two or three boxes of the pills, 
 the plaster may generally be discontinued after the use of one or two 
 boxes. 
 
 Directions for using the Plaster in ivhite swellings of the limbs, jaw and 
 neck, and in ulcers and abscesses. 
 
 The plaster must be spread very thin (it is no matter how thin) on 
 India rubber cloth, which is much better than any other, or thick oiled 
 silk, or the rough side of a piece of oil cloth, or on very thin and soft 
 
125 
 
 leather, or on glazed cotton or linen cloth, and of a size sufficient to 
 cover the tubercles, ulcers, abscesses, or white swellings, or painful part 
 of the system, and applied to them and removed and renewed once in 
 every day, either by adding a very little more of the plaster, and what 
 will be barely sufficient to give it a new surface, or by spreading a new 
 plaster. 
 
 If, on removing the plaster, much of it should adhere to the skin, it 
 may be washed off with soap, and the plaster re-applied, and this course 
 must be pursued until the tubercles, ulcers, and abscesses or white swel- 
 lings are removed. Small vesicles appear under the plaster in a few 
 days after it is applied filled with lymph, but they soon disappear, and 
 others are formed and disappear, and require no attention whatever. 
 
 Observations on the use of the remedies in different cases. 
 
 When white swellings of the joints or limbs, over which these plasters 
 are applied, are cured, they are always smaller than the corresponding 
 well joints or limbs, unless from long continued disease the bones of a 
 joint or limb have, before its application, become permanently enlarged. 
 
 There are ninety pills in a box, a number sufficient, with a box of 
 plaster, to last a patient nine weeks, and to cure any of the recent cases 
 of the disease in any of its forms. In cases, however, of long con- 
 tinuance, or in the last stage, it will sometimes, from obvious causes, 
 which I have not room here to explain, require two or three boxes of 
 each. 
 
 These remedies, which I have used in my practice for more than 
 twenty-five years, and during the time I have been investigating the 
 phenomena of tubercula, and about which there is no mistake, are very 
 active, but never produce any injurious or disagreeable effect upon the 
 stomach, or any other part of the system, or any other that is noticed by 
 such patients, except a steady improvement in all the symptoms ae- 
 pendent on chronic tubercula. 
 
 Improvement in health commences immediately, or very soon after 
 the commencement of the use of the remedies, and their action con- 
 tinues steadily and forcibly, and cannot be easily diverted from their 
 purpose, and the cure progresses steadily, with a steady increase of 
 strength and flesh, unless it be checked by colds which sometimes retard, 
 but rarely, or never, prevent a cure. 
 
 These remedies cure all the different forms of tuberculss in their first 
 stages, and a great majority of those in the last stage of the disease, 
 known by the symptoms we have described, but called by different 
 names according to their situation or other circumstances attending them, 
 viz., scrofulous sore eyes, and ulcers of the cornea — ulcers of the ears — 
 8 
 
126 
 
 disease of the antrum and nose — tinea capitis or scald head — king's evil 
 and goitre in the neck — mercurial disease or chronic enlargement of the 
 tongue and tonsils — chronic enlargement of the breast, or mammse, in- 
 cluding cancer in its first stage — phthisis or consumption — hypertrophy 
 of, or chronic enlargement of the heart — dyspepsia, or chronic disease 
 of the stomach — chronic disease of the liver, or liver complaint — tabes 
 mesenterica, or chronic diarrhoea — chronic disease of the uterus, or leu- 
 corrhoea, amenorrhcea, chlorosis, menorrhagia, and incipient cancer of 
 the uterus — ulcerated legs, fever sores — disease of the spine, disease of 
 the hip joint — white swellings of the joints or limbs — morbid alterations 
 of structure in the synovial membranes — chronic rheumatism (tuber- 
 culated muscles) or cases where one of these forms of the disease is 
 complicated with the same disease in another organ or limb. 
 
 In typhus fevers the secreting organs or lymphatic glands of the small 
 intestines with those of the mesentary, as well as the series along the 
 spine, are always tuberculated, and dissections in such cases always 
 show those of the small intestines and mesentary in a state of ulcera- 
 tion. Dissections also show that other organs are tuberculated at the 
 same time, as the brain and its membranes, stomach, liver, &c. ; and 
 pressure along the spinal colum shows that such patients have the symp- 
 toms of tuberculated organs. And these symptoms are, whenever they 
 are present, the evident indications that the remedies are the true 
 ones, no matter by what names systematic nosologists or other medical 
 writers may have chosen to call the disease. In diseases which have 
 been confounded by nosologists with tubercula, but which from the 
 absence of these symptoms, as well as from the evidences of post mor- 
 tem examinations, have manifestly no connexion with them, as in 
 chronic bronchitis and other affections of the bronchial tubes, &c., these 
 remedies are entirely useless. 
 
 The liver and spleen are frequently found to be enlarged during and 
 after intermittent fevers ; and we always find these symptoms in these 
 fevers after the first or inflammatory stage is past, and we frequently 
 find by these symptoms that the stomach or some other organ is tuber- 
 culated at the same time. We also find these symptoms in remittent or 
 bilious fevers after the first or inflammatory stage ; and when such 
 patients do not begin to gain health and strength after that stage is past, 
 it is almost always in consequence of the ulcerated state of the small in- 
 testines, ("as is now well known to physicians) when these will be found 
 to be the appropriate remedies. They have saved many such patients, 
 as well as those with typhus fever, when in the last part of the last 
 stage of the disease, after the common remedies had entirely failed. 
 
 Scarlet fever is acute tubercular disease of the serous surface of the 
 muco-serous membran*> of the throat, which is extended to other serous 
 
127 
 
 surfaces, as those of the stomach, lungs, skin and other organs. It 
 goes through its acute or inflammatory stage in four or five days, when 
 it becomes chronic, and demands the use of these remedies to reduce the 
 tuberculations, remove the great and extensive compressions of the 
 nerves, and re-establish the natural action of the forces which produce 
 motion in the system. When, therefore, such patients do not begin to 
 recover soon after the acute stage is passed, no time should be lost in the 
 application of these remedies. 
 
 The yearly number of cases in which we used these remedies was at 
 first very few, but they gradually increased with the improvements in 
 the remedies suggested by long experience, when in 1835, or from the 
 1st January, 1835, to December 31st of the same year, they amounted to 
 163. I took notes of these cases in which the disease, affecting the 
 different organs and limbs, was in the proportion seen in the following 
 schedule : — ■ 
 
 Neck 18 
 
 Neck and eyes 2 
 
 Neck, nose, and spine 1 
 
 Neck, tongue, tonsils, and right leg 1 
 
 Neck, jaw, tonsils, ear, cerebellum, breast, heart, stomach, 
 
 uterus, one arm and both legs 1 
 
 Neck and lung 2 
 
 Neck and stomach 1 
 
 Neck and mesentery 3 
 
 Tongue, tonsils, and uvula 1 
 
 Tongue, tonsils, and right leg 1 
 
 Nose and face 2 
 
 Lungs, (first stage) 21 
 
 Lungs, last stage with tubercles in a mature state 1 
 
 Lungs, with excavations 5 
 
 Luno-s and both legs, and one ankle, with excavation of 
 
 both lungs 1 
 
 Heart 3 
 
 Heart and liver 4 
 
 Stomach 19 
 
 Liver ^ 
 
 Stomach and lungs 18 
 
 Kidney (leftj 1 
 
 Liver and kidney (right j 1 
 
 Liver and stomach ^ 
 
 Liver with abscess 3 
 
 119 
 
128 
 
 Brought forward, 119 
 
 Mesentery 1 
 
 Uterus and legs 3 
 
 Uterus and lun^s 2 
 
 Uterus and stomach 6 
 
 Joints and limbs 31 
 
 Unknown 1 
 
 Whole number of cases in 1835, 163 
 
 Of these cases the number cured is 154 
 
 Cases not cured, in consequence of not using the remedies 
 a sufficient length of time 3 
 
 Of the cases which have died, the first was that of Master N., of 
 Columbus, aged 16 or 17 years, whom I never saw, and of whose case 
 I know nothing, except that it was about ten j-ears since it commenced. 
 
 The second case was that of Mrs. B., of M., in the last part of the 
 last stage of tubercula of the mesentery, with a frightful marasmus. 
 
 The third case was that of Mrs. K., of M., with a cancer of the uterus 
 in a state of ulceration, complicated with abscess of the liver, which 
 was discharging matter through the right side in four places. 
 
 The fourth case was that of j\Ir. W. W., of M. Michigan, with tuber- 
 culated right leg, left hand, heart, and scalp over the right frontal, and 
 right parietal bones. The leg and also the scalp ulcerated in tAvo places. 
 He died of compression of the brain, in consequence of the injudicious 
 use of nitrate of silver, which had been frequently applied by the direc- 
 tion of his physicians, to the upper part of the parietal bone, and pene- 
 trated through it to the brain, as shown by dissection. 
 
 The fifth case was that of Mrs. S., of Cincinnati, with tuberculated 
 left lung in a mature state ; and sixth, the case of Mrs. C, of Cincinnati, 
 with hypertrophy of the heart, and excavation of both lungs. 
 
 We have taken but a few notes of the numerous cases in which we 
 have used these remedies since 1835 ; but from all we have learned of 
 the result of them, we are induced to believe that the proportion between 
 those that have been cured by these remedies, and those in which they 
 have failed, does not vary much from that shown in the above year, or 
 from those of former years. 
 
 We are familiar with the use of the stethescope, having used it in a 
 great number of cases since 1824, and cannot be mistaken in regard to 
 the excavations in the lungs mentioned in the above cases, which show 
 results in the use of these remedies as a cure for tubercular disease en- 
 tirely unknown to any other course of treatment. They also show the 
 importance of commencing the use of these remedies in the early stage 
 
129 
 
 of the disease in this organ, and the uncertainty of the results when in 
 the last stage. 
 
 The cases of this disease affecting the neck, called king's evil, are all 
 cured with these remedies, excepting only those which have terminated 
 in cancer, and which are easily distinguished by physicians — first by the 
 solidity of the tumor, with the close adherence and dark color of the 
 skin, and lastly by its fungus ulcers with granulated surfaces and everted 
 edges of the skin. The symptoms which 1 have so often mentioned, also 
 enable us to distinguish tubercula from cancer of the mamm?e or breast, in 
 which these remedies, like every other, fail. All the other cases of tu- 
 bercula, particularly white swellings of the body, joints, or limbs, yield 
 readily under the use of these remedies, including those in a state of ul- 
 ceration. 
 
 The cases of the disease in the stomach called dyspepsia, are generally 
 cured with the greatest rapidity, probably in consequence of the great 
 quantity of the magnetic forces evolved in the decomposition of the pills 
 in that organ. 
 
 When the small intestines are tuberculated, the habit is costive in the 
 first stage of the disease; but when in the last stage, the tubercles be- 
 come ulcerated, the habit is changed, and diarrhoea commences. In 
 either case these remedies uniformly (with very few exceptions) re-es- 
 tablish the natural habit in from three to fifteen days. There are a few 
 cases of long standing that require a longer time to effect the same ob- 
 ject, and there are cases in the last stage of consumption uncontrolled by 
 these or any other remedies. 
 
 In the cases of costive habits, medicine should be taken once a day on 
 commencing the use of these remedies, in quantities sufficient only to 
 move the bowels every day, and the dose gradually lessened until it is 
 no longer required. 
 
 In amenorrh(Ea,leucorrhosa,and menorrhagia, the uterus is always tu- 
 berculated, or more or less enlarged, and these enlargements of this or- 
 gan are uniformly reduced by these remedies in the first stage of the 
 disease, and a great proportion of those in the last stage, and the natural 
 action of this organ is thereby re-established. These effects of the re- 
 medies are so constant and uniform, in such cases, as to require no aid 
 from other remedies, exceptino; only such as are accompanied with dis- 
 placement of the uterus, and called prolapsus-uteri. 
 
 When this organ is enlarged, its weight is increased, and the ligaments 
 by which it is suspended dilate, and it descends more or less from its na- 
 tural position, and in many cases so far as to require mechanical support 
 during the progress of the cure. 
 
 When, therefore, there is so much displacement of this organ as to 
 produce much inconvenience in walking, it should be supported in its 
 
130 
 
 natural situation by some of the numerous contrivances invented for that 
 purpose, until the tuberculations are reduced, and its ligaments contracted 
 to sustain it again in its proper position. 
 
 In closing these observations it may be useful to observe, that vrhen 
 blood is drawn from the veins of patients affected with chronic diseases, 
 it is always of a very dark color, which imparts a dark, sallow, or un- 
 natural color to the skin, both of which are uniformly found to be changed 
 after one or two weeks use of the magnetic pills, to the light, florid, or 
 natural color, and is no doubt the consequence of a chemical and healthy 
 change in the character of the fluid, produced by magnetising it with the 
 forces evolved in the decomposition of the pills. 
 
CHAPTER V I I 
 
 CASES OF TUBERCULA DISEASE OF THE ORGANS. 
 
 Consumption. 
 
 Mr. G. W. B., of the city of New York, of light complexion and 
 thin habit, aged 29 years, commenced the use of these remedies for con- 
 sumption in April, 1S39, they being prescribed by another physician, 
 from whom, as well as from Mr. G. W. B., I obtained the following 
 concise history of the case : 
 
 The disease commenced in August, 1833, with hemorrhage from the 
 lungs, which was succeeded by cough and moderate expectoration, which 
 continued to August, 1834, when the hemorrhage from the lungs was 
 repeated. The cough and expectoration continued ; and in August, 1835, 
 the hemorrhage was again repeated, and his strength much reduced. Tlip 
 quantity of blood raised each time being from half a pint to a pint. The 
 cough and expectoration gradually increased after this last attack of 
 
132 
 
 hemorrhage up to the time he commenced the use of the remedies, when 
 he was pale, feeble, and much emaciated. His cough and expectora- 
 tion then -began to decrease ; the color of his skin soon began to assume 
 a more florid hue ; his appetite increased, so that he soon gained strength 
 and flesh ; and when he had taken three boxes of the remedies, or in 
 about six months, his health was fully re-established, and it continues 
 very good to this time. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE LEFT LUNG. 
 
 Mr. R. H., of the city of New York, aged 30 years, had been out of 
 health five years when he called to see me in June, 1S37. On an ex- 
 amination of his case in the usual manner, I found him affected with tu- 
 bercular disease of the lungs, stomach, and liver. The disease com- 
 menced first in the liver, and in about a year after was propagated to the 
 stomach, and from thence to the lungs. This was about four months be- 
 fore he called on me, when cough and expectoration had commenced, 
 which still continued. He was pale, feeble, and emaciated. Prescribed 
 magnetic remedies. His health soon began to improve, but progressed 
 at first slowly ; yet, when he had used four boxes of these remedies, his 
 health was entirely restored. He has since enjoyed as good health as 
 any man. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE LUNGS. 
 
 Rapid Consumption. 
 
 Mrs. D. R., of the city of New York, of light complexion, aged 19 
 years, commenced coughing early in the fall of 1838, while in a state of 
 gestation. This cough continued with little expectoration until after her 
 confinement on the 23d of February, 1S39, when they both began to in- 
 crease, and in a few weeks the expectoration amounted to about a pint a 
 day. Her feet and ankles began to swell, accompanied with other symp- 
 toms of approaching dissolution, when she commenced the use of the 
 magnetic remedies under the advice of another physician, on the 4th of 
 April following. 
 
 These remedies checked the further progress of the disease, and in 48 
 hours after she commenced the use of them, her symptoms were evi- 
 dently better ; her cough and expectoration gradually decreased ; the 
 swelling of her feet and ankles disappeared ; her appetite and strength in- 
 creased ; and in about two months after she commenced the use of the 
 remedies, and after she had used one box of them, she called with her 
 husband at my oflice to inquire whether it would be necessary to use 
 
133 
 
 them any longer. I advised her to use another box ; she did so, and has 
 since enjoyed uninterrupted good health. 
 
 New York, June 15, 1840 
 I recognise, in the above description, fully the case of my wife. 
 
 Silas Reynolds. 
 
 tubercula of the right lung, heart, stomach, liver, spleen, 
 kidneys, spine, intestines and uterus. 
 
 Mrs. p., of the City of New York, of light complexion, and small 
 and slender frame. I was called to see her on the 20th May, 1837, and on 
 examining her spine, found she had tubercula of the right lung, heart, 
 stomach, liver, spleen, kidneys, intestines and uterus. On inquiry I 
 found that she was married at the age of 15 years, and had suffered two 
 abortions. The disease commenced about two years before in the 
 uterus, with leucorrhcea, and was thence first propagated to the stomach, 
 and thence to the liver, spleen, heart, kidnies, and at last to the right 
 lung. In January of the above year, cough and expectoration com- 
 menced, and had continued to that time. The whole length of the spine 
 was A'ery sensitive to the touch, and she could consequently bear but 
 very little pressure upon it. On her observing that there was some 
 swelling along her back, I examined it, and found a white swelling along 
 each side of the spine, extending from the sixth dorsal to the third lumbar 
 vertebrse. As this was an extraordinary case of tubercular disease, in- 
 volving so many organs, as well as the vertebrzB at the same time, I 
 requested the liberty of inviting several distinguished physicians to see 
 it before I commen'^ed the use of the remedies. This request being 
 granted, I invited four of them to see it ; all of whom agreed, after an 
 examination of the case, that it was hopeless of cure under the use of 
 the common remedies. I then commenced the use of the magnetic 
 remedies — the plaster to extend the whole length of the spine. Her 
 health began to improve soon after. About the first of July, her cough 
 and expectoration had increased during a few days, and on an examina- 
 tion of the chest with the stethescope, I found an exca ration in the 
 upper part of the right lung, showing that a cluster of tubercles had 
 softened down and made their way into the air tubes, and left an exca- 
 vation since I first examined her lungs. 
 
 Her health soon after began to improve again — the white swellings of 
 the vertebrae disappeared ; and in about seven weeks the excavation was 
 healed and entirely closed, and her cough and expectoration also disap- 
 peared in a few months after. The other tuberculated organs were 
 gradually reduced to the natural state ; and soon after the state of gesta- 
 tion was renewed, and continued through the natural period. 
 9 
 
134 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE LUNGS. 
 
 Rapid Consumption. 
 
 Mrs. P. S., of S., Hamilton county, Ohio, aged twenty-eight years. 
 I was called to see her, September 16th, 1833. She had hectic fever, 
 with cough, expectoration, night sweats, and diarrhoea. On applying 
 the stethescope to the chest, it gave the symptoms of tubercular engorge- 
 ment of the left lung. These symptoms came on about three weeks 
 before, and two weeks after her confinement with her last child. She 
 had irregular pains in the left side of the chest for three months previous 
 to her confinement, and was unable to sleep on her right side, as an 
 attempt to do so increased the painful sensations in her left side. On 
 examination, I found a number of tubercles on the left side of her neck, 
 from the size of a pea to that of a large bean, and one on the side of the 
 lower jaw of the same side, of the size of a small walnut. Two physi- 
 cians had prescribed for her, but she continued to get worse, and her 
 flesh and strength were wasting rapidly. Prescribed — magnetic pills 
 and plaster. These alarming symptoms were checked in a few hours, 
 her health soon began to improve, and in three weeks her cough, fever, 
 night sweats, and diarrhoea had disappeared, and in another week her 
 health was re-established. This was a case of rapid consumption, and 
 she would not have survived under the common treatment more than 
 one or two weeks longer. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE LUNGS. 
 
 Consumption. 
 
 Mrs. M. W , of Union, Butler county, Ohio, aged 34 years. I 
 
 was called to see her, August 22, 1834. She is above the middle stature, 
 of dark complexion and slender form. Has enjoyed almost uninter- 
 rupted good health until about the first of June last, when she began to 
 be feeble, and this feebleness continued, and in the last week in July 
 began to cough, and in a few days after began to expectorate a thin and 
 semi-transparent glutinous matter, and it was not until yesterday morn- 
 ing that the appearance of this matter changed to a yellow-white colour, 
 and raised in a much larger quantity than usual, which now gave alarm 
 for her safety and induced her to seek assistance. Her cough too had 
 been attended with some degree of hoarseness after a few of the first 
 days, and had increased so much that it was now with great difficulty 
 that she could raise her voice above a whisper. Her flesh is wasting 
 rapidly, and in the last few days has had a little fever, in the afternoon 
 and evening, with a flush on her cheeks, and has begun to sweat in the 
 after part of the night. 
 
135 
 
 The catamenia has disappeared, and her eye has the clear and glassy 
 appearance and expression Avhich gives to her countenance that peculiar 
 vivacity so characteristic of consumption. She has a tubercle of the 
 size of a pea on the upper and outer side of the left lower jaw, and 
 another of twice the size on the lower part of the neck, and near the 
 clavicle of the right side, and both are very sore or tender. Pressure on 
 the lower cervical vertebrze produces pain, which darts thence into the 
 chest, and pressure on the tubercle near the clavicle produces pain Avhich 
 darts under the clavicle. 
 
 Prescribed, pills and plaster. The plaster 12 inches long and five 
 broad, to be applied over the last cervical and upper dorsal vetebrse. 
 One pill to be taken night and morning- for three weeks, and then one 
 every night, with the constant use of flannel chemise and drawers, and 
 to continue her usual exercise and exposure to the atmosphere. 
 
 Her cough and hoarseness soon began to subside, and in about four 
 weeks they had very nearly ceased, and she had gained considerable 
 strength, when she took a severe cold, which increased her cough and 
 hoarseness, and lessened her strength, but they began to subside again 
 in a few days and soon disappeared. 
 
 October 2Sth. Examined her chest again with the stethescope aod 
 found that the respiratory murmur, which at first was only heard very 
 slightly in the lower part, and only in a few places in the upper part of 
 the lungs, was now clear and distinct over their whole extent, but yet 
 not so loud as in health. 
 
 November 14th. The tubercles which were at first nearly round 
 and hard, have flattened down and nearly disappeared. The respiration 
 is now loud and natural over the whole extent of both lungs. She has 
 no cough, unless she gets a little cold, and then it is very slight, and no 
 more than common, when enjoying good health, and has entirely lost the 
 consumptive aspect of her countenance, and has nearly regained her 
 usual flesh and strength. 
 
 December 15th. The catamenia has re-appeared after an absence of 
 four months, and her health in all respects perfectly restored. 
 
 Her mother and two sisters have died with consumption. 
 
 Oct. 22, 1836. Her health continues good. 
 
 TUBERCULA AND EXCAVATION OF BOTH LUNGS. 
 
 Consumption. 
 
 Mrs. J. C, of Union, Butler county, Ohio, aged 36 years. Called to 
 see her, May 28th, 1835. 
 
 She has been very subject to cough ten or eleven years, and has had 
 five or six slight attacks of hemoptysis during the last two years, and in 
 
136 
 
 the last part of March last, her cough and expectoration, after two or 
 three successive colds, was much increased, and has continued to in- 
 crease to this time. She has irregular fever and night sweats, and has 
 had diarrhoea, which gradually disappeared after her feet and legs began 
 to swell. They are now swelled nearly to the knee, and are cedematous, 
 and she is much emaciated. 
 
 Pressure on the right side of the last cervical vertebra produces pain, 
 which, on every repetition of the pressure, darts into the right lung, and 
 pressure on the left side of the same vertebrae produces pain, which darts 
 into the left lung. 
 
 On applying the stethescope to the chest, I found an excavation in the 
 upper and front part of the left lung, and another near the middle of it, 
 and a third in the front and upper part of the right lung. These exca- 
 vations are not very large, and there are no tubercles in clusters in a 
 mature state near them, or in any other part of the lungs. 
 
 Diagnosis. Tubercula and excavation of both lungs. Prescribed, 
 magnetic pills and plaster. The action of these remedies commenced 
 immediately, and in about four weeks her cough, fever, and expectora- 
 tion had entirely disappeared, and the excavations were healed, and she 
 had gained much flesh and strength. She has now, (July 4th,) no 
 appearance of disease, excepting the swelling of her feet and legs, and 
 this has almost all disappeared. November 4th, 1836. Her health 
 continues good. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE NECK AND LUNGS. 
 
 King^s Evil terminating in Consumption. 
 
 Mrs. L. B , of Franklin, Warren county, Ohio, aged 35 years, 
 
 came to me, August 16th 1832, with the form of scrofula called king's 
 evil, which had been propagated to the lungs, and terminated in tuber- 
 cular consumption. 
 
 The whole of the right side of her neck was covered with scars and 
 ulcers, and they extended from thence down half the length of the 
 shoulder blade, and half the length of the arm. There were sixteen 
 ulcers discharging scrofulous matter, and a number of tubercles of 
 different sizes, on her neck, arm and shoulder. She had hectic fever 
 every day, with night sweats, and was coughing and raising large quan- 
 tities of matter every day, and such as is raised in tubercular consump- 
 tion. She was feeble and much emaciated. It was now more than six 
 years since the disease commenced, and the tubercles began to suppurate ; 
 and more than five months since she began to cough and expectorate. 
 On examining her chest with the stethescope, it gave the symptoms of 
 tubercular engorgement of the right lung. Prescribed the magnetic 
 pills and plaster. In seven weeks from this time, she came to me again. 
 
137 
 
 apparently cured. The ulcers were all healed — only one small tubercle 
 remained, and that much lessened in size. Her fever and night sweats 
 had disappeared, and her cough and expectoration had almost entirely 
 ceased, and she had gained ■ so much flesh and strength as to make her 
 appear as well as any other person. Her health has continued good 
 Previous to her applying the magnetic remedies, physicians and doctors 
 of all sorts had visited her ; and her friends did not expect her to survive 
 more than a few months. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE RIGHT LUNG. 
 
 Consumption. 
 
 Doctor B. S. Lawson, of Cincinnati, rather light complexion, tall and 
 slender frame, aged 32 years. Called to see him about the last of 
 October, 1836. His health, he informed me, had been gradually de- 
 clining about eight years, and about the middle of August last, he began 
 to cough and expectorate very freely. On examining his neck, found 
 the submaxillary, and some of the cervical glands tuberculated ; and on 
 applying pressure on the last cervical vertebrae, it produced pain, but it 
 was more severe when applied on the right side, between this vertebrse 
 and the first dorsal, while pressure on the other vertebrae of the spine 
 produced no pain or effect whatever. 
 
 I now applied the stethescope to the right side of the chest, and soon 
 found in the middle portion of it, a space of about three inches in 
 diameter, where the respiration was entirely inaudible, indicating from 
 the absence of the crepitous and mucous rattle, a large and solid cluster 
 of tubercles, rendering this part of the lung impermeable and immove- 
 able. The respiration was natural all round this portion of the lung, 
 and in every other part of the chest. 
 
 Liajnosis. Tubercula of the middle portion of the right lung. He 
 now told me that a celebrated physician, who was attending him, had also 
 examined him with the stethescope, and with the same result. He also 
 told me that percussion had beenfrequently applied, which uniformly gave 
 a dull sound over that part of the lung. He has the usual pale, lean, and 
 haggard look, or consumptive aspect of the countenance ; and the emacia- 
 tion has made considerable progress ; and he is gradually sinking. He has 
 had prescribed for him, and has pursued the usual antiphlogistic treatment, 
 including a large emetic tartar plaster over the front portion of his right 
 lung, (from which he suffered severely ,J with low vegetable and milk diet. 
 
 Prescribed, magnetic pills and plaster, with no restriction in diet. He 
 commenced gaining strength in a few days after, and in about seven 
 weeks, or at the time he had finished taking one box of the pills, I 
 examined him again with the stethescope, when the respiration was as 
 
13S 
 
 audible, in the before-mentioned middle portion of the right lung, as in 
 every other part of the chest, but presented now very clearly in this 
 place, the sounds of bronchophony. His cough had now nearly abated, 
 and he had gained in this time so much flesh, as to make him appear 
 better than he does in his usual health ; and has lost entirely the pale, 
 haggard, and consumptive aspect of his countenance. 
 
 January 18, 1837. Examined his chest again. The sound of bron- 
 chophony in the circumscribed space in the middle portion of the right 
 lung, and his cough and expectoration have ceased, and percussion gives 
 now a full, clear sound. 
 
 He continues to gain flesh and strength, and his face, body, and limbs) 
 have now the full and rounded form of a person in full flesh, and the 
 most perfect health. 
 
 It will be seen, that after distinguishing consumption by the new symp- 
 toms, the chest is, in most cases, explored with the stethescope. This 
 is done to ascertain the order and state of the tuberculations ; for, although 
 they are detected in the first dawning of the disease — even in many cases 
 before the cough commences — 3'et we cannot tell, without the aid of aus- 
 culation, whether these tubercles are scattered about at a distance from 
 each other, or are adjoining each other in small or large clusters, like 
 clusters of grapes, or have softened down and produced a small reparable 
 or a large irreparable excavation. Hence the doubt that must exist in 
 regard to the curability of the disease in its last stages in this organ, by 
 the natural remedies, without the aid of ausculation, and hence its im- 
 portance in this, as well as in many other diseases of the chest ; yet very 
 few know any thing of its advantages, in consequence of a deplorable de- 
 fect in the education of physicians. 
 
 " It may be useful for me to add to the above history of my case, that besides the most 
 perfect restoration of my health, (for such I believe to be my happy fortune, as far as I 
 can judge,) that the above remedies have been a great benefit to me in another point ot 
 view. My physician, and other gentlemen of the profession, aware of the great dan- 
 ger hanging over me, advised me to change my location for a more southerly one, as 
 affording the only hope, not of a restoration of my health, but of prolonging my feeble 
 existence ; and beyond all doubt it was the best prescription in their power to make. 
 Now, I do candidly believe, that my case was incurable under the common mode of 
 practice, and that the most judicious practice known to the profession was pursued by 
 him to whom I submitted my case. According to the above advice, I determined to 
 remove to the south, and had commenced preparation by selling off a part of my pro- 
 perty, when I was, by the kindness of a friend, (a physician, too,) directed to Dr. Sher- 
 wood and his remedies — for which I consider myself under eternal obHgation to the 
 Merciful Disposer of all good. 
 
 •' I do believe that every case of incipient tubercular consumption may be radically 
 cured by a use of the above remedies ; and I feel it my duty to submit my case, with 
 these few remarks, to the public, from the fact that thousands are carried to an untimely 
 
139 
 
 grave, in spite of the most scientific practice of the schools — that would, !n my opin. 
 ion, have been, with all certainty, saved by a use of the electro magnetic remedies. 
 
 B. S. LAWSON, M. D 
 
 From the Cincinnati Whig. 
 
 Doctor Sherwood's Magnetic Remedies. 
 The following correspondence has been handed to us for publication, in the beliel 
 that it will interest as well as benefit the community. Doctor Lawson, who testifies to 
 the value and etficacy of Dr. Sherwood's remedies, is a regular graduate of the Ohio 
 Medical College, and a physician of good standing. We have, ourself, made trial of 
 the remedies, and think we derived essential benefit from them. 
 
 For the Daily Whig. 
 
 CiNCiiVNATi, January 23, 1839. 
 Dr. Lawson. — Sir : Having been informed that you have, during the last year past, 
 prescribed in your practice Dr. Sherwood's Electro Magnetic Remedies in upwards of 
 fifty cases, all of which were chronic diskases, including scrofula, with great suc- 
 cess, I take the liberty of making the inquiry of you, whether my informant was justi- 
 fied in making such a report from your own admission of the facts. 
 
 If you confirm this report, I should consider it a duty we owe to the cause of hu- 
 manity to give it publicity as much as possible, and if false, we should disabuse the pub- 
 lic mind of the imposition. 
 
 Dr. S. also challenges investigation as to the electro galvanic symptoms. Please in- 
 form me if you, in your practice, detect diseases by his method of examination. 
 
 Respectfully, 
 
 B. W. 
 
 Dear Sir: Your communication of the 23d instant was duly received, and an an- 
 swer should more promptly have been given but for the want of a leisure hour, and a 
 doubt resting on my mind in regard to the propriety of noticing anonj'mous letters. 
 
 Nothing, now, so much influences mc to accede to your wish as a conviction of the 
 importance of the facts which you wish to elicit from me, and thereby to diffuse them 
 more generally through society. 
 
 I have a perfect detestation of every thing that has been presented to the world in 
 the form of what has been generally denominated " quack medicines," and on this ac- 
 count I have always felt a delicacy in appending my name, or giving my influence to 
 any thing which may justly be " dubbed" with such an appellation. 
 
 In the case of Sherwood's remedies, I am somewhat relieved from this difficulty, 
 from two considerations: first, from the stubborn fact that, in my own person, I derived 
 the most decided beneficial effects from their use, and at a time when all other means 
 were pronounced as incompetent to a cure ; and, in the second place, from being my- 
 self pretty well acquainted with the composition of the " remedies." 
 
 These two facts will serve as an apology for me, in candidly expressing my opinion 
 ■with regard to the medicine. If I did not believe that thousands were suffering from 
 diseases, incurable under any other system of practice, and certainly curable under this, 
 I would not dare to offer one word in favor of Sherwood's remedies. From a conviction 
 of this kind, I hesitate not, for one moment, to recommend them as infinitely superior, 
 in chronic diseases, to any other course at present known to the medical profession. 
 
 I did use upwards of fi.ffy boxes during the last year, and generally with success. I 
 am, however, of the opinion, that in advanced stages of pulmonary consumption, they 
 
140 
 
 are not so effectual as one would be led to suppose from reading Dr. Sherwood's pam- 
 phlet. 
 
 In almost every other form of scrofula, they have surpassed my most sanguine expec- 
 tations. There are many citizens of Cincinnati who will certify to cures, in certain 
 cases of long standing, which were not benefitted from any course which had been pur- 
 sued, (and in these cases you know every thing is tried that is heard of,) and their cer- 
 tificates will be of sufficient variety, too, to prove all that is claimed for them, even by 
 Dr. S. himself, with the single exception which I have made above. 
 
 I do not wish to be understood to convey the idea that they are infallible ; that is not 
 my meaning, nor impression, concerning anj- thing on this earth ; but I do believe them 
 to be as effectual in curingchronic diseases as ordinary remedies are in curing the ordi- 
 nary diseases of our climate. 1 must be understood to have in view, in such a declara- 
 tion as this, the exception which was made, and again referred to. 
 
 With regard to the sjTnptoms, I believe that they cannot be gainsayed. I can detect, 
 with the greatest certainty, the diseases called by Dr. Sherwood scrofula, without any 
 previous knowledge of the patient, or of the history of his disease ; and this I do mere 
 ly by an examination of the cervical glands and spinal column. 
 
 The ordinary course of feeling the pulse, looking at the tongue, and asking a hundred 
 questions, more or less, is both useless, and a waste of time. 1 do not think that one 
 skilled in this mode of examination can be deceived once in a hundred cases. In my 
 practice, I pursue this mode of examination exclusively, with a great saving of time, 
 and a much more satisfactory result. This is as much as I deem it now necessary to 
 communicate. 
 
 Yours, &c. 
 
 To B. W B. S. LAWSON 
 
 I had no knowledge of the above communication of Dr. Lawson, until 
 two or three months after its publication ; and as there are now many 
 physicians, both in this city and in the different States of the Union, who 
 are practising the new symptoms and prescribing the magnetic remedies, 
 I have introduced it here to show the opinion entertained of them by 
 other physicians, who have tested the certainty of the one, and the effi- 
 cacy of the other. 
 
 In the advanced stages of consumption mentioned, we have constantly 
 stated the uncertainty of the results, and urged the necessity of com- 
 mencing their use in the first stage of the disease, when cases like that 
 of Dr. Lawson are uniformly cured by them ; and as the disease can 
 now be easily distinguished, in the first stage as well as the last, there is 
 now no longer any excuse for delaying their use until the patient is in 
 the last stage, when the result must necessarily be uncertain. 
 
 In regard to the Doctor's allusion to secresy I would remark, that in 
 the course I have pursued to defray the expense of the investigation and 
 cure of this class of diseases, through a long series of years, physicians 
 have no just cause of complaint : for I tell them what the remedies are ; 
 explain the principles of their action, and give them the evidence of their 
 eflBcacy . 
 
 There is, however, a cause constantly operating to prevent many phy- 
 
141 
 
 sicians from prescribing them in their practice, and that is a self-interest, 
 which, with them, is paramount to every other ; for they constantly pre- 
 fer making up a bill against a patient of from fifty to five hundred dol- 
 lars, with the old empirical and useless remedies, to a fee of as many 
 cents for a bare prescription ; and the tenacity with which they hang on 
 to the valuable cases is truly astonishing to the uninitiated, as they uni- 
 formly prefer to see them sink into their graves, than saved from it by 
 another physician. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE STOMACH AND LIVER. 
 
 Dyspepsia and chronic disease of the liver. 
 
 Mr. J. B., of the city of New York, aged 28 years, called to consult 
 me in August, 1S37. He had dyspepsia and chronic disease of the liver, 
 with which he had been affected about two years and a half. He had a 
 sallow countenance, and was much emaciated. 
 
 Prescribed magnetic remedies. His health speedily began to improve , 
 the sallowness of his countenance disappeared ; and in about four months 
 his health was fully restored, aud has continued good to this time. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE STOMACH, HEART, AND EYES. 
 
 Dyspepsia, enlargement of the hearty and scrofulous sore eyes. 
 
 Mr. H. B. C, of the city of New York, aged 25 years, called to con- 
 sult me in May, 1837. He had been out of health about ten years, 
 was much emaciated, and was suffering severely with dyspepsia, hyper- 
 trophy of the heart, and scrofulous sore eyes. 
 
 The disease of the stomach commenced, in 1828, with the usual symp- 
 toms of dyspepsia, which had continued with varying sererity. In 1831, 
 he began to feel a hard beating of the heart, and, in 1834, the disease com- 
 menced in both eyes. He had consulted and been under the care of a 
 number of distinguished physicians, without having received any material 
 benefit. Prescribed magnetic remedies. His health commenced improv- 
 ing immediately, and in about six months was entirely restored, and con- 
 tinues good to this time. 
 
 New York, June 12, 1840. 
 
 I have read the above concise history of my case, and am pleased to 
 have an opportunity to add my testimony to the value of the above-men- 
 tioned remedies, for I had given up all hopes of being cured long before 
 I was induced to try them. 
 
 H. B. CowLEs, 198 Broadway. 
 10 
 
142 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE EYES. 
 
 Scrofulous sore eyes. 
 
 Miss M. Wilkinson, of Syracuse, N. Y., aged 3 years. She had scro- 
 fulous sore eyes, with ulcers of the cornea. The disease commenced in 
 1836, when she was about a year and a half old. It gradually grew worse, 
 and she became blind in about eight months from the time it commenced, 
 and continued so until the spring of 1838, when she commenced the use 
 of the magnetic remedies. In two weeks after she began to see, and in 
 three weeks could see very well, when the shade she had worn a year 
 and a half was removed from her eyes. I saw her in .July of the same 
 year, when her eyes were entirely well, and she enjoying fine health. 
 
 Her father is wealthy, w-ell educated, and intelligent, and obtained the 
 attendance and advice of the best physicians in the case ; but the disease 
 continued to make progress until it was arrested by these remedies. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE ANTRUM, NOSE, STOMACH, UTERUS, AND CEREBRUM 
 
 Disease of the antrum^ nose., dyspepsia., and leucorhcea- 
 
 Mrs. J. C , of S , Hamilton county, Ohio, light complexion, 
 
 middling stature and habit, aged 34 years. Called to see her, March 6th, 
 1833. She has severe pain in the cavity under the cheek bone, from 
 which tuberculous matter issues into the left nostril, and the septum (di- 
 vision) of the nose is perforated at a point opposite to the place where 
 the matter issues, and is also with the nose painful, and a little tumefied. 
 The disease commenced with pain in the antrum, more than two years 
 since, and after it had continued a few w^eeks, began to discharge a thin 
 and sometimes bloody matter, which gave her much relief for a few weeks, 
 when the discharge ceased, and the pain returned with its accustomed 
 violence, and has pursued the same course to this time. 
 
 The pain, after the discharge ceases, is spasmodic, and a few months 
 since extended to the left and front portion of the brain, and about two 
 weeks since commenced in the scalp. 
 
 Having no time to spare for further inquiry, I commenced the exami- 
 nation of the spine ; and first, with the first cervical vertebrae, and pres- 
 sed hard with the fingers on a number of small tubercles on the left side, 
 which produced severe pain, and which darted with such violence into 
 the head, scalp, and antrum, as to prevent her from allowing me on any 
 account to repeat the pressure ; and I passed to the dorsal vertebrae, 
 pressure on the third and fourth produced pain, which darted into the 
 
143 
 
 stomach ; and pressure on the second, third, and fourth lumbar vertebrae, 
 produced pain, which darted into the uterus. 
 
 I now described to her symptoms of dyspepsia and leucorrhoea, which 
 had been affecting her more than a year. Note D. 
 
 The pain in her head is confined entirely to the front and left portion, 
 and never passes the longitudinal sinus. A number of physicians and 
 steam doctors have attended and prescribed for her, during a period of 
 more than two years, but the disease continued to get worse. 
 
 Diagnosis. Tubercula of the left antrum, nose, left and front portion 
 of cerebrum, left side of the scalp, and of the stomach and uterus. 
 
 Prescribed magnetic pills and plaster. Her health soon began to im- 
 prove ; and in seven weeks the antrum and nose were healed, and her 
 health in all respects restored, and she had gained nearly her usual flesh 
 and strength. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF STOMACH AND UTERUS. 
 
 Dyspepsia and Leucorrhoea. 
 
 Miss M. D , of dark complexion, and naturally full habit, called 
 
 on me May 28, 1833, with the usual symptoms of dyspepsia and leu- 
 corrhoea. The disease commenced about a year ago with leucorrhoea, 
 and it soon extended to the stomach ; she has no vomitings, but distress, 
 and sometimes pain in the stomach, and at others in the right or left side 
 of the lower part of the chest, or between the shoulders, with palpita- 
 tions, and accompanied more or less with pain or weakness in the small 
 of the back. She says she has lost considerable flesh, and is feeble and 
 unable to labor, as an attempt to do so, or to walk up a hill, or up stairs, 
 produces or increases the palpitations, when she feels faint, and is soon 
 out of breath. 
 
 Pressure on the 2d, 3d, and 4th dorsal vertebrce, produces pain, which 
 darts into the stomach; and pressure on the 3d, 4th, and 5th lumbar ver- 
 tebrae, produces pain, which darts violently into the region of the uterus. 
 
 Diagnosis. Tubercula of the stomach and uterus. Prescribed mag- 
 netic pills and plaster. Her health soon began to improve, and in six 
 weeks was fully restored. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE INTESTINES AND MESENTERY. 
 
 Tabes Mesenterica and Diarrhoea. 
 
 Master M. G. M., of Cincinnati, aged three years. I called to see 
 him, August 25th, 1834. He has an enlargement of the abdomen and 
 diarrhoea. 
 
144 
 
 The disease commenced when he was three or four weeks old, and has 
 continued to this time. His limbs are very slender, and his muscles soft 
 and flaccid, and his joints appear very large proportioned to the size of 
 his limbs. He has five or six tubercles on each side of his neck, some 
 of them very large. Two or three physicians have attended and pre- 
 scribed for him at different times without any apparent benefit. 
 
 Biagnosls. Chronic tubercula of the intestines and mesentery. Pre- 
 scribed magnetic pills and plaster. 
 
 The diarrhose disappeared in a few days, and the enlargement of the 
 ahdomen, with the tubercles, began gradually to subside, and in seven or 
 eight weeks they disappeared, and he had gained considerable flesh and 
 strength, and had no appearance of disease, and his health continues good. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE LIVER AND STOMACH. 
 
 Mr. W. H., merchant, of Louisville, Ky., aged 29 years, came up to 
 me, April — , 1836, and informed me that he had been out of health a 
 number of years ; Avhen I told him, as I generally do patients with 
 chronic diseases, that it was all I wanted to hear about his case, as I 
 would try to ascertain myself what his disease was, and where it was 
 affecting him. He was pale, and on his removing his coat and vest, 
 saw he was much emaciated. Pressure along the cervical vertebrae did 
 not hurt him, but moderate pressure on the 2d dorsal produced severe 
 pain, which darted into the stomach with such violence, as to produce 
 excessive faintness for nearly half an hour. Pressure on the right side 
 of the 7th and 8th, and 8th and 9th dorsal, produced severe pain, which 
 darted into the liver. Pressure on the other vertebrae, below these, pro- 
 duced no pain or effect whatever. 
 
 Diagnosis. Tubercula of the liver and stomach. The disease, Mr. 
 H. now informed me, commenced in the liver about five years ago, and 
 about three years since extended to the stomach. He has consulted a 
 number of physicians, east and west of the mountains, and has taken a 
 great variety of remedies recommended by them, besides a great variety 
 of nostrums, including Swaim's Panacea, but has been gradually growing 
 worse, and so much so, that during the last year, he has not been able to 
 take any food upon his stomach, excepting dry toast, without butter, and 
 cocoa. 
 
 Prescribed, magnetic pills and plaster, and told him, as I commonly 
 do, that he must commence getting well immediately, and that in about 
 three days his stomach would bear, and that he must commence eating 
 any kind of food that his appetite craved, and that in one week he might 
 eat as much as it craved ; and that in ten or twelve weeks, his health, 
 
145 
 
 flesh, and strength would be re-established. I did not see Mr. H. again 
 until November 6th, when I found him enjoying fine health. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE LIVER AND EYES. 
 
 Mr. J. H. Esq., of L., Ohio, aged 34 years, called for advice, May 12, 
 1835. Cn examining the spine, I commenced between the first joint of 
 the neck and scull, and pressed in the spaces between the joints below, 
 one after another, and it produced no pain until I had descended to the 
 space on the right side, between the 7th and 8th dorsal, when pressure 
 between these, and between the Sth and 9th produced pain, which on every 
 repetition of the pressure, darted into the liver. Pressure along the joints 
 below these, produced no pain or efiect whatever. On inquiring into 
 the history of this case, I found the disease commenced in the liver, 
 about six years ago, and has terminated in abscess, and broke and dis- 
 charged through the intestines, four different times during this period. 
 He is now feeble, and just recovering from the formation and discharge 
 of the last one, which had reduced him nearly to death, and from Avhich 
 he and his physicians had but little hope of his recovery. 
 
 Mr. H. brought with him his son, aged three years, with hereditary 
 scrofulous sore eyes. The eye-lids of both eyes are very much swollen 
 and inflamed, and the inflammation extended over both eye-balls which 
 had two ulcers of the cornea. The light was so painful to the eyes, as 
 to render it necessary for him to hold a handkerchief almost constantly 
 over them. The ganglia, or line of glands on both sides of his neck, 
 with the submaxillary under the jaws, were very much enlarged and 
 painful under pressure. The disease commenced more than two years 
 since, and he has, since that time, been subjected to thorough courses of 
 treatment, with the most popular remedies, without any apparent benefit 
 
 The magnetic remedies were prescribed, and were efiectual remedies 
 in both of these cases. 
 
 The following correspondence on .the subject of the efficacy of my 
 remedies in chronic diseases, (of which I had no knowledge at the time 
 it took place) has been handed to me for publication. 
 
 • <. 
 
 Louisville, July 12, 1838. 
 Mr. W. Foulke, 
 
 Sir : Your favor of the 25th ult. was received and handed to Mr. Wm. Hanna, of 
 
 this city, who said he would most cheerfully make a statement of the effect of Dr. 
 
 Sherwood's medicine in his case, if by doing so he could relieve one person from a 
 
 disease under which he had suffered so much. His statement is on the preceding page, 
 
 and is but one out of many cases that have come under my >^.>6ervation, with a similar 
 
 reault. Very respectfully, 
 
 DAVID HOBBS. 
 
146 
 
 Louisville, July, 1838. 
 Mr. W. Fouike, 
 
 Dear Sir: Mr. Hobbs having placed in my hand a letter from you, asking the 
 opinion of persons in th).« city who have used Dr. Sherwood's pills and plaster, as also 
 a statement of their individual C3se, I, as one of them, beg leave to state that about 
 seven years since I was afflicted with what was called dyspepsia— my affliction con- 
 sisted in almost constant pain in the bowels, stomach, side, back and head, the f -rmer 
 so much so, that after eating, it was excruciating. For the first three years, I was under 
 the treatment of the most eminent physicians in Baltimore, Philadelphia, and this 
 city, without the least relief, and by all of them pronounced incurable. 1 then resorted 
 to all the nostrums to be had, but with similar result. 
 
 On my return from the east, in the Spring of 1836, I was induced by my friend Mr. 
 Hobbs, (who offered to accompany me) to visit Dr. Sherwood, at Hamilton, Ohio, who, 
 on our arrival, proceeded to e.xamine me, (according to the manner directed in several 
 pamphlets since published) but my case was so bad, that he considered the operation 
 might prove fatal if he continued; and consequently he felt doubtful of effecting the 
 cure of so bad a subject. I, however, determined wliilst there was a hope, to continue 
 every medicine that offered, and at once commenced with the pills and plaster, which, 
 after the third day, gave me great relief ; and before I had finished two boxes became 
 as well, and have continued so as I ever was during my life. I had lived for two years 
 entirely on bread and tea. I was the first in this city that ever took the pills ; but from 
 the knowledge of my situation and cure, hundreds of others have since been relieved. 
 For a more particular statement of my case I refer you to Dr. Sherwood's pamphlet, 
 page — 
 
 Respectfully, dear sir, your obedient servant, 
 
 WILLIAM HANNA 
 
 Cincinnati, July 9th, 1838. 
 
 Mr. "W. Fouike, 
 
 Dear Sir : Your letter of the 25th June reached me in due course of mail, and 
 in answer I can only say in regard to Sherwood's electro-magnetic remedies, or pills 
 and plaster, that my youngest daughter was severely afflicted with scrofula, and for 
 several months I availed myself of the best medical skill our city afforded, and all 
 without success. Indeed, the disease continued to increase, and the eruption extended 
 from her body into her face, nose, ears, and eyes, until we were obliged to keep her con- 
 fined to a dark room, and almost despaired of her restoration. In this situation I was 
 induced to make the experiment, and try the pills and plaster, the result of which was, 
 in a few weeks, my child began to improve, and continued to improve until she was 
 entirely restored, leaving nothing but some of the scars caused by the disease. She m 
 now in fine health, and no indication of scrofula, and I have no doubt it is an effectual 
 remedy for that distressing disease. 
 
 In regard to the application of it to myself I cannot speak in so strong terms. For 
 several months I have had a severe cough, and my lungs considerably affected. I tried 
 this medicine only so far as to take one box of the pills. I also travelled into the coun- 
 try, and my health is much improved, but the travel, exercise, and change of air was, 
 doubtless, of great service to me ; and in my own case, I know not how far I ought to 
 attribute efficacy to the medicine. I shall be in your city some weeks— expect to reach 
 there about 25th inst.— and if you should wish to see me, by calling on Mr. G. W. 
 Richards, merchant, on Front street, he can inform you where I will be found. 
 
 Respectfully, yours, 
 
 WILLIAM McLEAN 
 
147 
 
 Cincinnati, July 2, 1838. 
 Mr. W. Foulke, 
 
 Dear Sir : Your favor of the 25th is at hand. Agreeable to your request, I give a 
 short history of my wife's case, and the result. 
 
 She had been afflicted for 8 years, and had become a confirmed dyspeptic — so much 
 so, that she had not eaten a meal of victuals for 2 years, of any kind, without distressing 
 her, and was seldom able to go out much. At this stage of the disease, and after 
 exhausting all resources of medical skill, (I had concluded that travelling for her health 
 was the only chance for her recovery). She earnestly solicited me to procure her a 
 box of Sherwood's pills and plaster. I endeavored to persuade her, that they were 
 like all other similar medicines, having no faith in them myself But still she could not 
 be persuaded to abandon the idea of trying them, as she had heard of several of her 
 friends who had received benefit from them. After some month's delay, 1 purchased 
 a box of them merely to gratify her. But, contrary to my expectations, she soon began 
 to improve, and in 6 or 8 weeks could partake of any kind of food with the rest of the 
 family, and from that time to this (IS months) has been free from any appearance of a 
 return of the disease. She has used about two boxes. 
 
 Yours, Respectfully, 
 
 E. WHIPPLE 
 
 Cincinnati, July 3, 183S. 
 Mr. W. Foulke, 
 
 Dear Sir : In a line received this day, you request me to give you the history ot 
 my wife's case, in connexion with the application and effect of Sherwood's electro- 
 magnetic remedies. I take pleasure in answering your inquiries, so far as my limited 
 knowledge of the progress of disease and the effect of medicine will permit. 
 
 My wife is 19 years of age, of a very frail and delicate constitution. Prior to, or 
 about the first of January last, she had enjoyed good health. About that time (perhaps 
 a little before) she commenced declining, indigestion, and want of appetite, together 
 ■with extreme weakness, indicated the approach of more serious disease. A few weeks 
 passed, and she commenced coughing — her cough was of a dry, husky character, at 
 first unaccompanied with expectoration. I was under "serious apprehension that the 
 consumption which had cut down, prematurely, her father and mother, and many other 
 members of the family, had marked her for its victim, and commenced its work. At 
 first, I resorted to some of the celebrated remedies for diseases of this kind (among 
 which were the " Watasia," and the " Vegetable Pulmonary Balsam)," but all to no 
 purpose. 
 
 Her cough increased daily, attended with profuse expectoration, and she was rapidly 
 wasting away. 
 
 About six weeks after her cough commenced, I was induced to try Sherwood's reme- 
 dies, confident that the ordinary practice of the physicians would only facilitate her 
 departure, at the same time, doubting the eihcacy of these remedies. 
 
 The day after she had taken the first pill, she had an unusual appetite for food, and I 
 thought her cough during the night had not been so constant or severe. In three or 
 four days, her cough and expectoration ceased, (the blue pill was abandoned) the tone 
 of her stomach was restored, her strength increased, and she could partake of the 
 strongest diet, without injury or inconvenience. From that time to the present, her 
 health (with the exception of occasional colds) has been good. 
 
 She has taken a part of two boxes. Whether the relief which they have afforded is 
 temporary or not, time only can determine. I feel thankful to the Giver of all good, 
 that I was directed to the use of these remedies. 
 
148 
 
 From this, and some other cases which have come within my own observation, I have 
 no hesitation in recommending them to all who may be afflicted with scrofulous diseases, 
 by whatever name they may be called. 
 I would, at least, say, try them. 
 
 Tout's, &c., 
 
 SAMUEL F. GARY, 
 
 Mr. Foulke, to whom the above letters were addressed, resides in 
 Philadelphia — had been out of health many years, and a long time un- 
 der the treatment of the elite of our art in that city, when he commenced 
 the above correspondence (as I am informed) to ascertain what would 
 probably be the effect of the remedies in his case. I am also informed 
 that yiv. Foulke used the remedies, and that their effect in his case, fully 
 justified the character given them by his correspondents. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE UTERUS, LIVER, STOMACH, TONSILS, PALATE, AND 
 
 CEREBELLUM. 
 
 :Mrs. T. S , of F., Butler Co., Ohio, aged 31 years. She came 
 
 to see me, August 14, 1S36, and said she had been out of health about 
 5 years. The examination in her case was commenced as usual, by an 
 examination of the spine, and first, of the first cervical vertebrae. 
 
 Pressure on a small tubercle of the right side of it produced severe 
 pain, which darted into the right side of the throat, and right side of the 
 head. Pressure on the left side of it produced pain which darted into 
 the left side of her throat. Pressure on the sides of the second joint 
 also produced pain, which darted into the upper and front part of the 
 neck. Pressure on the second, third, fourth and fifth dorsal, produced 
 severe pain, which darted into the stomach. Pressure on the right side 
 of the seventh, eighth and ninth, produced severe pain also, which darted 
 into the region of the liver. Pressure on the third and fourth lumbar 
 was painful. Pressure on the other cervical, dorsal and lumber vertebrae, 
 produced no pain or effect whatever. 
 
 I now examined the line of glands along the neck, and under the jaws, 
 and found them very much enlarged, and told her that her tonsils and 
 palate were enlarged, and that she had dyspepsia, chronic inflammation 
 of the liver, and leucorrhoea, besides swellings of some of her limbs. 
 
 She said that was right, and that the disease originated in the uterus 
 five years before, and about a year after, it commenced in her liver, and 
 in a few months after that, in her stomach ; and that it was now nearly 
 three months since her ankles and legs began to swell. It is now a year 
 since her catamenia disappeared, and they have not since returned. On 
 
14^ 
 
 examiuing her throat, I found the tonsils and palate very nauch enlarged, 
 and the tongue one-third larger than natural. The tonsils were very 
 sensible to pressure, and had, with the palate and rest of the throat, a 
 dark red colour, and during the last few weeks the act of deglutition, or 
 of swallowing solid food, had been difficult and painful. She had had 
 more or less pain in the right side of her head with dizziness, during 
 the last few months. She was also very pale, feeble and emaciated. A 
 number of physicians have attended her one after another, for a long 
 time, but the disease continued to make progress, and after years of 
 suffering, which can only be appreciated by persons of her sex, she was 
 in the last part of the last stage of disease, and death, under the common 
 treatment, would soon have closed the scene. Prescribed, pills and 
 plaster. One plaster to be applied over the first, second, and third joints of 
 the neck and of a length sufficient to extend from ear to ear. One 5 inches 
 wide and 16 inches long, to extend from the 6th joint of the neck, to the 
 10th dorsal ; and another over all the lumbar vertebrae, and also to use the 
 pills according to the directions in the pamphlet. 
 
 I told her, as I commonly do, that she must commence getting well 
 immediately, and that in from three days to a week, she would notice it 
 distinctly, and would in that time be able to eat any kind of food, with a 
 good appetite, and without any disturbance of the stomach ; and that in 
 from eight to ten weeks she would be entirely well. 
 
 I never saw or heard of this patient, or her husband, before she called 
 on me at the above date, and never saw or heard of her ajain until 
 October 24, when in passing near her residence, I called to see her. 
 Her husband, on my inquiring after her health, before I went into the 
 house, told me, he "believed she was about well." On making the 
 same inquiry of her, she told me she "believed she was entirely well ;" 
 and on my asking her if there was no mistake about it, she told me : 
 " no, she thought there could be none," and asked me to " observe the 
 difference in the colour of her skin, and the flesh she had gained ;" and 
 then presented to me one arm, to see how hard or solid the flesh was. 
 She also observed, " that her catamenia had returned, and that she had 
 been twice, since she saw me, as regular in that way, as she ever was ;" 
 and besides, " that she commenced work as usual "v^hen she was v,-ell, 
 bout two weeks since, and had in that time done a great deal of work, 
 which did not appear to injure her." 
 
 I told her that it all looked very fair, but that the change appeared so 
 very great in so short a time, that I would like to examine her lack, 
 and see if there was no mistake about it. She told me I might as much 
 as I had a mind to, for she " thought it was perfectly sound." I accord- 
 ingly examined it in the usual way, and found she was right. 
 
 It will be observed that in describins; the cases, and the effects of these 
 11 
 
150 
 
 remedies, I have generally been very brief, but have said more of this 
 case in consequence of its great importance to females ; for the disease 
 generally commences in them at an adult age, in the uterus, as it did in 
 this case, and then, after a few months or years, is extended to other 
 organs and limbs. 
 
 The above case is not an uncommon one, for the day previous to the 
 one on which I prescribed for this case, I was called to prescribe for 
 another. 
 
 Mrs. W. F., of the town of R., aged 21 years, affected in all respects 
 as in the above case, except that the tonsils and tubercles in the up- 
 per part of the neck were much larger. After, however, the common 
 remedies had entirely failed in her case, she was induced to try the 
 effects of travelling, and visited some of the principal eastern cities — got 
 the advice of some of the physicians of those cities, and on her return, 
 her husband came to me, and told me ,that " he wanted me to call and 
 see her, as he had become satisfied that she must die, unless I could save 
 her." I accordingly visited her, and commenced and went through 
 with the examination of the spine in the same way, as in the case of 
 Mrs S., and then described to her the disease in the different organs and 
 limbs, and prescribed the same remedies. I then, as in the case of 
 Mrs. S., told her she must commence getting well immediately, and the 
 cure would continue steadily, unless it was retarded by colds, and that 
 she must be well in ten or twelve weeks. 
 
 She did accordingly begin to get well as I had told her. I called once 
 in two or three weeks to see her progress, and the last time, the day 
 after I called on Mrs. S., and found her situation, in all respects like 
 Mrs. S — 's, except that her tonsils and the tubercles under the jaws, 
 although greatly reduced, had not entirely disappeared — and she was 
 directed to continue the use of the remedies. Dec. 4. The tubercles, 
 I have learnt from her mother, have disappeared, and her health is 
 entirely restored. 
 
 Mrs. A. H., of Louisville, Ky., aged 21 years. She, like the above 
 cases, had the disease affecting the liver, stomach, and uterus, and a few 
 months since, her throat. She, like Mrs. W. F., after the use of a great 
 variety of remedies, recommended by her physicians, went to one of the 
 eastern cities. She, however, returned a few months after, and gradually 
 growing worse, was in a few weeks confined to her bed. The disease 
 continued to make progress, and in a few weeks more a number of phy- 
 sicians were called in consultation, but her symptoms continued to grow 
 worse. 
 
151 
 
 Magnetic pills aud plaster were now prescribed. She began to get 
 well immediately after, and in a few days was able to sit up and walk 
 her room, and in two weeks was promenading the streets. It is now 
 ^Nov. 8th, lS36,j only five weeks since she commenced the use of these 
 remedies, aud although the usual time has not elapsed to perfect a cure, 
 she has gained so much flesh and strength, as to make her appear to a 
 stranger, as well, and in as good spirits, as any other person. Yet she 
 is rather thin or slender, and has not regained her natural fleshiness, and 
 pressure on the 1st and 2d cervical, 2d, 3d, 4th, and 5th, and 7th, Sth, 
 and 9th dorsal, and 3d and 4th lumbar vertebrse, produced pain. Con- 
 tinued the remedies. 
 
 December 16th. Her face has now the full and rounded form, and she 
 has fully regained her natural flesh. On applying pressure now, on cash 
 of the vertebrae, along the whole line of the spinal column, it produced 
 no pain or effect whatever. Her health is now in all respects fully re- 
 established, and I directed the remedies to be discontinued. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE STOMACH. 
 
 Dyspepsia. 
 The following scrap was cut from the Cincinnati Whig : — 
 
 Gentlemen : I noticed some time since, a communication, published in the 
 Cincinnati Whig, signed by Dr. Lawson, in which he speaks with great confidence 
 and certainty, of the good effects of " Sherwood's Remedies," as prescribed by him 
 in his practice, in the cure of various forms of scrofula. 
 
 It gives me pleasure to add my own conviction of their efficacy in the cure of dys- 
 pepsia. For many years, this disease had preyed upon my constitution, and in the 
 summer of 1836, and winter of 1837, my digestive organs had become so much im- 
 paired, that almost every kind of food, taken as nourishment, created the most intense 
 suffering. My flesh had wasted away, and my whole system had become so much 
 debilitated, as scarcely to give me strength sufficient to leave my room. I had become 
 discouraged, and despaired of ever again regaining my health, and looked upon death 
 as the only sure relief of my sufferings. Many of my friends and acquaintances, with 
 the knowledge that my disease seemed to baffle the skill of several eminent physicians, 
 had despaired of my recovery, and had made up their minds that I must soon be num- 
 bered among the dead. 
 
 At this stage of the disease, I was advised by some one to make trial of " Sher- 
 wood's electro-magnetic remedies." As a last resort, I was willing to lay hold of any 
 thing that would relieve me, and lost no time in procuring a box, and commenced 
 their use. In the course of a few weeks, I found my strength gradually to increx.«e, 
 and my food (such as my appetite craved) no longer gave me distress. My former 
 
152 
 
 flow of spirits again returned, my slumbers became sound, and undisturbed by horria 
 dreams, and my constitution, in a short time, became restored to its former tlesh, 
 health, and vigor. It is now more than two years (1839) since I recovered my health, 
 and have withheld giving publicity tomy case, until I could, without the fear of contra- 
 diction, speak of the permanency of the cure. I would advise, especially, all dys- 
 peptics to lose no time in procuring these remedies, and to give them a fair trial. I 
 am very confident they will not have cause to regret having done so If any person, 
 afflicted with this disease, should wish for further information than herein given, if 
 they will call on me, or address me by letter, post paid, if in my power, I will cheer- 
 fully give it. I have no interest, directly or indirectly, in the sale of the medicine. 
 
 Your's, respectfully, 
 Cincinnati, June 5, 1839. C. TOBEY. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE TONSILS, PALATE AND TONGUE. 
 
 Master W. W., of Union, Butler Co., Ohio, light complexion, aged 
 17 years, called for advice, Nov. 25, 1835, and said he had been out of 
 health some time. I now, without any enquiries, commenced an exami- 
 nation of the spine, between the first cervical vertebrae and skull, when 
 he observed that it hurt him, and the pain darted into his tongue. I 
 then pressed on the left side, in the space between the first and second 
 vertebrae; when he observed again that it hurt him, and the pain darted 
 into his throat. Pressure along the other joints of the neck and back, 
 produced no pain or effect whatever. 
 
 I now told him that his tongue and tonsils were swelled, and that he 
 had a cough and expectoration ; and in looking into his mouth, found 
 both tonsils (almonds of the ear) much enlarged, and in a state of 
 ulceration, — the uvula [palate] much enlarged and elongated, and the 
 tongue twice its natural thickness. On examining the submaxillary and 
 cervical ganglia of glands under the jaws, and in the sides of the neck, 
 they were found much enlarged. He is pale, and the emaciation is 
 making progress. The disease commenced more than a year since, and 
 he has been coughing and expectorating matter, more or less, during the 
 last eight or nine months. 
 
 Prescribed, the magnetic remedies. The swelling of the throat and 
 tongue soon began to subside, and in about six weeks the ulcers were 
 healed, and his health was entirely restored in about five months from 
 the time he commenced the use of the remedies. 
 
 The above was a very bad case of a disease to which clergymen are 
 very subject, and which would have terminated fatally without the use 
 of these remedies. I have prescribed them in many cases of this affec- 
 tion during the last three years, nine of which were those of clergymen. 
 
153 
 
 Five of these are cured. Two were induced to stop the use of these 
 remedies after two or three weeks, and substitute others, one of whoi^ 
 is dead. The other is, or was, travelling for his health, the last I hean 
 of him. Two very bad cases are now under treatment, and are both 
 very nearly well.* 
 
 TUBEBCULA OF THE TONGUE, RIGHT TONSIL, RIGHT LEG, AND BIGHT 
 
 SIDE OF THE NECK. 
 
 Mr. G. A. F , merchant, of Cleveland, Ohio, light complexion 
 
 and slender frame, aged 34. His tongue began to swell, and to be sore 
 and stiff or clumsy, in February, 1833 ; and in April following, his right 
 leg began to swell. The swelling and soreness of the tongue continued 
 to increase until the middle of May, when the leg had become very pain- 
 ful, and began to discharge tuberculous matter. 
 
 The swelling and soreness of the tongue began now to subside, and in 
 a few days disappeared. The leg continued to grow worse, and confined 
 him to the house much of the time for nearly four months ; but after the 
 use of a variety of applications, it healed about the first of December, of 
 the same year, when he discovered a tubercle of the size of a chesnut in 
 the centre and near the roots of the tongue, which about the last part of 
 the month began to. ulcerate, when he discovered another tubercle about 
 three fourths of an inch from it, and this soon ulcerated, and others con- 
 tinued to appear and ulcerate, until the first of May, 1834. They then 
 healed, and the swelling of the tongue became a little reduced, when the 
 4isease re-appeared in the leg, but in the back part of it, and with its 
 accustomed violence, and began to ulcerate about the 1st of July. In 
 August, the leg began to get better, when the disease increased again in 
 the tongue, and soon began again to ulcerate ; and a tubercle on the right 
 side of the neck now suppurated, and began to discharge tuberculous 
 matter. 
 
 He now went to the city of New- York for advice, where electricity 
 was prescribed, and applied in different ways for about or nearly three 
 months, during which time the ulcers of the tongue healed, and the tu- 
 bercles on the side of the neck nearly disappeared ; but on the left side 
 of the tongue remained uninfluenced by the frequent and continued ap- 
 
 • In the cases were the uvula has been a long time very much enlarged and elongatei. 
 it should be cut ofl. I generally cut off about one half of it in such cases, to remove 
 a constant source of irritation, which would otherwise greatly retard the cure The 
 operation is a vf ry simple one, and is never attended with any danger 
 
154 
 
 plication of the electric shocks. The leg also during the use of this and 
 other remedies continued to get better, and nearly healed. In two or 
 three days after he had left the city of New- York, and discontinued the 
 use of electricity, the tubercles on the side of the neck, and the one oo 
 the side of the tongue began to enlarge again, and in two or three weeks, 
 two more appeared in the tongue and his throat began now to be sore 
 and painful, and these symptoms continued to increase in violence. 
 
 On the 10th of January, 1S35, he called upon me for advice. The 
 right side of his neck was now swollen, tuberculated, and painful, and 
 this pain frequently darted into the, side of his face and head, and ther« 
 were now two large tubercles on the left side of the tongue, and one 
 about the centre of it, and one an inch from its apex, and three rising com- 
 spicuously from the right tonsil, which were very sensible to pressure, 
 and with the swollen tongue produced painful and difficult deglutition. 
 
 Near the time the ulcerations commenced in the tongue, he began to 
 feel lancinating pains in and through it, and they have continued with 
 varying severity to this time ; and all the tubercles that have appeared 
 in it from time to time have invariably ulcerated, except the last three 
 mentioned, and have left in it corrugated excavations. 
 
 There is now little or no swelling of the leg, and the tuberculous 
 abscesses are all healed except one ; but small tubercles of the size of 
 small peas are felt under the skin in the back and front part of it. 
 
 He has suffered severely from this disease, and in one or two instances 
 was reduced nearly to death, aud has consulted and employed many 
 celebrated physicians, all of whom called it mercurial disease, and pre- 
 scribed, among other things, the compound sarsaparilla syrup, and cicuta, 
 at a time when the disease was supposed to be terminating in cancer. 
 
 Diagnosis. Tubercula of the tongue, right tonsil, right side of the 
 neck and right leg. Prescribed, magnetic pills and plaster. In less 
 than one week, the tubercles in his tongue, tonsil, and neck, with the 
 swelling of his neck, were very much reduced ; and he now swallowed 
 his food with much less difficulty, and the reduction continued ; and at 
 the end of two weeks the soreness of the throat had subsided, and he 
 swallowed without difficulty ; and at the end of four weeks, the tuber- 
 cles and swellings of the tongue, tonsil, and neck disappeared, as well as 
 the tubercles in the leg ; and his health and flesh had increased so much, 
 as to make him appear in perfect health. 
 
 Death from cancer of the tongue and throat, is, of all others, the most 
 painful and most horrible, of which Mr. F. was advised, and for which 
 he had been admonished to prepare. 
 
 The lapse of four years has shown the cure a permanent one. 
 
155 
 
 CANCER OF THE LIP. 
 
 Miss M. H , of , aged 17 years. Called early in the morning 
 
 to see her, in April, 1817 ; and was requested to examine her under lip, 
 which was swollen and ulcerated, and to give my opinion of its charac- 
 ter, and after examining it and the lymphatic glands of the neck, which 
 were tuberculated on both sides, I pronounced it a case of scrofulous 
 cancer. I was then requested to say whether I " could cure it without 
 cutting it out," and readily answered in the affirmative, and was then 
 told by the female attendant, that, that was all they wanted of me, and 
 that I was at liberty to return home as soon as I pleased, and accordingly 
 bade her good morning, and returned home, perfectly in the dark, how- 
 ever, as regarded what was meant by this quixotic adventure. The 
 next day, I was called again, and informed in explanation, that a cele- 
 brated surgeon had been attending the patient about two months, and as 
 the lip continued to get worse, and had become very painful, he had 
 advised them, a few days before, of the futility of all remedies, but the 
 knife, and had set the time of ten o'clock of the day before to perform 
 the operation ; but they had dismissed him, and sent for me to perform 
 the cure without it. 
 
 She was of the middling size, light and ruddy complexion, eyes rather 
 large and prominent, and form of face approaching that of the Roman, 
 and with perfect symmetry of body and limbs, was what may be called 
 a scrofulous beauty, bating only this horrible lip. 
 
 Prescribed, magnetic pills and plaster. 
 
 In five weeks from this time the cure was perfect, and the tubercu- 
 lated glands in the neck had gradually become smaller, and soon after 
 disappeared. 
 
 This case, and the following one of the uterus, were apparently cases 
 of scrofulous cancer. I have had a few other cases of the lip of the 
 same character, and many of a similar nature, affecting the uterus, which 
 were cured with these remedies, but which have apparently little or no 
 effect on the disease in this form, when affecting any other part of the 
 body. I have imputed their effects, in the cases of the lip and uterus, 
 to the strong power of contraction which they possess, from the fact that 
 the same results are obtained in cases where strong compression can be 
 appliad at the same time as in the case given of Mrs. H., of Union, 
 Butler Co., Ohio. ' 
 
156 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE UTERUS, TERMINATING IN CANCER. 
 
 Menorrhagia terminating in Cancer. 
 
 Miss P. F , of , of full habit and light complexion, aged 22 
 
 years; called to see her. May 16, 1812. She has menorrhagia, which 
 commenced four months ago. I prescribed the usual remedies for many 
 months, during which time, as before, she had been constantly confined 
 to her bed : but all to no purpose, and it now became necessary to abandon 
 the patient or commence a new treatment. 
 
 She had from the first complained much of pain and weakness in the 
 small of her back ; which was attended with leucorrhoea. I proposed 
 now to examine her back, and applied pressure on and around the lum- 
 bar vertebrce, and this produced violent pain, which, on every repetition 
 of the pressure, darted into the uterus, and they appeared to be the same 
 darting pains we find in cancer of the breast. 
 
 I now prescribed the magnetic pills and plaster. The plaster over 
 the small of the back, or lumbar vertebrae, with injections into the 
 uterus of a strong solution of acetate of iron, by means of a catheter and 
 small pointed syringe. 
 
 Her symptoms began to improve slowly from this time, and in about 
 three months, a very thick membrane separated from the inside of the 
 uterus, and was discharged from it, rolled up — round — half an inch in 
 diameter, and two inches in length, which was presented to me in a 
 paper, and on unrolling and spreading it out on a stand, it presented two 
 tumors or bunches, of dark colored fungi near the middle or centre of it, 
 — one of which was near the size and shape of a chesnut, and the other 
 of the size of a pea, and flattened on the sides that adhered to the mem- 
 brane, and at a distance from each other of half an inch. 
 
 These fungi were on the outside of the membrane, or that next the 
 uterus, and adhered to and sunk deeply into it ; and there arose out of 
 their tops and sides small white or light colored substances of the size 
 and appearance of small threads, and firom a line to a fourth of an inch 
 in length. 
 
 On examining the other side of this membrane, small holes or chinks 
 were found opposite to these fungi. 
 
 In a few weeks after this, her health was restored. She married 
 about a jea- after, but has had no children. 
 
157 
 
 The following notice of the eflfect of my remedies, from the Rev. J. B 
 Cook, was received after this work w^as stereotyped and going through 
 the press. It was one of the cases under treatment before noticed, which 
 became so bad while practising his clerical duties in the West, (Cincin- 
 nati and Covington,) as to compel him to abandon them entirely, and re- 
 turn to his friends in the east. 
 
 From the Christian Secretary. 
 
 Hartford, Oct. 30, 1840. 
 
 Mr. Editor, — I send you a brief statement of facts relating to my recovery. This 
 is done the more cheerfully, as I feel prompted by gratitude and by a desire that others 
 similarly afflicted, may be as happily relieved. 
 
 1 had been dyspeptic for many years, was afflicted with tubercula of the palate, neck 
 and stomach ; with chronic diarrhoea and piles ; with general debility, and with chronic 
 bronchitis, which extended from the glottis to both lobes of my lungs. During the 
 last two years I have suffered so much from bronchitis that much of the time, speaking 
 even in a whisper, has been so distressing as to oblige me to converse by writing. But 
 now I am comfortably well, through the Divine blessing, on the use of Dr. Sherwood's 
 Electro Magnetic Remedies. Some of the delightful changes experienced by me are 
 the following: 
 
 From such a state of my throat and lungs that the utterance of a sentence distressed 
 me, I have been enabled to preach eleven times during the present month, and conduct 
 five other religious services. My strength and comfort have been, in the meantime, 
 gradually increasing. The deep depression of spirits which, at times, seemed death- 
 like, has given place to the animation and cheerfulness of youth. My blood, from 
 having been almost literally black and thick, has become perfect in color and consist- 
 ence. My palate, through the aid of a slight surgical operation, is reduced to its usua 
 size. The glands of my neck, which were enlarged and painful, are now entirely re- 
 duced. The pain from my neck has passed off sensibly. The mucous membrane of the 
 bronchia has been aided in its secretions. Dr. Sherwood's remedies have excelled 
 every thing I have used as an expectorant. The inflammation of my throat, and the 
 pain consequent upon it, have been allayed, and at times entirely gone. The same is 
 true of the inflammation and pain in my bowels. Relief from hunger, by eating, though 
 more immediate, is not more a matter of consciousness, than was my relief from pain, 
 by the application of these remedies. From apprehending languor, consumption, a 
 suffering life, and an early death, I have now the prospect of an active, and I hope, use- 
 ful life. 
 
 To all afflicted with bronchitis, or tubercular con.sumption, or what is called scrofula, 
 or dyspepsia, let me say that I do not believe that these diseases can long exist under 
 the action of these remedies. They are not, in my estimation, to be classed with quack 
 medicines, because, 1st, I believe them to have science for their basis. 2d. Their 
 adaptation to individual sufferers is pointed out by symptoms which none need mistake ; 
 and 3d, Dr. S. is a regularly educated physician, who, having suffered from his child- 
 hood, was led gradually to the discovery of them for his own relief. Some think it a 
 mark of wisdom to ridicule every thing new in medicine ; as if the science and practice 
 of it were stereotyped, however the Baconian philosophy repudiates the theories of 
 every age and school which come in conflict with fact. I have stated simple verities 
 In addition to my own case, I refer to B. S. Lawson, M. D., of Cincinnati, who was 
 
158 
 
 restored from confirmed consumption, after all the common remedies had entirely failed. 
 With gratitude to God for my recovery, I subscribe myself 
 
 Yours, . J. B. Cook. 
 
 P. S. — I should add that Professor Bronson gave me essential aid in recovering the 
 use of my voice. 
 
 The Bronchitis mentioned in this case was the consequence of tuber- 
 cular disease of the throat and lungs ; the reduction of which dissipated 
 the disease of the naucous membrane of the throat and bronchial tubes. 
 
 I did not see Mr. Cook until he had taken one box of my remedies, 
 when I suggested the necessity of his consulting Professor Bronson on 
 the subject of the improvement of his voice, which I am pleased to learn 
 has added another case to the Professor's long list of triumphs in his art. 
 
 The case of Mr. Cook was like that of many other clergymen who have 
 been affected in the same manner, and who have been cured with the 
 same remedies. At the time I saw him, he had the magnetic symptoms 
 of tubercular disease of the lungs in addition to the disease of the mucous 
 membrane of the throat (which •was tuberculated) and larynx, which are 
 absent in idiopathic bronchitis until the last stage of the disease, when 
 they are sometimes present in consequence of the formation of tubercles, 
 by obstructions in the lymphatic vessels, from disease of the mucous 
 membrane of the bronchia. These symptoms, when they appear in such 
 cases, are, however, slight and not at all proportioned to the intensity of 
 the disease. 
 
 In twenty-two post mortem examinations of this disease, I found tuber- 
 cles in seventeen cases in their different stages of formation and destruc- 
 tion. In some of these cases a few small tubercles only were found in 
 an immature state, while in others they had become mature, and in some 
 cases had softened down and produced one or more excavations. 
 
 These remedies have no effect whatever in idiopathic bronchitis, or 
 in any other disease in the absence of the magnetic symptoms. 
 
CHAPTER VIII 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE SPINE. 
 
 Miss E. B., of Stratford, Conn., aged twelve years. I called to sec 
 her in Dec. 1839, and on an examination found a lateral curvature of 
 the dorsal vertebra;, a portion of which extended under, and raised the 
 right shoulder blade. The right hip was also raised above the left, and 
 her health and strength much reduced. 
 
 Prescribed, the magnetic remedies. The plaster to extend the whole 
 length of the spine. The weight of her body was also directed to be 
 suspended by her arms, with any simple contrivance, as by taking hold 
 of a stick suspended from a ceiling, a few minutes, five or six times 
 a day. 
 
 I called to see her again the last part of April, 1840, when, on exami- 
 nation of the spine, it was found to have resumed its natural position, 
 and her health and strength perfectly restored. 
 
 The curvature commenced in this case about a year and a half before 
 I first saw her in December, and gradually increased to the extent above 
 mentioned. The result of th's practice in such cases, is constant and 
 uniform. In other cases, of many years continuance, little or no change 
 is produced in the curvature, for obvious reasons, by this practice or any 
 other, and the only benefit resulting from the use of these rem-edies in 
 12 
 
160 
 
 these cases is the reduction of the disease in the spine, and also of the 
 stomach, liver, or lungs, almost constantly accompanying curvature of 
 the spine. 
 
 1 frequently find such patients harnessed with cushions and splints, 
 but regarding them as worse than useless, I always remove them. 
 
 Note E. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE SPINE. 
 
 Caries of the Vertebrce and Distortion of the Spine. 
 
 Master W. H. F., of the City of New York, of light complexion, 
 aged 6 years. His parents brought him to me in Sept. 1837, with white 
 swelling and distortion of the spine from tubercular disease of the 
 eleventh and twelfth dorsal, and first lumbar vertebrae — the last dorsal 
 projecting backwards, and it was with great difficulty he could maintain 
 himself in an erect position. The disease (in which the common reme- 
 dies had been used without benefitj commenced about two years before 
 that time with pain in these vertebrae, which still continued with inter- 
 vals of abatement, during a few weeks, when it would sometimes return 
 with such violence as to produce spasmodic symptoms. 
 
 Prescribed, magnetic remedies. 
 
 His health soon began to improve, and in about six months it was 
 entirely recovered. I examined his back a number of times during the 
 summer and fall of 1838, and also on the 15th of June, 1839, and found 
 it perfectly sound and strong, and he walked as erect, and appeared as 
 well, as any boy of his age. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE SPINE AND NECK. 
 
 King'^s Evil, and White Swelling of the right side of the Spine. 
 
 Master J. M. S , of Union, Butler county, Ohio, aged seven 
 
 years. I was called to see him, August 3d, 1833. He had a white 
 swelling on the under jaw of the right side, and a number of large tuber- 
 cles on the same side of his neck, and a white swelling on the right side 
 of the lower dorsal vertebrae, (Tjack bone,) and it was now about three 
 weeks since the disease commenced. Prescribed, magnetic pills and plas- 
 ter In six weeks the white swellings disappeared, and his usual good 
 health v/as re-established. 
 
 September 23d, 1833. Prescribed for Master W. C, the brother of 
 
 Master J. M. S , aged 4 years. He had a white swelling of the 
 
 neck, and lower jaw of the right side, over tubercles on the same side of 
 
151 
 
 the neck. Prciscribed, mai2;netic pills and plaster. In five weeks the 
 swellings and tubercles had disappeared. His health continues good. 
 
 The case of J M. S , under the common treatment, like the fol- 
 lowing case of Master J. S , would have terminated in distortion of 
 
 the spine and lumbar abscess. This disease always commences with 
 white swelhng on the front or back side of the spine. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE SPINE. 
 
 DistOTtion of the Spine, Lumbar Abscess, White Swelling, S^c 
 
 Master J. S , of Sycamore, Hamilton county, Ohio, aged twelve 
 
 years. 1 was called to see him October 24th, 18-32. He has tubercles 
 of different sizes, on both sides of his neck, and it is now six years since 
 they first appeared, and his health began to decline ; and he had now a 
 distortion of the spine (back bonej ninth dorsal vertebrae, which formed 
 an obtuse angle backward ; and the lumbar vertebrae, (joints of the back 
 bone belonging to the small of the back,) from this point to the os-coccyx, 
 inclined to the right side, so far as to form nearly a half circle ; which 
 with the whole left side of the back, was occupied with a large lumbar 
 abscess. The distortion of the spine commenced three years before, 
 with white swelling on the right side of the spine. He had also a 
 white swelling on the left thigh, and a very great enlargement of the 
 abdomen, produced by an enlargement of the mesenteric glands. The 
 lumbar abscess had been discharging scrofulous matter about two years, 
 which now amauntei to more than half a pint in every twenty-four 
 hours ; and he was so much emaciated as to make his face, chest and 
 limbs, except the left thigh, appear precisely like a skeleton covered 
 with a thin skin. He had a severe cough, and was expectorating freely, 
 and had hectic fever, night sweats, and diarrhoea, with irregular vacil- 
 lating pain in the chest and stomach, which was much increased by the 
 little food he was able to swallow ; and he was now, and had been for 
 the last two months, so feeble as to be unable to move his head, body, 
 or limbs, excepting only feeble motions of his arms. Three physicians 
 had prescribed for him, at difll-rent times, without apparent benefit. 
 Prescribed, magnetic pills and plaster. His health, in a few days, began 
 slowly to improve, and the quantity of matter discharged from the ab- 
 scess gradually became less, and his cough, expectoration, fever, night 
 sweats, and diarrhoea gradually disappeared, and his strength improved. 
 In May following, the discharge from the abscess was reduced to a tea- 
 spoon full in twenty-four hours, and the lumbar vertebrae had resumed 
 their natural situation, in a line with the dorsal ; and the enlargement of 
 
162 
 
 the abdomen had disappeared ; and on the first of August he was able 
 to walk. 
 
 There was in this case a Joss of bony substance in the dorsal verte- 
 brae, by the ulceration, and the matter formed by it passed down along 
 the facia of the psoas muscle, and through the groin into the upper part 
 of the thigh and produced the swelling or abscess there. There was 
 also a loss of bony substance by ulceration on the left side of all the 
 lumbar vertebrae, and the matter discharged from these produced the 
 lumbar abscess, and these losses of bony substance was the cause of the 
 distortion of the dorsal, and of the obliquity of all the lumbar vertebrae. 
 
 EXPLANATIOX OF THE SUBJOINED CUPS. 
 
 Fig. 1 represents the case of Master J. S., as it was when I first saw 
 it in October, 1832. A, lumbar abscess, with four openings, from 
 which matter issued. B, psoas abscess, situated in the upper and inner 
 part of the left thigh. CC, abdomen distended by tuberculated intes- 
 tines and mesentery. DD, line of cervical glands, tuberculated on both 
 sides of the neck. See the description of it, page 91. 
 
 Fig. 2 represents the same case as it was when published in June, 
 18.34, and as it now is. The distortion of the ninth dorsal vertebrae 
 backward, will be seen as in Fig. 1, and the tenth dorsal fallen down on 
 its side, or nearly so ; and it would be difficult to tell, according to Mr 
 Sanson's views of such accidents, where that portion of the spinal mar- 
 row is, that omie passed through its centre. 
 
 Caries of the vertebrae is the consequence of tubercula, or white swel- 
 ling of the vertebrae. 
 
 The disease it will be seen by an examination of the preceding cases, 
 is easily distinguished by the new and natural symptoms in any of its 
 stages, and easily cured by the natural remedies, and as a knowledge of 
 these facts is of great importance to the community, I shall give copious 
 extracts from a lecture on caries of the vertebrae, by M. Sanson, of the 
 Hotel Dieu, who is one of the most distinguished surgeons in Europe, 
 and was delivered before one of the most learned, and most numerous 
 forums in the world, for the purpose of showing the great difficulty in 
 distinguishing tubercula or scrofula, in this, as well as other parts of the 
 body, by the common symptoms, and the common erroneous views of 
 the disease, with the absolute uselessness of the common treatment 
 
 for it. 
 
 M. Sanson was a candidate for the vacant medical chair in the univer- 
 sity of Paris, occasioned by the death of Baron Boyer, and this lecture 
 was a trial of his learning and skill, in an immense amphitheatre, before 
 
163 
 
 the faculty of medicine, who were his judges, and more than 2500 stu- 
 dents, and has been published and lauded in the medical journals of 
 Europe and this country, and is consequently generally esteemed the 
 very best authority on the subjects of which it treats 
 
 1. Lecture l-f M. Sanson at the Concours of Paris, in June, 1834. — 
 The two patients who fell to the lot of M. Sanson, were placed at No. 19, Salle St 
 Martha, and No. 12, Salle St. Jeane, Hotel Dieu, and afforded subjects for the follow- 
 ing lecture : — 
 
 First Patient. — Caries of Lumber Vertebr.s:. 
 
 Gentlemen: The first is a child eight years of age, of a lymphatic temperament; 
 his skin is fine and white, the abdomen nduch developed ; the hair light coloured ; in a 
 word, he presents the characteristics of what may be called a scrofulous beauty. The 
 family of this child is, according to all accounts, healthy, and he himself has enjoyed a 
 good state of health until within eight months of the present time. At that period the 
 patient first experienced some pain in the region of the loins, which remained for some 
 time, I cannot tell exactly how long, as the answers of the child were not very precise 
 on this point; the pains were not accompanied by any feebleness of the lower extremities, 
 or symptoms of any organic affection. After a few months a tumor made its appearance 
 at the upper part of the thigh, and was at first accompanied by pulsations, which have 
 since disappeared. The swelling gradually increased in size, and is now as large as two 
 fists. When examined by the hand, there is an evident feeling of fluctuation, and its 
 volume is influenced by the position in which the patient may be placed. Thus, when 
 the child lies down on his back, the tumor becomes less tense than in the upright pos- 
 ture, and if we press the hand flat on the thigh, the contents are displaced, and ascend 
 into the illiac fossa ; hence we may conclude the existence of a large cavity, filled with 
 a liquid matter. I should remark that the skin is not adherent to the surface of the 
 tumor, but is moveable on all points of it. The child, as was before remarked, seems to 
 enjoy still a good state of health ; he is not affected with diarrhoea or sweating ; his appe- 
 tite is good ; sleeps sound ; he walks without experiencing inconvenience, and the 
 affection is as yet completely local. The sister of the ward says he has coughed for the 
 last three months ; this led me to examine carefully the state of the chest ; on ausculta- 
 tion we Could not discover any symptoms of the presence of any tubercles in the lungs ; 
 the respiration, on the contrary, was healthy ; there was no matity upon percussion at 
 any point of the thorax ; the onlyabnormalsound was some mucous rale, indicating a 
 chronic catarrh, but this was slight, and the expectoration was by no means abundant. 
 
 What, we ask, is the nature of the disease under which our patient labours .' It may 
 be laid down, as a general rule, that when you have a tumor presenting itself a( the 
 upper part of the thigh, after a continuance of lumber or dorsal pains, the existence of 
 caries of the vertebral column is very probable. The diagnosis is sometimes, however^ 
 accompanied with difficulties ; in the present case, indeed, we are assisted by a leading 
 symptom, for we have a slight s;ibbosity of the lumber vertebra, and hence we are jus- 
 tified in concluding that the vertebral column is affected ; we should, however, in all 
 cases, wa i for the formation of an abscess, before we give a decided opinion, because in 
 
164 • 
 
 many circumstances, as fn the case of a fall on the loins, accidental Injury, &c., we have 
 often the symptoms of vertebral disease, although no caries exist. But our patient was 
 not affected by any accident of this kind, and tlie pains commenced without any appre- 
 ciable cause. 
 
 Let us begin by endeavouring to determine the origin of the disease in the present 
 instance. Rachitis is a very frequent cause of softening of the vertebral column, and 
 this often produces the angular curvature ; so much so, that many practitioners rej;drd 
 the angular curvature as a characteristic of rachitis, hence much doubt on the origin of 
 the affection must exist, until caries has actually set in. But we have to remember that 
 rachitis has a set of symptoms by which it is distinguished ; it is a general constitutional 
 disease, not a local one ; rachitic children ore feeble, and mostly sunk in a state of 
 abatement and depression of spirits ; thej" exhibit an indifference to what passes about 
 them, while, at the same time, there is a precocity of mental powers, which is very 
 remarkable ; the gastric organs are usually affected in this disease ; the mesenteric 
 glands are engorged ; the child has often diarrhoea, with a slow fever, or an acceleration 
 of the pulse towards evening, he is pale, the lower jaw projects, and he gradually gets 
 thin and pines away. Now we remark none of these symptoms in our patient ; his 
 health has been good, and we have, besides, another proof that his affection does not 
 derive its origin from rachitis, besides we find the characteristic signs of an abscess by 
 congestion. We have, therefore, in the present case, a formation of pus in the cellular 
 sheath surrounding the lumbar nerves, or psoas muscles, and passing down as far as the 
 thigh, where it presents itself; this matter is of an inflammatory origin. He first had 
 pain in the part for a considerable period, and then the formation of pus which is now 
 making its way to the exterior along the sheath of the muscles ; the disease, in a word, 
 is caries of the vertebral column, withabscessby congestion. 
 
 But we do not find here the symptoms which most commonly accompany caries of the 
 spine. In most cases the disease commences by vague pains in some one point of the 
 vertebral column ; these become worse, and the patient soon experiences some difficulty 
 or loss in the power of the locomotive system. Thus, if the disease commence in the 
 lumbar region, the curve of the spinal column begins there, and the patient's movements 
 are embarrassed in consequence of the influence which the change of form exercises on 
 the action of the nerves ; the general position of the patient is very characteristic of the 
 affection under which he suffers ; the head and neck are thrown back, and the legs are 
 bent in such a way as to produce a most uneasy position. If j^ou remark the child when 
 he walks there is no action of the thighs, he seems to walk merely with the lower leg. 
 When the bodies of several vertebrae are engaged in the disease, the spinal marrow may 
 be pressed on in a moderate manner, ai.d certain symptoms, as subsultus tendinum or con- 
 vulsive movements of the muscles indicate this complication ; the patient feels a weak- 
 ness of the lower extremities ; if he sit down or attempt to lift any thing from the 
 ground, he is compelled to bend the limbs gradually, and dip down with a slow motion. 
 The child whom we had to examine, did not present any of these accidents ; he walked 
 well, as has been remarked, and did not show any impediment of motion. 
 
 Whence arises this exception from the accidents usually accompanying caries of the 
 spine ? The reason is that he has several of the bodies of the vertebrae affected at 
 the same time ; when only one is diseased, the curvature which results is angular, and 
 the pressure exercised on the spinal marrow is consequently more sudden and violent, 
 giving rise to convulsions, paralysis, or retraction of the limbs. The compression of the 
 spinal marrow is not the only cause of the disorders which we sometimes witness in the 
 organs of locomotion ; inflammation may come in as an accessary cause, extending from 
 the bodies of the affected vertebra; to the membranes, and from the latter to the spinal 
 marrow itself. We have, therefore, in the present case, caries of the vertebrae, and 
 
105 
 
 abscess by congestion. The caries occupy many vertebrae together ; for if we examine 
 the state of the spinal column we find a gradual bend, quite different from the sudden 
 angular curvature when one vertebrae only is diseased ; and this circumstance fully 
 explains the little or no ■UtBculty of motion which our patient experiences, liis upright 
 posture in walking, and the freedom from all unpleasant or dangerous accidents. 
 
 Tlie question now arises, what is the cause of the disease in the present case ? The 
 exciting causes of caries of the vertebral column are in general difficult to discover. Our 
 patient's father is a tailor, and his children have bpen accustomed to spend tl:cir time in 
 a low, ill-ventilated shop. This maj' be the origin of the scrofulous affection under 
 which he now suffers, and although the cause is not very well marked, yet the bad 
 habit of body, contracted by livir.g in an unwholesome place, is sufficient to excite the 
 disease. 
 
 In what state is the vertebral column .' 
 
 The affection sometimes commences in the bodies of the vertebrae, and then we have 
 them only inflamed. If it persist for some time, the weight of the body begins to act 
 on the altered and softened bone, breaks it down, and a curvature, more or less proini- 
 nent, is the consequence. But in our patient we have not only inflammation of the bone 
 but suppuration aho. The disease is not confined to a simple ramollissement ; the sponsy 
 tissue of the bones has become fungous, purulent matter is secreted by them, and a large 
 cavity exists, filled with that fluid. If we had an opportunity of examining the state of 
 the parts which transmit the pus from the seat of the disease to the exterior, we should 
 find a long channel, hallowed out through the cellular sheath surrounding the muscles ; 
 the channel is lined throughout by a membrane which constantly secretes pus, and is 
 called by surgeons puro-generative (puro-gcnie.) In its structure it resembles some- 
 what that of the mucous membranes. 
 
 How does the disease terminate .' (Here M. Sanson entered into an extensive exami- 
 nation of the different ways in which caries of the spine may end, and of which we need 
 give but a very faint outline.) The affection in the first place may go on and become 
 daily worse ; the inflammation extends to the membranes of the spinal marrow, and to the 
 medullary substance itself; we have then the developement of a new set of symptoms ; 
 motion becomes irregular and interrupted, and paralysis is finally established. The 
 patient is now confined altogether to bed, his health is completely destroyed, the long- 
 continued pressure brings on gangrene of the buttocks, &c., and death ensues. In many 
 cases, however, the purulent collection opens by a small abscess in the thigh ; the 
 opening is often very minute, but this does not prevent the entrance of atmospheric air 
 into the cavity. The patient soon presents severe typhoid symptoms, from the dege- 
 nerescence of the purulent contents of the abscess ; his lungs are attacked, and oa 
 examination, we find tubercles, which, perhaps, we did not before suspect or discover ; 
 diarrhoea now sets in, and he soon sinks in a state of exhaustion. In other more favorable 
 cases the termination is of a different character. The tissues surrounding the disea-sed 
 and carious vertebras furnish a bony matter, and the destruction of the hard parts is in 
 some degree repaired ; the pus becomes concentrated and dries, the abscess contracts, 
 and its sheath is gradually changed into a kind of canal, which no longer secretes puri- 
 form matter, and is at length totally healed, or the abscess may open externally, and 
 terminate like any other abscess in a different part of the body ; however, in most cases, 
 where the abscess thus opens spontaneously, it becomes fistulous, or the patient dies. 
 
 Let us row consider the treatment which should be adopted in the present case. If 
 we look to the general health of our patient, we find it very favorable ; his constitution 
 is good, there is little or no pain, and we may say that he is in a promising state, and that 
 the affection under which he labours is as simple as it is capable of being. He has, in 
 fact, no fever of any kind, he does not suffer from diarrhoea or hectic perspirations, and 
 
166 
 
 there are no symptoms of constitutional derangement. The pain in the lumbar region 
 has considerably diminished, and the abscess has not yet opened externally. There are, 
 however, on the other hand, some unfavourable conditions in the present case ; thus, 
 for example, if the extent of the caries, by destroying several of the bodies of the ver- 
 tcbrse, has llie effect of preventing any injurious pressure on the spinal marrow, yet a 
 jp-eater quantity of osseous tissue is necessarily affected, and the labour of regeneration 
 ^viil be more difficult or uncertain ; and again, although, on examination of the chest, we 
 found no sigi;s of the existence of tubercles, yet, from the cliild's general appearance 
 and temperament, we may fear their formation at a subsequent period. Hence the 
 prognosis in the present case must be guarded, and the chances of a cure are perhaps, 
 less numerous than those of a fatal termination. 
 
 Sometimes the caries of the vertebral column is superficial, and we may attack it with 
 a reasonable hope of attaining a successful result ; but not so in the case of our patient 
 The disease has already existed for too long a time, and the lesion is too profound. What 
 then are we to do .' It may be remarked, in the first place, and as a principle of treat- 
 ment, that the affection is originally an inflammatory one, and hence the antiphlogistic 
 treatment should form the principle we ought to have in view. When I mention 
 antiphlogistic treatment, I do not refer exclusively to bloodletting and debilitating mea- 
 sures ; these only form a part of it, regarded as a whole. I allude to another and an 
 important branch, viz., the revulsive part, which is included in the term antiphlogistic 
 treatment, and not to the sanguineous, which, in most cases, is not to be thought of 
 
 The first means I would employ is the moxa ; this is a most powerful and efficacious 
 external irritant, and we may apply it over various points of the spine, so as to multiply 
 the foci of irritation, according to the method recommended by Baron Larrey ; he has 
 often placed thirty or forty moxje along the spine, and this application has been attended 
 with very remarkable success. 
 
 At the same time that we attack the disease by local measures, we should not neglect 
 general constitutional treatment. Our first and principal object should be to correct the 
 scrofulous temperament, which is strongly marked in the patient ; this is to be done by 
 the treatment with which everj* one is familiar ; the child should have good, nourishing, 
 easily digested food ; he should live in a wholesome atmosphere, exposed to a fresh 
 healthy air ; be should take gentle and constant exercbe, &c., and we may aid these 
 means by the administration of bitters, if indicated. 
 
 Here M. Sanson entered into the different modes of treating the ab- 
 scess, which is unimportant, and unnecessary to notice, and then passed 
 to the consideration of his second patient, with lymphatic engorgement 
 of the breast, which I propose to notice at a future period. 
 
 It will bf> observed, that after de.scribing the common symptoms in 
 this case, M. Sanson asks, " what is the nature of the disease .' and after 
 observing that " the diagnosis is sometimes accompanied with difficulties," 
 acknowle'Iges that " in the present case" he is " assisted by a leading 
 symptom, a slight gibbosity of the lumbar vertebrae." It excited, how- 
 ever, so little attention, in his examination of the case, that he forgot 
 to mention it in his description of the sj-mptoms. 
 
 The nature of this gibbosity, or swelling, and the sympathies excited 
 by it, could not, therefore, have been known to the learned author of this 
 lecture, for in such case, the natural associations of his mind would have 
 13 
 
, 167 
 
 led him to a critical examination of it, and of the cervical and sub- 
 maxillary glands, which he would have found tuberculated. 
 
 These swellings of the vertebrae and tuberculated glands, may always 
 be found in the first stage of the disease, as well as the last, and should 
 always be decisive of its nature, and consequently we never should do 
 as he says, " wait for the formation of an abscess, before we give a de- 
 cided opinion," but on the contrary, we should commence our treatment 
 immediately, to remove the disease in the first stage, and prevent the 
 formation of caries and abscess, and their deplorable consequences. 
 
 He labours to show that caries of the spine has an inflammatory origin 
 — tells us that it is different from rachitis, (rickets) because, in this case, 
 "we find the characteristic signs of an abscess b}'' congestion," — tells us, 
 also, of " the bodies of the vertebrae" being " inflamed" — that " in this 
 case, we have not only inflammation of the bone, but suppuration also" 
 — that " this matter has an inflammatory origin," and repeats again and 
 again, that the abscess, " is an abscess by congestion." 
 
 In replying to these vagaries, (for such they really are,J it may be 
 useful to observe, that in this disease, we rarely see two cases precisely 
 alike, and that the common symptoms, are always varied according to 
 the different parts, situation, and number of the vertebrse affected, and 
 by its almost constant complication in some of its stages, with tubercula 
 of other parts of the system, and that the idea of the abscess being "an 
 abscess by congestion," or inflammation, and the vertebrae, or " bones," 
 being " inflamed," or in a state of inflammation, and that " the affection 
 is originally an inflammatory one," is all visionary theory, and the old 
 visionary theory too, of the schools which was never favoured with the 
 evidence of its real existence in chronic diseases. 
 
 The abortive attempt of M. Sanson to show a distinction between the 
 disease in this case and rickets, will be seen on comparing it with the 
 case of Master J. S., who, besides an abscess in the upper part of the 
 thigh from caries of the vertebrae, as in this case, had also the common 
 symptoms of rickets, or those given as such by M. Sanson, at the same 
 time, which demonstrates their unity ; and yet Mr. Sanson describes the 
 same symptoms, to show they are different diseases. His description 
 of the common symptoms of both, is consequently lame, confused, irre- 
 gular and unnatural. There are really, therefore, no such diseases as 
 are here described by M. Sanson, as nature is necessarily uniform in all 
 her works. 
 
 His treatment, it will be seen, corresponds with his theory. It is " the 
 antiphlogistic," or debilitating treatment, " in which bleeding forms a 
 part," and the same that is pursued in chronic diseases of the organs and 
 limbs. It is founded on a theory that was formed, like many others, 
 with a very superficial knowledge of the construction of the ele'.iientary 
 
US 
 
 organs, and of the motions of the elementary and compound organs, and 
 without the least knowledge of the causes of these motions, or of the 
 s;reat sympathetic motions by which these are regulated and sustained, 
 or of the natural remedies founded on a knowledge of these causes and 
 motions — a theory which has consigned its millions to a premature grave. 
 And the few that nature has been able to sustain arainst the combined 
 influence of the disease, and this treatment, may be seen in our towns 
 and cities, — some pale, sallow, feeble, and- emaciated, and others with 
 distortions of the spine, and tuberculated and amputated limbs, and who 
 have long been perpetual monuments of its folly. Hence the cause of 
 the grave scepticisms of some, and the ridicule of others, in regard to the 
 real usefulness, or great importance of the medical art, — of the great 
 number of nostrums for these diseases, — of the mazes of Doct. Philip,* — 
 the visions of Prince Hoenlohe, and of the very learned theory, and very 
 scientific atomic, or seventy-thousandth-part-of-a-grain-practice, of the 
 great German professor. 
 
 The cases before noticed of Master J. M. S. and Mr. W., like that of 
 M. Sanson's, commenced with a small gibbosity of the vertebrae, and 
 both would have terminated, like his, in caries and abscess, under the 
 common treatment, or that recommended by M. Sanson. The case also 
 before noticed, of Master J. S., was so much worse than that of M. 
 Sanson's, as hardly to admit of a comparison, and yet he is preparing him- 
 self for a public teacher, Avhile M. Sanson acknowledges, that the" lesion," 
 in the case of his patient, although so comparatively trifling, is from his 
 knowledge of the dependence that can placed on the common treatment, 
 " too profound" to give " a reasonable hope of attaining a successful 
 result." 
 
 The disease, in the case of Master J. S., after it commenced in the 
 dorsal, was gradually extended to the lumbar vertebrae. An abscess was 
 formed in the upper part of the thigh, and on the back, by the matter 
 discharged from the carious bones; and the disease propagated to other 
 organs. And with caries and distortion of the ninth dorsal ; and caries 
 and obliquity of the last dorsals, and all the lumbar vertebrjE — with tu- 
 berculated, stomach, intestines and mesentery; and tuberculated and 
 ulcerated lungs — with the motions of his body and limbs paralized, and 
 his legs flexed, in right and obtuse angles, from compression of the spi- 
 nal marrow ; combined with great precocity of intellect, hectic fever, 
 night sweats, diarrhoea, and a frightful marasmus ; presented the most 
 appalling effects of this disease, and of the common remedies. 
 
 Under the use of the natural remedies, the further progress of the 
 
 • Dr. Philip imagined he could distinguish chronic diseases of the different orgmj 
 by the pulse. 
 
169 
 
 disease was stayed — the tuberculations reduced, and the work of re-for- 
 mation commenced, to replace the great loss of substance ; and he slowly, 
 but gradually, arose from his most deplorable position, and stood erect, 
 and remains, like many similar cases, a monument of the value of the 
 simple and natural remedies, indicated by the really simple nature of the 
 disease, and of the futile nature and folly of the common treatment. 
 
 Acute or intlammatory diseases, requiring the antiphlogistic treatment, 
 run through their course, and terminate in a few days or weeks ; but 
 contra, or chronic diseases, are slow in their progress, and continue many 
 weeks or months, and sometimes years, before their termination, and re- 
 quire a treatment entirely different, as every body knows, except physi- 
 cians, who, in spite of the every day evidences of their own senses, still 
 adhere scientifically, to the old unscientific theory and practice of the 
 schools. 
 
 This case, and lecture, are is full of instruction, and it should never be 
 forgotten, that the reason which induced M. Sanson to advise to wait for 
 the formation of an abscess, before Me give a decided opinion in such 
 cases, is the consequence of the great difficulty in distinguishing chronic 
 diseases in their early stages by the common symptoms. The deplorable 
 consequences, resulting from this necessity, must be apparent to all, for 
 instead of attacking and reducing the disease in the first stage, when 
 affecting the spine, organs, or limbs, we must wait many weeks or 
 months, and sometimes years, for the formation of an abscess, before we 
 can, by the common symptoms, " give a decided opinion," or commence 
 the proper treatment ; or until the disease is so far advanced, as to pre- 
 clude, in a great majority of cases, " a reasonable hope of attaining a 
 successful result." 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE NECK. 
 
 King'^s Evil. 
 
 Master John Watson, of the City of New York, aged eighteen years. 
 He had large tubercles on both sides of his neck, and in the last part of 
 November, 1S38, a general swelling commenced over them, and gradually 
 increased to December 19th of the same year, when they had become 
 very large. He then commenced the use of the magnetic remedies. 
 Matter was formed in the swelling on the left side, which broke and dis- 
 charged scrofulous matter six or seven weeks. The abscesses then 
 healed, and the swelling with that on the right side of the neck, entirely 
 disappeared in about six months Irom the time he commenced the use of 
 the remedies. His health was then re-established, and has continued 
 good to this time. Sept. 1, 1840. 
 
CHAPTER IX, 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE JOINTS AND LIMBS. 
 
 In consequence of there being no generally known remedy for tubercula, 
 it is the practice in this country, and in Europe, and in the hospital and 
 country practice, to amputate or cut off the limbs in cases of tubercuky 
 or white swellings of the joints or limbs, whenever the disease is sup- 
 posed to have advanced so far as to endanger life. The relief in such 
 case is, however, generally very temporary, as the disease is commonly 
 soon developed in another joint, limb, or organ, and such patients con- 
 sequently receive, from such severe operations, but a brief immunity 
 from pain and death. In the case given of Mr. J. S., of Preble county, 
 the thigh was amputated for a white swelling of the right knee ; but the 
 disease soon after attacked him in the left hip, and then in the left foot, 
 when that of the hip became passive. If, in this case, the left leg, like 
 the thigh of the right side, had been amputated on account of the disease 
 in the foot, according to the conimon practice, the disease in the hip 
 would have quickly become active, and Mr. J. S. soon numbered with 
 the dead. 
 
 This case, with that of Miss M. G., of Springfield, with acute white 
 swelling of the heel ; and Master W. L., of Madison, with the disease 
 in all the limbs and many of the joints, with a great variety of similar 
 cases, show what is effected by the natural remedies, without amputa- 
 tion. And I may here remark, that on examining the cases of amputa- 
 
171 
 
 tion for tubercula of the joints and limbs, reported in the London Medico- 
 Chiriirgical Review, during the last ten years, and including those that 
 are called by different names, but really the same disease, there can be 
 little or no doubt, but at least three-fourths of the number would have 
 been rendered unnecessary, if the use of these remedies had been com- 
 menced, even at as late a period as that in which the operations were 
 performed. And this opinion is hazarded with the full knowledo-e of 
 the fact, that these reports were prmcipall}' from the Hospitals of London 
 and Paris, and that these operations were performed by, or with the ad- 
 vice of physicians and surgeons, who rank among the first members of 
 our profession. The tuberculous or scrofulous diathesis or taint, is 
 destroyed by the natural remedies, but remains in the system after these 
 operations, and the disease is propagated to other organs and limbs. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE LEFT KIsEE, STOMACH, AND LEFT LUNG. 
 
 White Swelling, Dyspepsia and Consumption. 
 
 t 
 
 Master Alexander Benedict, of light complexion, aged 15 years, came 
 into my office on crutches, in June, 1837, accompanied by his father. 
 On examining the son, I found he had a white swelling of the left knee, 
 and tuberculated stomach and left lung. The disease commenced in the 
 knee about five years before, and progressed gradually under the treat- 
 ment of the best physicians and surgeons of this city, until February, 
 1837, when the disease commenced in the lungs, with cough and expec- 
 toration, which still continued, and he was then pale, feeble and ema- 
 ciated. Prescribed the magnetic remedies. I heard no more from the 
 case until October of the same year, when he called at my office with his 
 father in perfect health. The white swelling of the knee, with the 
 cough and expectoration, had entirely disappeared, and he had gained so 
 much flesh and strength as to make him appear in as good health as that 
 of any other person, and his health has continued good to this time. 
 
 New York, June 8, 1840. 
 
 I have read the above description of the case of my son, and will add to it the fact 
 
 of my having paid to the best physicians and surgeons of this city, about a thousand 
 
 dollars for their attendance on him, and that they had given up the case, and told me 
 
 that he could not be cured, but must die ; when a gentleman, (Mr. Baker) advised mn 
 
 to take him to Dr. Sherwood ; I did so, and got him cured at last, as stated above, for 
 
 ten dollars.* 
 
 SAMUEL BENEDICT, 
 
 No. 2 Merchants Exchange. 
 
 • I have had a great number of similar cases which have terminated in tiie same 
 manner, and in which from fifty to five hundred dollars has been first paid to other 
 physicians and surgeons for their attendance upon them. 
 
172 
 
 ACUTE TUBERCULA OF THE ANKLE JOINT — ACUTE WHITE SWELLING OF 
 
 THE ANKLE JOINT. 
 
 Master John Lepine, of the City of New York, aged 12 years. He 
 began to have severe pain in the right ankle joint, about the first of Jan- 
 uary, 1840, which was soon followed by swelling, and, in a few weeks, 
 matter was formed and discharged from the left side of the joint, which 
 matter was a thin sanies mixed with cheesy concretions. He was 
 treated by a physician of this city in the usual manner, until the 18lh of 
 March, without any other effect than a palliation of the symptoms. At 
 this period he commenced the use of the magnetic reniedies. 
 
 Under their use the character of the discharge from the ankle joint 
 was changed, in a few days, from a thin sanies to a thick yellow matter, 
 which soon began to decrease in quantity, as also the swelling, and in 
 the course of six weeks he was able to draw on his boots and walk about, 
 and has continued to do so every day since that time. I saw him and 
 examined the ankle to-day (June 8th) — the swelling and pain have sub- 
 sided, and there only remains a very slight discharge from a small orifice 
 in the skin, which will be closed in a few days. 
 
 July 27th. A small piece of bone was discharged from the orifice a 
 few days after the above date, when it closed, and the ankle is now per- 
 fectly well. 
 
 I have received many letters of commendation for the success of my 
 practice in chronic diseases, and cannot well resist the temptation to pub- 
 lish the following from a lady of this city, who is anxious to add her 
 testimony to the benefits resulting from the use of my remedies. 
 
 New York, Sept. 7, 1840. 
 Dr. Sherwood, 
 
 Sir: Having been informed of your intention to publish a pamphlet, containing an 
 account of cures performed by your magnetic remedies, I deem it important to lay 
 before the public a statement of your success in the case of my son. He had injured 
 his spine by a fall from his chair about two years previous to your undertaking the cure 
 of him, and had suffered much from the disease which ensued, as v/ell as from the 
 remedies of various physicians, with no material benefit, until the application of your 
 remedies, when his recovery was rapid, and he is now in the enjoyment of perfect 
 health. 
 
 The handsome manner in which you so disinterestedly came forward to the assistance 
 of several poor people in our neighbourhood, particularly in your successful treatment 
 of an aggravated case of white swelling of long standing, will be long remembered with 
 gratitude, and must establish the superiority of your remedies in cases of the above 
 character. Certain that to your exertion I am indebted for the life of my child, I wish 
 you all possible success in the heavenly art of healing the sick. 
 
 Respectfully yours, 
 
173 
 
 The first case referred to by this lady, was that of a white swelling 
 and distortion of the spine ; and the last, a very bad case of white swel- 
 ling of the knee of a young lady of six years standing, which had re- 
 sisted both the hospital and private practice. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE JOINTS AND LIMBS. 
 
 Ulcers, White Swellings, Abscesses, and Caries of the Bones. 
 
 Master W. L., of Madison, Butler county, Ohio, aged eleven years. I 
 was called to see him, May 29th, 1S33. He had scrofulous tubercles, 
 and a scrofulous ulcer on both sides of his neck, a white swelling of the 
 left arm, between the shoulder and elbow, and another of the left ankle. 
 He had also a white swelling of the right knee, and also of the right 
 ankle, and another of the third joint of the fore-finger of the right hand. 
 The white swelling of the left arm was discharging scrofulous matter 
 from abscesses in four places, and that of the left ankle in two places, and 
 that of the right ankle, and that of the hand, in one place each. 
 
 The disease commenced about a year and a half before, first with white 
 swelling of the right knee, and the other swellings, ulcers and abscesses 
 gradually appeared as the disease advanced. He was now confined to his 
 bed and unable to walk, was feeble and emaciated, entirely deaf, and suf- 
 fered much from pain, mostly at this time in both ankles and the left leg. 
 Prescribed the magnetic pills and plaster. The pain in his limbs began 
 to subside in a few days, and his health to improve ; a piece of bone two 
 inches long, half an inch wide, and three-eighths of an inch thick, sepa- 
 rated from the bone, and was removed from the left arm. The white 
 swellings gradually became less, and in six weeks he was able to walk 
 about in the fields. The swelling of the thigh terminated in abscess ; I 
 opened it, and it discharged about' three gills of matter, and then healed 
 rapidly. November Isf, 1S33. The white swellings have all disappeared, 
 and the abscess and ulcers healed, and his general health is good. 
 
 His jaws were so nearly closed as to only admit a finger between them. 
 All the teeth on the under jaw of the left side came out, and also a part 
 the jaw bone, the whole length of the jaw in which the teeth were set, 
 and there has come out of the same place an entire new set of teeth, and 
 he can now open his mouth as wide as he ever could, and, besides, there 
 has come out of the roof of his mouth a number of small pigces of bone 
 
 Pieces of bone also came out of the upper end of the tibia (shin bone) 
 of the right side, from the left ankle joint, the left clavicle, (collar bone,) 
 the mastoid process of the right side, (bone that projects under the ear,^. 
 
174 
 
 and from the under jaw bone of the right side ; and the right leg "was 
 drawn back so as to form nearly a right angle with the thigh, and the left 
 so as to form an obtuse angle. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE KNEE AND MESENTERY. 
 
 Mr. D. C, of Springfield, Hamilton county, Ohio, farmer, aged thirty- 
 nine years, came to me October 15th, 1832, with white swelling of the 
 left knee, and enlargement of the abdomen, which we supposed to be 
 dro^Dsy, but it was evidently caused by enlargement of the mesenteric 
 glands. His health has been declining more than a year, and the enlarge- 
 ment of the abdomen commenced about a year, and the swelling and pain 
 in the knee, which now rendered him a cripple, about four months before. 
 Prescribed the magnetic pills and plaster. In five weeks from this time 
 the swelling of the knee and enlargement of the abdomen had disappeared, 
 and his usual good health was restored. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE NECK AND MESENTERT. 
 
 Master T. I., of the city of Cincinnati, aged 18 months. I was called 
 to see him about September 1st, 1630. He had scrofulous ulcers under 
 each ear, which were discharging scrofulous matter very freely, and a 
 number of tubercles of different sizes, on both sides of the neck, and an 
 enlargement of the abdomen, with diarrhoea. It was now more than a 
 year since the disease commenced, and he had irregular fever and was 
 feeble and emaciated. Five or six physicians had attended and prescribed 
 for him, but the disease grew worse. Prescribed the magnetic pills and 
 plaster. His health began to improve in a few days, and in about six 
 weeks the ulcers were healed and the tubercles had disappeared, and his 
 health was in all respects restored. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE LEFT HIP AND FOOT. 
 
 After amputation for tuburcula of right knee. 
 
 Mr. J. S., of Preble county, Ohio, of light complexion, aged 19 years, 
 
 called on me, September 19th, 1836. His right thigh was amputated 
 
 about five years ago, on account of white swelling of the right knee, soon 
 
 after which he began to feel pain, sometimes in the left hip, and at others 
 
 in the knee, and these pains continued, with varying severity, until about 
 14 
 
175 
 
 ten months ago, when his foot began to swell and to be painful. The 
 pain in the hip and knee then subsided. The white swelling is now 
 large, and extends over the foot, and sides of the foot, and he has tuber- 
 cles on both sides of his neck, and his health has continued feeble since 
 the amputation. Diagnosis. Chronic tubercula of the hip joint and foot. 
 Prescribed, magnetic pills and plaster. October 7th, the whole swel- 
 ling is gone, excepting only a small abscess, which, on being opened, 
 discharged two teaspoons full of tuberculous matter. The plaster was 
 now re-applied, and the pills continued, and in three weeks the abscess 
 was healed and his health restored. 
 
 ACUTE TUBERCULA OF THE LEFT LEG. 
 
 Master W. L., of Somers, Preble county, Ohio, aged five years ; called 
 to see him October 11th, 1834. He had a violent and spasmodic pain in 
 the lower and forepart of the left leg, with intervals of ease. The disease 
 commenced five or six days before, and, on examining his neck, I found 
 five or six large tubercles on the left side. A physician had been every 
 day in attendance, and had prescribed the usual antiphlogistic remedies, 
 including a blister over the swelling ; but the pain continued with una- 
 bated violence, and the patient, in his agony, continued to make the wel- 
 kin wring with screams. 
 
 Diagnosis. Acute tubercula. I now took a scalpel, and laid the 
 swelling open along the course of the tibia, about an inch and a half 
 through the blister, integuments and periosteum to the bone. 
 
 This operation, though a severe one, was less painful than one of those 
 turns of severe pain. I now placed a linen cloth over it, and directed it 
 to be wetted in a triple solution of sulphate of copper, iron, and alumine, 
 in the following proportions, viz., blue vitriol one-fourth of an ounce, 
 copperas and alum, each half an ounce, water one pint, and also to wet a 
 roller bandage in this solution, and commence at the toes, and roll it mode- 
 rately tight over the foot, ankle, and leg to the knee, and at night tO' 
 remove it and apply a fermenting poultice over the limb; and in the 
 morning to apply again the cloth, wash, and bandage, and to continue- 
 this course until the pain ceased, and then to discontinue the wash and 
 poultice, and apply magnetic scrofulous plaster, with the roller bandage. 
 I also prescribed magnetic pills ; one to be taken night and morning for 
 one week, and afterwards one every night. 
 
 The turns of spasmodic pain now gradually decreased in frequency and 
 violence, and in nine days he was able to walk about the house, and in- 
 less than two weeks after this his leg was healed, and his health re- 
 stored. 
 
176 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE HIP JOINT. 
 
 Disease of the Hip Joint. 
 
 Master J. C, aged 14 years, called to see him November 20th, 1828. 
 He had been complaining of pain in his right knee, with a little lameness 
 every two or three days, during the last two weeks, but is now confined 
 to his bed, with pain in his right hip He lays on his left side, with his 
 thighs drawn up, and every attempt to move the limb produces pain in 
 the hip, and he cannot bear pressure on the joint or in the groin. On 
 comparing this joint with the left, there was no swelling or enlargement, 
 but, on the contrary, it appears rather less or flattened on the out side ot 
 the joint, and the limb appears shorter than the other. He has some 
 fever ; is very irritable, and has tubercles on the right side of the neck 
 and in the groin. 
 
 Prescribed, magnetic pills, and a large poultice to the hip and groin, 1o 
 be renewed once in four hours. Novemb'ir 21. Pain abated, discon- 
 tinued the poultice, and applied magnetic plaster over the hip and groin. 
 
 November 23. Pain in the joint much less, and he rests better during 
 the night. On removing the plaster, the hip and groin were covered 
 with small vesicles and ulcerations. The same plaster was spread again, 
 by adding a little more to it, and re-applied. 
 
 November 26. He continues better, but the joint is in every attemj^t 
 to move it still very painful. The same course was continued, and in 
 four weeks he was able to sit up, and in two weeks more, was able to 
 walk with a little lameness, from which he entirely recovered in a few 
 days, and without any shortening of the limb. 
 
 There are a few cases in which I use other external applications 
 instead of the plaster, as will be seen by the two following examples. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE HEEL. 
 
 Acute While Swelling of the Heel and Ankle Joint, with Abcesses and 
 
 Caries of the Bones. 
 
 Miss M. G , of Springfield, Hamilton county, Ohio, aged twelve 
 
 years. 1 was called to see her, February 5th, 1S33. She had been 
 attacked with acute white swelling of the left heel, three months pre- 
 vious to this time. The whole foot and ankle was now swollen as large 
 as the skin would admit, and was oedematous, and extended half way to 
 the knee. There were three abscesses on the right side of the heel, five 
 on the left, and two on each side of the ankle joint, all discharging scro- 
 
177 
 
 fulous matter, of a greenish-yellow color, and the whole foot and ankle 
 had a dusky yellow appearance. There was little or no sensibility 
 in the skin, but a great discharge of matter, with acute pain on 
 pressure. On introducing the probe into the abscesses, the bone was 
 found bare in three of them on the left side of the heel and foot, and had 
 a rough feel. She had a number of tubercles of different sizes, from that 
 of a pea to a walnut, on both sides of her neck, and was now, and had 
 been from the first, confined to her bed, and is now very feeble and ema- 
 ciated, has hectic fever, and has suffered much from pain in the heel and 
 ankle. About three weeks previous to this time, the attending physician 
 proposed to amputate the limb, ("as is customary in such casesj as it 
 offered, in his opinion, the only chance to save her life. Her parents, 
 opposed to this last resort, sent for a celebrated physician of a neighbor- 
 ing town in consultation, who was of the opinion that she would not 
 recover, whether the limb was amputated or not. 
 
 Prescribed, magnetic pills and a wash for the limb, composed of sul- 
 phate of copper (blue vitriol) a quarter of an ounce, sulphate ferri (cop- 
 peras) one ounce, sulphate of alumine (alum) one ounce, dissolved in a 
 pint of warm water. A roller bandage to be wet in this solution and 
 applied to the foot, ankle and leg, and to be kept wet with the wash 
 through the day, and at night to remove the roller and apply the common 
 fermenting poultice through the night alternately. February 15th. The 
 swelling of the limb has lessened more than one-half. The cuticle 
 (scarf skin) very much thickened, has peeled off of the entire foot, and 
 it has a much more healthy and natural appearance. Her fever has 
 nearly disappeared, and her health much improved, and she is able to sit 
 up. Her health continued to improve without any interruption, with 
 the same treatment, and in two weeks more the swelling had disappeared 
 from the foot and leg, except at the heel, and in another week the ab- 
 scesses on both sides of the ankle joint, and on the right side of the heel, 
 were healed. The magnetic plaster was now applied to the left side of 
 the heel. She was able to walk soon after this, first on crutches, and 
 then without them. More than a dozen pieces of bone came out of the 
 left side of the heel and foot, two of them large and of the circumference 
 of a quarter of a dollar. Her father and mother are both scrofulous. 
 
 TUBERCULA OF THE UTERUS AND RIGHT LEG. 
 
 Mrs. H., of Union, Butlercounty, Ohio, of the middling size, and good 
 constitution, aged 46 years. 
 
 Called to see her August 17th, 1833. She has a large fungus ulcer 
 on the right side of her right ankle. The foot and leg swelled as large 
 
178 
 
 as the skin will admit, which has a shining appearance, and the ulcer 
 black and depressed from the surrounding everted edges of the skin. It 
 is in form perfectly round, and as large as the circumference of the top 
 of a large tea cup, and is to the depth of half an inch, a gangrenous mass 
 of fungi, which emits a horrible smell. The swelling commenced about 
 three months since. 
 
 Her countenance is pale and sallow, and she has leucorrhoea, with 
 which she has been affected more than two years, and she is now feeble 
 and emaciated, — is suffering severely with dull and lancinating pains in 
 the ankle and leg, and is confined to her bed. 
 
 She has a number of tubercles on the right side of her neck, and pres- 
 sure on two of the lumbar vertebrae produces pain, which darts into the 
 uterus. Prescribed the magnetic pills and a grain of quinine, three times 
 a day, with a large fermenting poultice to the foot, ankle and leg, to be 
 renewed morning and evening, and the magnetic plaster over the lum- 
 bar vertebrae. August 22nd. The swelling of the limb is very much 
 reduced, and the gangrenous fungi have sloughed out and left a large and 
 round chasm half an inch deep, the bottom of which is covered with 
 fungus or round elevations, of a red colour, surrounded with a white 
 colored matter, and the edges of the skin every where everted, and be- 
 sides this formidable ulcer, the whole of the back part of the ankle, 
 from an inch above the bottom of the heel to four inches above the an- 
 kle, is now one mass of fungus or loose and spungy ulcers, the skin having 
 entirely disappeared. 
 
 The limb was now washed with a solution of chloride of mercury, and 
 adhesive plaster, spread very thin on strips of cotton cloth, two and a 
 half inches wide, and long enough to reach round the limb and lap over 
 two inches, and a sufficient number of them so spread to cover the limb 
 from the lower part of the ankle to a point seven inches above it. I 
 commenced applying these strips by making one end stick fast to the side 
 of the heel, and then drew it round below the ankle moderately tight, 
 and then took up another and fastened it as before, and lapped it on the 
 first about an inch, and drew it ou, and let it lap over the end of the 
 strip as before, and so with the remainder of the strips, until they were 
 all on. 
 
 I then took a roller bandage, wet in the above solution, and commen- 
 cing at the toes, rolled it over the foot, ankle and leg, to the knee. Di- 
 rections were now j^iven to keep the roller wet with the solution, and 
 remove it and the strips of plaster, and wash the leg and ulcers, and 
 re-apply new strips of plaster, and the roller, in the same way night and 
 morning, and in case the limb should become more painful, to remove 
 them, and apply the fermenting poultice for twelve hours, and then again 
 apply the wash, strips of plaster, and roller. 
 
179 
 
 September Sth. The swelling of the limb has subsided, except a little 
 about the ulcers, and they have commenced healing from their extreme 
 points towards the centre Her health has improved so much as to be 
 able to sit up the most of the clay, and the quinine discontinued. 
 
 October 3d. Her leucorrhoea has disappeared, and the ulcerations 
 reduced to about one-third their original diir;ensions. The same course 
 of treatment was continued with little variation, and in about two months 
 they healed entirely, when her health was fully re-established. 
 
 The manner of applying adhesive strips of plaster pursued in this case 
 was first recommended by Cooper, in cases of the common ulcerated legs, 
 and it cured some cases, but the disease generally returned again after a 
 few weeks or months. When, however, the disease is treated hke this 
 case, with the magnetic pills and the adhesive strips of plaster, the dia- 
 thesis or taint in the system from absorption from these ulcers is des- 
 troyed, and the disease does not return. The adhesive plaster I use in 
 these cases is much better and cheaper than that obtained from the shops, 
 and is made by boiling rosin and lard in water an hour, in the proportion 
 of one ounce of lard to every pound of rosin, and when nearly cold may 
 be made into rolls of any convenient size. The rosin must always be 
 good and free from impurities. The plaster must also be spread very 
 thin and very even, and always applied precisely in the same way as in 
 this case, when it cures the disease, if it is not of more than seven or 
 eight years' continuance, in from five to seven weeks. 
 
 COLOUR OF THE SKIN IN CHRONIC TUBERCULA. 
 
 In the foregoing cases of chronic tubercula of the limbs, neck, head, 
 and face, there was little or no discolouration of the skin, and there is little 
 or none of the membranes which cover the tuberculated organs. There 
 are, however rare cases of this disease in which a red colour of the skin 
 is sometimes produced by accidental causes, and in order to prevent 
 these cases which are incurable by other remedies, from being mistaken 
 for another disease, the following case is presented. 
 
 Miss M. G., aged ten years, was brought to me January 26th, 1836. 
 The lower half of her nose is swelled and of a scarlet red colour. The 
 lower half of both cheeks, upper and under lip, and chin, are also swelled, 
 and of the same scarlet colour, and they all have a smooth and shining 
 appearance, except in some places along the cheeks where they are tu- 
 berculated, and along the upper lip where tubercles have ulcerated and 
 are discharging matter. 
 
 The disease commenced about five years since with pain, and then a 
 thin or sanious discharge from the nose, which from its frequent appli- 
 cation to the skin produced the swelling, ulceration, and scarlet colour 
 of this part of the nose and face. 
 
180 
 
 She has a black and very intelligent eye, and is apparently a perfect 
 beauty, saving the frightful deformity produced by this disease, from 
 ■which she has suffered long, and sometimes severely. 
 
 The line or ganglia of glands on both sides of her neck, w^ith the sub- 
 maxillaries under the jaws and the parotids are tuberculated. The 
 tubercles very large, and painful under pressure. 
 
 Pressure on a small tubercle of the right side of the first cervical ver- 
 tebrae produces pain, which darts into those under the jaw, and into the 
 throat of the riirht side and into the nose. Pressure on one of the left 
 side of the same verlebrai produces pain which darts into those under the 
 jaw and into the throat and face of the left side. I now examined the 
 mouth and found both tonsils tuberculated, and the tongue one-third 
 larger than natural. A number of physicians have as usual attended and 
 prescribed for this patient. Diagnosis. Tubercula of the nose, face, 
 tonsils and tongue. Prescribed magnetic pills and plaster. 
 
 The disease began to subside in a few days, and at the end of ten 
 weeks it had entirely disappeared, and the colour of the skin natural. 
 One plaster was applied in this case over the first cervical vertebree. 
 One over the lower part of the lower jaw and upper part of the neck of 
 both sides, and one over the swelled and scarlet portions of the face. 
 She wore the plaster on the face four or five weeks only, and on the 
 neck seven or eight. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 I ADD to the common per chloride of gold a quantity of condensed chlorine, which 
 is supposed to be equal to ten or twelve times the quantity condensed In the common 
 per chloride, and which greatly increases its contractive power in the same doses. It 
 is supposed to be the same article which was used by the ancient Egyptians; the know- 
 ledge of which, in some form, has descended to the modern Arabians and Persians 
 
 B 
 
 The Bitumen and principal article of which the plaster is composed, is the same arti- 
 cle which was used by the ancient Egyptians, and other ancient nations, for the same 
 purposes, and also for embalming, and from which the Germans but recently commenced 
 the manufacture of creosote. The skin over which the plaster is applied, absorbs the 
 creosote from it, and at the same time excretes a mucous or positive matter, instead of 
 its natural excretion of aeriform, aqueous, or negative matter. 
 
 " The remains of animals and vegetables in the rocks and earthy strata of the earth, we 
 the true and only means of ascertaining its history and natural changes before the re- 
 cords of man. The discoveries made on this subject within the last half century form 
 an era in science in which the name of Cuvier will always be distinguished. In all 
 
182 
 
 countries, on digging to certain depths, and in mining, the remains of fishes, vegetables, 
 quadrupeds, and birds are found in the soil or imbedded in the rocks, except in those 
 of primitive antiquity. The general regularity with which those that are marine are laid 
 at one level, and those which are products of laud are laid at another, and the alterna- 
 tions of these marine and land products, lead to the conclusion that the sea has re- 
 peatedly covered the land for long periods of time, and that the land has, at interme- 
 diate periods, been dry ; and what is very remarkable, the remains found consist, and 
 always at certain depths, of species of animals, vegetables, &c. not now in existence, 
 and often of genera not natural to the present climate. Cuvier has enumerated several 
 hundred genera of animals, fishes, and vegetables so found, of which there are none of 
 the living genera or species. The lowest rocks, it is therefore inferred, were at one 
 time the surface of the earth and the seat of organic life. These appear to have been 
 destroyed by some great revolutions which brought new tribes of organized beings, 
 while their kinds prove that the surface was covered with water. The subsequent 
 appearance of amphibia, &c. prove the development of dry land ; these appear to have 
 been swept away, and among later solid rocks, the monstrous race of herbiverous 
 quadrupeds and gigantic lacerta came into existence when the earth seems to have ac- 
 quired herbage for their subsistence. How long this race kept possession cannot be 
 guessed, but their length of life is well known. The gypsum, &c. which now contains 
 their remains is covered with newer deposits, abounding with sea shells, and above the 
 stratum is found a new race of herbiverous animals of the genera of the elephant, rhi- 
 noceros, iSoc. and above them is the first loose soil, intermixed with marine substances, 
 proving second or third immersions of the sea ; and above this lies the soil which the 
 present race of animals enjoy. What may follow, and when, and how, is a curious 
 question. 
 
 " The age of the rocks indicates the age of the remains, but we can measure neither 
 by any comparison with known time. 
 
 " The older secondary rocks contain peculiar aquatic plants and reeds, then above these 
 madrepores, coral, &c. all fixed where they lived ; and then shell-fish, very simple, but 
 differing from all now in existence ; in strata above these fishes, bamboos and ferns ; 
 in a still higher stratum are more complicate shells and oviparous amphibia, as croco- 
 diles, tortoises, and reptiles ; these are imbedded in the uppermost solid rocks of the 
 oldest secondery formation. 
 
 " In the newest solid rock formations, whales, seals, and birds appear ; above these 
 land animals of enormous size, birds and fresh water shells, all in concrete rocks. 
 
 " Above these, in the lowest beds of loose soil and peat bogs, elephants, elks, rhinoce- 
 roses, of peculiar species are found. Near the surface is fo\md the remains of the ex- 
 isting races. Human bones have only been found among these. 
 
 " The fossil or organic remains in strata are always the same kind in similar strata, and 
 generally have characters of simplicity of structure, proportioned to the age or depth 
 of the stratum. 
 
 " Brogniart, in his Geological Flora, classes plants into four periods: 1, The transi- 
 tion and coal formation ; 2, Variegated sandstone ; 3, The chalk ; and 4, Above the 
 chalk. He conceives that the successive creations are distinguished by a sudden 
 change in the essential characteristics. Those of the fourth period are similar to the pre- 
 sent. Below the chalk the most perfect are the cycadecB and conifera. A land vege- 
 tation marks each period, while one family of one period runs into another. The dico- 
 tyledonous begin in the oldest strata of the secondary formations, and increase in the 
 more recent." — Treasury of Knowledge. 
 
183 
 
 As vegetative and animal life are most vigorous and luxuriant in the middle of the 
 golden ages, when the average heat of the earth and the perfection of all things are at 
 their maximum ; there can be no doubt but man, with the long list of other animals 
 belonging to the order mammalia as well as that of the amphibia, were successively 
 produced in those periods ; many species of which were subsequently overwhelmed by 
 the raging elements, and became extinct in other ages. These creations were at first 
 of comparatively small size and of simple form and structure, which were succeeded by 
 those of greater size and more complicated and perfect forms in each succeeding period 
 until they at last arrived at their maximum in the production of man, the mastidon and 
 the missourian. 
 
 These great geological revolutions in the surface of the earth were performed in four 
 periods of time, and the length of each of these periods was 2,304,000 years ; making 
 in the whole 9,216,000. The earth had existed two periods previous to the commence- 
 ment of these revolutions, in the first of which, the primitive crystallised granite was 
 deposited, and formed the crust on which the first strata were laid in the second period, 
 devoid of organic remains. These periods amounted to 4,608,000 years, and when 
 added to the four periods above described, make in the whole 13,824,000 years from 
 the commencement of the first to the completion of the sixth period. 
 
 We are now progressing in the seventh period, and assuming that it will be com- 
 pleted in the middle of the present age, or when the earth's axis is again perpendicular 
 to the plane of the ecliptic, then it is 2,161,845 years since the commencement of this 
 period, and of the decay of the earth, and of all things upon it. 
 
 D 
 
 The brain is frequently tuberculated, as is shown by the magnetic symptoms and by 
 post mortem examinations. I have also found these symptoms in every case of Hemi- 
 plegia or paralysis of one side, which I have examined during the last twenty years. I 
 have also found them in every case of Epilepsy, Chorea, and Amaurosis. These 
 are, therefore, cases of tubercular disease, and they are uniformly cured by the magnetic 
 remedies, in the first stage of the disease, in young subjects ; but in old subjects, where 
 the brain has been a long time tuberculated, as is usual in such cases, these remedies 
 have generally little or no effect, except to palliate the symptoms. 
 
 These symptoms are also found in Paraplegia or tubercular disease, affecting the spi- 
 nal cord, which are generally cured by these remedies, in the first stage of the disease, 
 in young subjects. 
 
 It will be observed that I have regarded tubercles in the lungs and brain, as well as 
 those found in other organs, as the diseased satellites of the lymphatic glands, and it is 
 believed they must be so regarded hereafter by physiologists ; for the magnetic symp- 
 toms demonstrate their direct connection with the lymphatic glands. They cannot, 
 therefore, (according to the received opinion,) be foreign bodies. 
 
 E 
 
 I called to see Miss E. B. about the 15th June 1841, and found her enjoying fine 
 health. She has grown about a head taller than she was when I saw her last in April 
 1840. Her form continues perfect, and she walks more erect than ladies generally do. 
 
184 
 
 Lateral curvatures ^of the spine are produced by the contractions of tuberculaSed 
 muscles. In this case, like every other, the muscles were thickened on the side of the 
 spine to which the curve was directed. When these tuberculations are reduced, the 
 spine resumes its natural position. In the case of Mrs. P., page 133, the muscles were 
 tuberculated on both sides of the same vertebrae, from the sixth dorsal to the third lum- 
 ber, yet there was no curvature of the spine, because the force of the contraction on 
 one side was balanced by that on the other 
 
 The contractions of the muscles on one side of the vertebrae only, produced partial 
 dislocation, and a greater or lesser curvature in proportion to the extent and intensity 
 of the disease in the muscles. Partial dislocations of the joints of the limbs are fre- 
 quently produced in the same manner. In a great majority of the cases of disease of 
 the hip joint, there is partial dislocation of the head of the femur soon after the disease 
 commences, by the contraction of the large tuberculated muscles of the outer and 
 back side of the joint. 
 
 M. Guerin of Paris has recently introduced the practice of dividing the contracted 
 muscles to reduce these partial dislocations, and is pursuing it with great success. It 
 must greatly facilitate the cure of the disease in these cases, while the operation alone 
 cures entirely congenital affections of this kind, as wry-neck, club-foot, &c. &,. 
 
GLOSSARY 
 
 Ablation, Taking away, abstracting, or cutting off. 
 
 Abnormal, Irregular, unnatural, singular, misshaped. 
 
 Absorption, The act of sacking up, attracting, or collecting, as with a sponge. 
 
 Absorbents, Vessels taking up and conveying fluids. 
 
 Abscess, A collection of pus in a cavity, the result of morbid process. 
 
 Accessoj-ious, Helping, additional, two nerves running from the medulla oblongata. 
 
 Acetate of Lead, a combination of acetic acid, or vinegar, with lead. 
 
 Acini, Minute kernels, tubercula, or glandiform corpuscles. 
 
 Acoustic JVerve, Belonging to the ear, hearing, or sound. 
 
 Adipose, Fatty, containing fat. 
 
 Alkaline, Having the quality of an alkali, or fixed salt, caustic. 
 
 Amenhorrhma, Suppression of the menses. 
 
 Anastomatic, Quality of removing obstruction, deobstruent. 
 
 Anaphrodisix, Absence of venery, impotence, sterility. 
 
 Anastimose, To join tw^o vessels, union of parts or currents. 
 
 Aneurism, A tumor, formed by the dilatation or lesion of an artery. 
 
 Anfractuosities, Sinous depressions, windings or turnings. 
 
 Ans^ina, Quincy, or sore throat. 
 
 Antiphlogistic, Opposed to inflammation — depleting. 
 
 Antrum, Cavities in bones, the entrance to which is smaller than the bottom. 
 
 Aorta, The great artery arising out of the left ventricle of the heart. 
 
 Arachnoid, Inner membrane covering the brain. 
 
 Asphyxia, Suspended animation or motions of the heart, swooning or fainting. 
 
 Asthenic, Relating to a debility of the vital forces. 
 
 Ataxic, Pertaining to disorders characterizing nervous fevers. 
 
 Atony, Want of tone or force, general debility. 
 
 Auriferous, Producing or partaking of gold. 
 
 Auscultation, To listen, to learn by sounds thro'Jgh the stethescope, or otherwise, 
 
 the diagnosis of diseases in the heart and lungs. 
 Automatic, Mechanical, like or belongring to an automaton. 
 Axillary, Belonging to the armpit. 
 
 24 
 
186 
 
 B 
 
 Bronchia, The tubes arising from the throat, or trachsea, and conveying air into the 
 
 lungs. 
 Bronchitis, Inflammation of the lining membrane of the bronchial tubes. 
 Bronchophony, Guteral sound of words in the lungs, like that in the character of 
 
 Punch. 
 
 c 
 
 Calamus Scriptorius, A furiovv or canal in the fourth ventricle of the brain. 
 
 Calx, Lime, preparations of lime used medicinally. 
 
 Cardiac, Relating to the heart or upper orifice of the stomach. 
 
 Camivorons, Feeding or living on flesh. 
 
 Caries, Ulcerations of the bones. 
 
 Catarrhal, Relating to a discharge from a mucous membrane. 
 
 Catamenia, The menses. 
 
 Catenation, A link, a regular connection. 
 
 CathoUcons, General remedies, panaceas. 
 
 Catheter, A tube or instrument, introduced through the urinary passage into the 
 bladder. 
 
 Cautery, A burning iron, a caustic. 
 
 Cellular, Consisting of cells or cavities. 
 
 Cellulosity, State of having cells. 
 
 Ccrebellec, Belonging to the cerebellum. 
 
 Cerebelli, The two hemispheres of the cerebellum. 
 
 Cerebellum, The small brain, posterior to the cerebrum. 
 
 Cerebral, Belonging to the brain. 
 
 Cerebrum, The brain anterior to the cerebellum. 
 
 Cervical, Belonging to the neck. 
 
 Chlorosis, A disease affecting females before menstruation. 
 
 Chloride oj Mercury, A compound, formed by chlorine and mercury. 
 
 Chorea, St. Vitus' dance. 
 
 Chronic Diseases, Those of long duration, organic, impeding performance of func- 
 tions. 
 
 Chyle, A white fluid produced by digestion, secreted from the stomach. 
 
 Cincritious, Color of ashes, the part of the brain, &c. of that color. 
 
 Circulatory Syste?n, Circulation of the blood and other fluids of the body. 
 
 Circumflexus Palati, A muscle of the sphenoid bone. 
 
 Clavicle, The collar bone. 
 
 Clinical, Relating to discourse or practice at the bed of the sick. 
 
 Commissure, A joint of union, seam or bridae. 
 
 Con^arative Physiology, Knowledge or doctrine of functions, derived from study of 
 the lower order of animals. 
 
 Coma, Morbid disposition to sleep, profound sleep, lethargy. 
 
 Condyloid, Shape of a condyle, or soft protuberant end of a bone. 
 
 Congestion, An unnatural accumulation of blood or other fluid in an organ. 
 
 Conglobate, Formed into balls — lymphatic glands. 
 
187 
 
 Conjunctiva, External coat of the eye. 
 
 Contractility, Power, or susceptibility of contraction, or shrinking. 
 
 Contractile, A muscle, having the power of contracting or shortening. 
 
 Convolutions, Turnings, undulating, or tortuous projections, as of the brain, intes- 
 tines, &,c. 
 
 Corpora Restiformia, Resting bodies, medullary projections'from the top of the me- 
 dulla oblongata. 
 
 Corpora Striata, Two ganglions in the ventricles of the brain. 
 
 Coronary, Belonging to the crown or top, as of the head. 
 
 Costal, Relating to the ribs. 
 
 Corpus Olivare, Olivary body or ganglion in the medulla oblongata. 
 
 Cortical, The exterior skin, rind, bark. 
 
 Costive, Bound, retentive, close. 
 
 Cranium, The skull. 
 
 Crepitous, Pertaining to crackling sounds in breathing, ebulitions of air, or the fric- 
 tions of bones. 
 
 Cribriform, Resembling a sieve or riddle, like the ethmoid hone. 
 
 Crura, Bodies resembling legs or roots, as the crura cerebri. 
 
 Crypts, ( CryptcB, pi.) Follicles, cavities, small glands, or cells in the membranes. 
 
 Cystis, A bag, the urinary bladder. 
 
 D 
 
 Decussation, Crossing, intersection at angles, &c. 
 
 Degenerescence, A change for the worse in the composition of fluids, or solids of the 
 
 body, or the structure of an organ. 
 Diagnosis, Discrimination of diseases—" What is the matter ?" 
 Diaphragm, The midriff, a muscular partition dividing the chest from the belly. 
 Diarrhaa, A flux, purging. 
 
 Diathesis, Disposition, predisposition to certain diseases. 
 Dorsal, Belonging to the back, the second division of the spine, consisting of twelve 
 
 vertebrse. 
 Dorsal Medulla, marrow of the dorsal vertebrae. 
 Duct, A tube, canal, or passage for fluids^ 
 
 Duodenum, First small intestine receiving the food from the stomach 
 Dyspnoea, Difficulty of breathing. 
 
 E 
 
 Electro-dynamic, Laws relating to electrical forces, &c. 
 
 Elixirs, Liquid extracts, the essence, a medical cordial. 
 
 Ellipticity, Oval, like an egg. 
 
 Embryo, A germ, elementary organization, foetus, first or unfinished form. 
 
 Encephalic, Belonging to the head or the brain. 
 
 Erotic, Loving, produced by love. 
 
 Ethmoid Bone, Lying horizontally with the eyes and over the nose. 
 
 Exacerbation, Increase in the symptoms of disease. 
 
 Excrete, To separate, to throw off. 
 
 Expectoration, The act of expelling secretions from the chest — the matter expelled. 
 
 Extravasated, Forced out of the proper vessel or channel, as with stagnant blood. 
 
188 
 
 Fascia, A membrane, covering the muscles. 
 
 Femoral, Relating or belonging to the thigh. 
 
 FibriUcB, Small fibres. 
 
 Flexor and Extensor muscles, The oflBces of which are to extend and contract. 
 
 Flocculi, Flakes, like snow, leaf-like. 
 
 Foetal, Relating to the foetus, or child in the womb. 
 
 Follicles, Little glands, bags, or folds. 
 
 Foramen, {Foramina,-p\.) A hole or opening. 
 
 Foramen Magnum, A large hole or opening at the base of the brain, through which 
 
 the spinal marrow enters the brain. 
 Foramen Lacerum, A hole in the os pherwides. 
 Formula, Forms of medicinal preparations or prescriptions. 
 Fornix, A medullary body in the brain. 
 Fossa, {^FosscB, pi.) A groove or ditch. 
 Frontal, Belonging to the front, or forehead. 
 Fungus, {Fungi, pi.) A spungy excrescence. 
 
 G 
 
 Ganglions, Organs formed of agglomerated globules in the brain — the posterior spi- 
 nal nerves and along the course of the sympathetic nerves. 
 
 Gangrenous, Mortification, partial death, or disorganization of any organ or limb. 
 
 Gestation, The act or period of carrying young. 
 
 Gibbosity, Curvature of the spine — relating to rickets and caries of the vertebrse. 
 
 Glands, Organized bodies, situated internally and externally, to secrete fluids or mo- 
 dify those of others. 
 
 Glandular, Of the form or texture of glands. 
 
 Globate, Like a globe. 
 
 Glottis, The opening of the windpipe or larynx — serving in the formation of the voice. 
 
 Glossopharyngeal, Belonging to the tongue and pharynx. 
 
 H 
 
 Hectic, Fever, preternatural irritability, febrile excitement, with emaciation. 
 Hemiplegia, Paralysis of a part or one side of the body. 
 Hemorrhage, A violent or unnatural flux of blood. 
 Hcemoptysis, Hemorrhage from the lungs. 
 Homogeneous, Of the same nature — similarity of parts. 
 Hydriodates, Salts consisting of the hydriodic acid combined with an oxide. 
 Hydrocephalic, Relating to dropsy, or water on the brain. 
 Hyoideal, Relating to the es hyoides. 
 
 Hypertrophy, The state of a part in which nutrition is performed, with great or un- 
 natural activity. 
 
1S9 
 
 Inervation, Weakness — relaxation of the nervous power. 
 
 Increments, Increases, additions, or productions. 
 
 Inosculate, Inter-union of the extremities of arteries, veins, &c. — to unite by contact 
 
 Infinitesimal, Indefinitely small quantity. 
 
 Inter cerebral. Between the hemispheres, or parts of the brain. 
 
 Intercostal, Between the ribs. 
 
 Integument, The skin, an envelope, bark, a covering. 
 
 Interniembranotis, Between the membranes. 
 
 Inguinal, Relating or belonging to the groin. 
 
 Involuntary Muscles, Those performing their functions without the aid of the will. 
 
 Iodine, A violet colored liquid, obtained by burning a marine plant and the ashes 
 
 with sulphuric acid. 
 Iris, The variegated circle surrounding the pupil of the eye. 
 
 Lamince, Thin plates or layers. 
 
 Laryngeal, Relating to the larynx. 
 
 Larynx, Upper part of the trachea or windpipe. 
 
 Leucorrhcea, A colored discharge from the membranes of the uterus, &c. 
 
 Leyden Jar, A glass vessel, covered with tin foil, for electrical purposes. 
 
 Ligamenta dentata, A small ligament supporting the spinal marrow. 
 
 Ligament, An elastic and strong membrane, connecting moveable bones, &c. 
 
 Lobes, Round projecting parts or divisions of organs — as of the brain, lungs, &c. 
 
 Locus JViger, Dark colored cells or spots. 
 
 Longus Colli, A flexor muscle of the neck. 
 
 Lumbar, Relating to the loins — five vertebrae of the third division of the spine. 
 
 Lymph, A clear fluid, found in the lymphatic vessels, mixing with the chyle and 
 
 blood. 
 Lymphatic Tubes, Small vessels of the body, containing or carrying lymph. 
 
 M 
 
 Maison de Sante, Sacred house, a hospital. 
 
 Mammalia, Animals which suckle their young. 
 
 Mammary, Pertaining to the breasts. 
 
 Manipulator, One practising by manual operations. 
 
 Marasmus, Consumption — destroying, a wasting disease. 
 
 Masseter, A strong muscle, closing the jaw in chewing. 
 
 Matity, Relating to sounds, afforded by the percussion of the chest. 
 
 Maxillary, Pertaining to the jaw bones. 
 
 Maximum and Minimum, The greatest and least — indicating the greatest and least 
 
 number, quantity, or power in any case. 
 Median, The middle line. 
 
190 
 
 Medinstinum, The fold of the membrane separating the chest into two parts. 
 
 Medulla, The marrow. 
 
 Medulla Oblongata, The union of the parts of the brain to form the spinal marrow. 
 
 Medulla Spinalis, The spinal marrow. 
 
 Membrane, A thin, expanded substance, composed of elastic fibres, interwoven like 
 network, covering and lining the organs of the body. 
 
 Menorrhagia, Excessive flow of the menses, or monthly hemorrhage. 
 
 Mercury, Quicksilver — a preparation of mercury by volatilization. 
 
 Messenteric, Relating to the messentarJ^ 
 
 Messentary, A double fold of the membrane lining the abdomen and covering the 
 intestines. 
 
 Meterologico-Medical, Diseases depending on the atmosphere or the weather. 
 
 Microscopic, Seen only by the microscope — an instrument for magnifying minute 
 objects. 
 
 Molecular, Small, diminutive, elementary parts. 
 
 Motor, Moving, prompting, or acting. 
 
 " Mouvements d'ejisemble,'" Combined movements. 
 
 Moxa, An application of cotton, wool, or other substance, which is burned on the 
 part intended to be cauterized. 
 
 Muco-serous, Partaking of the quality of mucus and serum, or of the mucous and 
 serous membranes. 
 
 Mucous, Of the nature of mucus. 
 
 Mucous rale. Rattle, or sounds produced by the air in breathing, passing through 
 mucus. 
 
 Mucus, A mucilage, a glutinous, thready semi-transparent fluid of a salt savor, pro- 
 duced in the mucous membranes. 
 
 Muriate, A salt formed by the combination of muriatic acid and a base, as soda, or 
 any of the earths or metals. 
 
 Muscles, Regular structure of fleshy bodies, composed of fibres, and adapted to dis- 
 tinct functions in all the varied motions of life. 
 
 N 
 
 JVaso palatine. Relating to the nose and palate. 
 
 JSlephrolgia, Pain or disease in the kidneys — belonging to the kidneys. 
 
 JVerves, Cords composed of filaments, conveying sensation, motion and will to and 
 
 from the brain. 
 JSTervous filament, A thread or fibre of a nerve. 
 JVitrate, A salt formed of nitric acid and an earth or a metal. 
 JVormal, Natural, by rule, upright. 
 
 J\'osologists, Those skilled in the classification of diseases. 
 JSPurilema, The investing sheath of the nerves. 
 JVutation, Tremulous motion of the earth's axis. 
 JKux vomica. The vomic nut of India. 
 
 o 
 
 (Edematous, Relating to a swelling from a serous fluid in the cellular texture. 
 Olfactory, Belonging to the organs of smell — sense of smelling. 
 Olivary, Belonging to the two prominences on the medulla oblongata. 
 
101 
 
 Ophthalmic, Relating to the eye. 
 Os coxyx. The lowest bone of the sacrum. 
 
 Os sacrum. The fundamental bone of the spinal column; of pyramidal form, base up- 
 ward. 
 Os hyoides. The bone forming the base and support of the tongue. 
 Oxyde, A rust or substance, formed by the combination of oxygen and a metal. 
 
 Panacea, Universal remedy for human diseases. 
 
 Pancreas, A large gland, secreting a kind of saliva and pouring it into tlie duode- 
 num — the sweet bread. 
 Papillary, Having ernulgent vessels, or resemblances of paps. 
 
 Par vagum. Eighth pair of nerves. 
 
 Paralysis, Palsy, prostration of nervous power. 
 
 Parietal, The two bones of the lateral and upper parts of the skull. 
 
 Pathology, The part of medicine relating to diseases, their causes, effects, and pecu- 
 liarities. 
 Patulous, Of the form of lips, or an extended flower. 
 
 Peripheral, Of a round form — relating to the circumference. • 
 
 Peritoneum, A serous membrane lining the abdominal cavity. 
 
 Pericardium, A membranous sack envelopeing the heart. 
 
 Periosteum, A white fibrous membrane surrounding the bones. 
 
 Pharmacopice, Medical dispensatory, formulae of compounding medicines, the rules 
 or book of pharmacy. * 
 
 Photographic, The art of producing impressions on metallic plates by the sun's rays. 
 
 Phrenic, Relating to the mind. 
 
 Phrenologists, Students and advocates of the physiology of the brain and nervous sys- 
 tem, as propounded by Gall, Spurzheim, and others, and on which is now based 
 a clear and beautiful system of mental philosophy. 
 
 Physiology, The science of organic life, the natural constitution and functions of or- 
 gans, animal and vegetable. 
 
 Pia mater, A thin membrane immediately investing the brain. 
 
 Platina, A greyish white metal, heavier and more durable than gold. 
 
 Plexuses, Junctions of vessels, nerves or fibres, representing net work. 
 
 Pleum, Fulness, fleshy, large. 
 
 Pneumatica, Pertaining to breathing. 
 
 Potassa, Potash — a vegetable alkali. 
 
 Premier mobile. First cause, principal or impulse. 
 
 Premier moteur. First motive, or impulse to action. 
 
 Prolapsis uteri, A falling down of the uterus. 
 
 Psoas, Two muscles situated on the lumbar and dorsal vertebrae. 
 
 Pterygoids, Two processes, or wings of the sphenoid bone. 
 
 Pyramidal, Of the form of a pyramid. 
 
 Pulmonary catarrh. Inflammation of the membrane lining the inside of the air tubes; 
 of the lungs. 
 
 Picrutent, Matter— pus. 
 
193 
 
 Q 
 
 Quinine, An alkaline substance, obtained from the cinchonas, valuable bitter barks 
 from South America 
 
 R 
 
 Rachitis, Curvature of the spine — the rickets. 
 
 Rectilinear, Straight, in straight lines. 
 
 Rectus externus. Muscle attached to the foramen opticum and the sphenoid bone. 
 
 RemoUissenient, Branching like boughs — small sprigs. 
 
 Renal, Relating to the kidneys. 
 
 Restiform columns. Parts of the brain. 
 
 Retina, A delicate and sensitive nervous membrane (considered an extension of the 
 
 optic nerve,) on which the images of objects are received. 
 Rodentia. Gnawers — a class of animals which gnaw their food; as the rat, beaver, 
 
 squirrel, &c. 
 Ruminating, A class of animals which chew the cud — reflecting. 
 
 s 
 
 Sacral, Relating to the sacrum — a bone forming the posterior part of the pelvis. 
 
 SaHvary, Belonging to the glands secreting saliva or spittle. 
 
 Sanative, Povvef of healing — healtliful. 
 
 Sanguineous, Relating to or indicating a fullness of blood; tinged with blood. 
 
 Sarsaparilla, The name of a sudorific plant of medicinal virtue. 
 
 Scirrhous, Pertaining to scirrhus — a disease of the glandular structures, and known 
 
 by its hardness, &c. 
 Sclerotica, A hard white membrane covering the globe of the eye. 
 Scrofula, A depravation of the humors of the body breaking out in sores. 
 Secretion, The process of secreting from the blood, or from one fluid to another by 
 
 the glands. 
 Semiluna, A semicircular, or half moon shape. 
 Semi-paraplegia, A partial palsy of the lower half of the body with the rectum and 
 
 bladder. 
 Sensorum commune. Centre of sensations — the cerebrum. 
 Sensory, The seat of sensation or of perception. 
 
 Sequestration, The separation of a diseased or dead part from the living. 
 Seious, Partaking of serum — exudations from serous membranes. 
 Serum, A thin and yellowish part of the blood — whey. 
 Seton, An issue or rowell. 
 
 Spheroidal, Having the form of an oblong or oblate body. 
 Spenoid bone, A wedged shaped bone at the base of the skull. 
 Spheno-palatine, Muscles of the palate. 
 Spinal marrow. The medullary substance of the spine. 
 Spinal, Belonging to the backbone or spine 
 Splanchnic, Relating to the diseases of the bowels, or to the three cavities of the 
 
 viscera, the bowels, head and chest. 
 
193 
 
 Spleen, The milt, one of the viscera of the bcdy — anger, spite, melancholy. 
 
 Spongoles, Sponges, substancfs like sponges. 
 
 Sponianiety , Voluntariness, willingness. 
 
 Sternum, The breastbone. 
 
 Stethescope, An instrument used for determining by sound the diseases of the chest. 
 
 Sthenic, Excessive excitement, or excess of strength in organic actions. 
 
 Striated, Fibrous, channelled, radiated. 
 
 Strumous, Scrofulous — pertaining to st>-uma, the king's evil. 
 
 Sty/o glossal. Muscles expanding the tongue. 
 
 Submaxillary, Under or below the jaw bone. 
 
 Sulcus, Groove — as on the end of bones and other organs, and in the interstices of 
 
 the brain. 
 Sulphate, A salt formed of sulphuric acid and an ear'h, &c. 
 Supra and infra orbita. Situated above and below the orbits of the eye. 
 Syphilis, An infectious or poisonous disease, communicated by virus and contact, as 
 
 in coition. 
 Sympathetic, Relating to, depending on sympathy — the action and reaction of one 
 
 part or organ on another. 
 Synovial, Pertaining to synovia — a fluid like the white of an egg, exhaled from 
 
 membranes around the joints. 
 
 Tactile, Perceptable to the touch. 
 
 Tactual, Relating to touch and tact 
 
 Tegumentary, Belonging to the outer parts — the skin or covering. 
 
 Telia cellulosa, The cellular or adipose membrane 
 
 Temporal, Relating to the temple. 
 
 Temperament, The constitution, or the remarkable differences of men, arising from 
 the peculiarities of organization, relations and constituents. 
 
 Tetannic, Relating to a permanent contraction of the muscles. 
 
 Thalamus, The place where a nerve originates — an irregular surface in the ventri- 
 cles of the brain. 
 
 Thalmi optici, Two round bodies in the brain. 
 
 Thoractic, Belonging to the chest or breast. 
 
 Thyroid, Having the form of a shield — belonging to the larynx. 
 
 Tibia, Shin bone — flute or hautboy. 
 
 Tissues, The parts of the body which forms the organs — the anatomical elements of 
 the body, and of its diseases. 
 
 Tonsil, Glands in the throat — almonds of the ear. 
 
 Trachea, Windpipe — composed of cartilaginous rings. 
 
 Trigeminus, The fifth pair of nerves. 
 
 Trisplanchnic, Belonging to the three orders of viscera in the three splanchnic cavi- 
 ties — the head, chest, and abdomen. 
 
 Tubercular, Relating to tubercula. 
 
 Tubercles, Tumors in the substance of organs. 
 
 Tumijied, Of the form and nature of tumor or swelling. 
 
 Tympanum, The drum or barrel of the ear. 
 
 Typhoid, Relating to typhus , as typhoid or typhus fever. 
 
 25 
 
194 
 
 U 
 
 Uterus, The womb. 
 
 Uvula, Pap of the throat, belonging to the palate. 
 
 V 
 
 Vascular, Relating to, or consisting of vessels — arterial venous or lymphatic. 
 
 Vesicles, Vessels, b;igs, or bladders. 
 
 Ventricle, Cavities in the brain, the lower right and left cavities of the heart. 
 
 Vertebrated animals. Those having a spine or skeleton. 
 
 Vermiform, Resembling a worm. 
 
 Villi, Delicate tibres on parts of the body, as on the lips, &,c. 
 
 Villous, Pertaining to villi. 
 
 Virus, Poison, infectious secretion. 
 
 Viscus, {Viscera, pi.) One of the viscera. 
 
 Vivi sectors. Those practising dissections on living animals. 
 
 Volition, The will, the act of willing or determining by choice. 
 
 Voluntary muscles, Those acting from the will. 
 
 Zoophyta, The class of organic beings partaking of both animal and vegetable life. 
 Zygomatic, Relating to the zygoma or cheek bone. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Preface 3 
 
 Contents 9 
 
 Objects of physiology 11 
 
 Nervous system 15 
 
 Cerebrum or brain proper 15 
 
 Cerebellum 20 
 
 Medulla oblongata 23 
 
 Spinal marrow 25 
 
 Nerves — of motion — of sensation — of the three senses 31 
 
 Ganglionic system , 38 
 
 Recapitulation 40 
 
 Base of the brain and cerebellum 42 
 
 Hemispheres of the brain 44 
 
 Cerebellum and its connection with the cerebrum 45 
 
 Horizontal section of the brain 46 
 
 Ventricles of the brain 48 
 
 Decussation of the fibres of the pyramidal bodies. 48 
 
 Great inferior ganglion, fibres in the surface of 49 
 
 Section of the great inferior ganglion 50 
 
 Diverging fibres of the brain 51 
 
 Structure of the convolutions 52 
 
 Converging fibres of the brain ib 
 
 Relation between the structure and the functions of the brain 57 
 
 Ganglionic system of vegetative life 65 
 
 Ganglionic system of phrenic life 69 
 
 Disposition of the different kinds of matter of the brain 70 
 
 Diverging and converging forces ib 
 
 Excreting system 71 
 
 Galvanic battery 74 
 
 Poles of the brain ib 
 
 Secreting system 76 
 
 Secreting and excreting systems of vegetable life 79 
 
 Convolutions, form and developement of 81 
 
 Sensation and motion ib 
 
 Lecture of M. Broussais on the cerebellum 82 
 
 Application of the motive power of the human system to determine the character of a 
 
 large class of chronic diseases 96 
 
 !Motion of the magnetic forces along the spinal nerves ib 
 
 Magnetic symptoms 97 
 
 Cause of the symptoms - 103 
 
 Causes of the tuberculations of the organs and limbs r . .107 
 
 Influence of meteorological phenomena 108 
 
 Influence of the diurnal and annual revolutions of the earth 110 
 
 Magnetism of the human system and of the medium which surrounds it ib 
 
196 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Earth magnetised geometrically 110 
 
 Sun a magnetised body ib 
 
 Spiral motions of the magnetic poles Ill 
 
 Revolution of the ocean ib 
 
 Geological strata of the earth ib 
 
 Revolution of the earth's axis ib 
 
 Cause of the great changes in the climate and in the vegetable and animal kingdoms. 112 
 
 Earth approaching the sun ib 
 
 Pythagoras and Copernicus 113 
 
 Motions of the planets and their satellites ib 
 
 General deluge ib 
 
 Ancient temples ib 
 
 Temple of Belus 114 
 
 Broussais, Alexander, Pythias ib 
 
 Motion of the earth's axis ib 
 
 Form of the earth ib 
 
 Maximum amount of depression at the poles, and of protrusion at the equator ib 
 
 Amount of depression at the poles and protrusion at the equator in 1837 ib 
 
 Periods of the different ages ib 
 
 Present age 115 
 
 Observations of the Babylonians, Egyptians, and Hindoos ib 
 
 Angle of the earth's axis with the plane of the ecliptic ib 
 
 Motion of the earth on its axis and in its orbit, increasing ib 
 
 Diameter of the circle in which the terrestrial pole moves round the mean pole ib 
 
 Obliquity of the ecliptic ib 
 
 Angle of the moon's axis with the plane of its orbit, increasing in an increasing ratio. 116 
 
 Average heat of the earth, and average age of man, increasing ib 
 
 Great changes in the temperature and constitution of the atmosphere ib 
 
 Great changes in diseases in different periods of time ib 
 
 Changes in the treatment of diseases ib 
 
 Amount and rate of rise and fall of the ocean in the different latitudes 117 
 
 Currents of the ocean ib 
 
 Strata of the earth containing remains of organic life — history of — number of — 
 
 length of their periods 181 
 
 Primitive or chrystalline period 183 
 
 Primitive strata devoid of organic remains ib 
 
 Age of the earth from the commencement of the first to the end of the sixth period. .. ib 
 
 Seventh period ib 
 
 Decay of the earth, and progress in it ib 
 
 Remedies for tubercular diseases 118 
 
 Directions for using the remedies 123 
 
 Observations on the use of the remedies in different cases 125 
 
 Cases of tubercular disease of the organs 131 
 
 Cases of tubcrcula of the Spine 159 
 
 Cases of tubercula of the joints and limbs 170 
 
 Color of the skin in chronic tubercula 179 
 
 Appendix 181 
 
 Glossary 185 
 
u 
 
 RETURN TO the circulation desk of any 
 University of Caiifornia Library 
 or to tlie 
 NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 BIdg. 400, Richmond Field Station 
 University of California 
 Richmond, CA 94804-4698 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 • 2-month loans may be renewed by calling 
 (510)642-6753 
 
 • 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing 
 books to NRLF 
 
 • Renewals and recharges may be made 4 
 days prior to due date. 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 J4 
 
 I 
 
 ^f^Jil:20Q0 
 
 \y 
 
 12,000(11/95) 
 
 FORM NO. DD6 
 
 V,. ,. » urxvji t I wrv^MLiruKINIA, BbKKtLEY 
 BERKELEY, CA 94720 
 
/fA 
 
!•;! 
 
 "'in 
 
 
 lilllilliill 
 
 nnbiiiiMiiiujunMiiin 
 
 !!